Docstoc

SAP ISU

Document Sample
SAP ISU Powered By Docstoc
					IUT110 Introduction to the IS-U/CCS System
IUT110




Release 463 25.09.2003
IUT110 Introduction to the IS-U/CCS System..................................................................................................................1
   Copyright.......................................................................................................................................................................2
      SAP Utilities (IS-U/CCS)..........................................................................................................................................4
      Course Prerequisites...................................................................................................................................................5
      Target Group..............................................................................................................................................................6
      Course Goals..............................................................................................................................................................7
      Course Objectives......................................................................................................................................................8
      Course Content...........................................................................................................................................................9
   IS-U/CCS: Overview.....................................................................................................................................................1
      IS-U/CCS Overview: Unit Objectives.......................................................................................................................2
      IS-U Overview: Business Scenario............................................................................................................................3
      mySAP.com: Overview.............................................................................................................................................4
      Workplace Internet Business Framework..................................................................................................................5
      mySAP Utilities: The Comprehensive Solution........................................................................................................6
      Customer Relationship Management (CRM)............................................................................................................7
      Business Information Warehouse (BW)....................................................................................................................8
      Functional Scope of the IS-U System........................................................................................................................9
      Integrated and Open System Landscape..................................................................................................................10
      IS-U/CCS Business Processes.................................................................................................................................11
      Synchronized Business Objects...............................................................................................................................12
      Marketing and Sales Process...................................................................................................................................13
      System Infrastructure CRM, BW and mySAP Utilities..........................................................................................14
      IS-U/CCS - Integration Model.................................................................................................................................15
      The Strengths of mySAP Utilities............................................................................................................................16
      Solutions for the New Industry Market Model........................................................................................................17
      Deregulated Market: Business Perspective..............................................................................................................18
      Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (1).....................................................................................................................19
      Sales Processing.......................................................................................................................................................20
      Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (2).....................................................................................................................21
      Internet Self Services: Start Page.............................................................................................................................22
      What is Energy Data Management?........................................................................................................................23
      Energy Data Management 1.....................................................................................................................................24
      Energy Data Management 2.....................................................................................................................................25
      IS-U Overview: Unit Summary...............................................................................................................................26
   CIC.................................................................................................................................................................................1
      CIC: Unit Objectives..................................................................................................................................................2
      CIC: Business Scenario..............................................................................................................................................3
      The IS-U House.........................................................................................................................................................4
      Various Business Partners..........................................................................................................................................5
   Roles of the Business Partner....................................................................................................................................6
   Business Partner Data................................................................................................................................................7
   Contract Account Data...............................................................................................................................................8
   Collective Bills...........................................................................................................................................................9
   Contract Data...........................................................................................................................................................10
   Connection Object Data...........................................................................................................................................11
   Premise Data............................................................................................................................................................12
   Installation Data.......................................................................................................................................................13
   Point of Delivery Data.............................................................................................................................................14
   Business Objects in IS-U/CCS.................................................................................................................................15
   What Is a Customer Interaction Center?..................................................................................................................16
   Customer Interaction Center: Requirements............................................................................................................17
   Integration with External Communication Systems................................................................................................18
   The IS-U/CCS Customer Interaction Center...........................................................................................................19
   Customer Interaction Center (L-Shaped).................................................................................................................20
   Workflow Inbox.......................................................................................................................................................21
   E-Mail and Fax in the Workflow Inbox...................................................................................................................22
   Typical Uses of the CIC: Identification...................................................................................................................23
   Typical Uses of the CIC: Information.....................................................................................................................24
   Typical Uses of the CIC: Front Office Process.......................................................................................................25
   Front Office Processes.............................................................................................................................................26
   Typical Uses of the CIC: Workflow........................................................................................................................27
   Using R/3 Workflow: Changing a Rate (Example).................................................................................................28
   Typical Uses of the CIC: Customer Contact............................................................................................................29
   Contact Management in Customer Service..............................................................................................................30
   Customer Contact Data............................................................................................................................................31
   CIC: Unit Summary.................................................................................................................................................32
   Customer Interaction Center Exercises....................................................................................................................33
   Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Solutions..........................................................................................................44
Move-In/Out..................................................................................................................................................................1
   Move-In/Out: Unit Objectives...................................................................................................................................2
   Move In/Out: Business Scenario...............................................................................................................................3
   Move-In Definition....................................................................................................................................................4
   Move-In: Prerequisites...............................................................................................................................................5
   Move-In: Business Master Data.................................................................................................................................6
   The Move-In Process.................................................................................................................................................7
   Move-In: Options for Processing...............................................................................................................................8
   Move-In: The IS-U House.........................................................................................................................................9
   Move-Out: Business Scenario..................................................................................................................................10
   The Move-Out Process............................................................................................................................................11
   Options for Move-Out Processing...........................................................................................................................12
   Move In/Out: Business Scenario.............................................................................................................................13
   The Move-In/Out Process........................................................................................................................................14
   Options in Move-In/Out Processing........................................................................................................................15
   Move-In: Master Data..............................................................................................................................................16
   No Changes to Installation Data..............................................................................................................................17
   Installation History...................................................................................................................................................18
   Move-In/Out: Unit Summary...................................................................................................................................19
   Move-In/Out Exercises............................................................................................................................................20
   Move-In/Out Solutions............................................................................................................................................28
Work Management.........................................................................................................................................................1
   Work Management: Unit Objectives.........................................................................................................................2
   What Areas does the Work Management System Cover?.........................................................................................3
   Utility Management Services.....................................................................................................................................4
   Work Management: Technical Objects.....................................................................................................................5
   Overview of Technical Objects.................................................................................................................................6
   Supply Grid................................................................................................................................................................7
   Connection Object.....................................................................................................................................................8
   Work Management: Services.....................................................................................................................................9
   Installation Services.................................................................................................................................................10
   Basic Structure of a Work Order.............................................................................................................................11
   Sequence of Order Processing.................................................................................................................................12
   Service Product: Concept.........................................................................................................................................13
   Service Product: Create Service Connection...........................................................................................................14
   The Installation Services Process.............................................................................................................................15
   Create Service Connection.......................................................................................................................................17
   Work Management: Interfaces.................................................................................................................................18
   Possible Configuration of an Interface Scenario.....................................................................................................19
   Technical Objects in Work Management and GIS..................................................................................................20
   Device Repairs.........................................................................................................................................................21
   Work Management: Unit Summary.........................................................................................................................22
   Work Management Exercises..................................................................................................................................23
   Work Management Solutions..................................................................................................................................24
Device Technology........................................................................................................................................................1
   Device Technology: Unit Objectives.........................................................................................................................2
   Demands on Device Management.............................................................................................................................3
   Device Management: Business Scenario...................................................................................................................4
   Device Technology: Device Category.......................................................................................................................5
   The Device and the Device Category........................................................................................................................6
   Modeling of Devices..................................................................................................................................................7
   Integration with Logistics..........................................................................................................................................8
   Definition of Device Category...................................................................................................................................9
   Device Category Data..............................................................................................................................................10
   Possible Elements of the Device Category..............................................................................................................11
   Device Category: Device and Register....................................................................................................................12
   Definition of Devices...............................................................................................................................................13
   Device Data..............................................................................................................................................................14
   Definition of a Register............................................................................................................................................15
   Register Data............................................................................................................................................................16
   Device Technology: Device Lifecycle.....................................................................................................................17
   Central Data Objects - Integration in Logistics.......................................................................................................18
   Device Life Cycle....................................................................................................................................................19
   Documentation for the Device Lifecycle.................................................................................................................20
   Device Technology: Device Inspection...................................................................................................................21
   Introduction: Device Inspection and Certification...................................................................................................22
   Certification Procedures Overview..........................................................................................................................23
   Certification Procedure............................................................................................................................................24
   Sampling Procedure.................................................................................................................................................25
   Inspection Using the Sampling Procedure...............................................................................................................26
   Periodic Replacement..............................................................................................................................................27
   Device Technology: Unit Summary........................................................................................................................28
   Device Technology Exercises..................................................................................................................................29
   Device Technology Solutions..................................................................................................................................32
Device Installation.........................................................................................................................................................1
   Device Installation: Unit Objectives..........................................................................................................................2
   Device Installation: Business Scenario......................................................................................................................3
   Installation: Installation, Removal And Replacement...............................................................................................4
   Business Scenario: Replacement of Sample Devices................................................................................................5
   Service Order Execution: Determining the Device Location....................................................................................6
   Definition of the Device Location.............................................................................................................................7
   Device Location Data................................................................................................................................................8
   Relationships Between Technical Objects.................................................................................................................9
   Service Order Execution: Device Replacement & Service Order Confirmation.....................................................10
   Data Changes: Installation Location........................................................................................................................11
   Data Changes: Device Replacement........................................................................................................................12
   Technical and Billing-Related Installation..............................................................................................................14
   Installation: Installation Structure............................................................................................................................15
   Example of an Installation Structure........................................................................................................................16
   Technical Installation Structure...............................................................................................................................17
   Billing-Related Installation Structure......................................................................................................................18
   Device Installation: Summary..................................................................................................................................19
   Device Installation Exercises...................................................................................................................................20
   Device Installation Solutions...................................................................................................................................23
Meter Reading................................................................................................................................................................1
   Meter Reading: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................................2
   Meter Reading: Business Scenario............................................................................................................................3
   Meter Reading: Meter Reading Organization............................................................................................................4
   Types of Meter Reading.............................................................................................................................................5
   Regional Structure and Scheduling............................................................................................................................6
   Scheduling Tasks.......................................................................................................................................................7
   Portions and Meter Reading Units.............................................................................................................................8
   Generation of Schedule Records................................................................................................................................9
   Scheduling: Annual Billing......................................................................................................................................10
   Meter Reading Organization: Street Route..............................................................................................................11
   Meter Reading: Process...........................................................................................................................................12
   Overview: Scheduled Meter Reading......................................................................................................................13
   Creating Meter Reading Orders...............................................................................................................................14
   Issuing the Meter Reading Orders...........................................................................................................................15
   Types of Result Entry..............................................................................................................................................16
   Result Entry Data.....................................................................................................................................................17
   Checking Meter Reading Results: Overview...........................................................................................................18
   Check Meter Reading Results: Process...................................................................................................................19
   Monitoring Meter Readings.....................................................................................................................................20
   Meter Reading: Special Functions:..........................................................................................................................21
   Meter Reading by Customers over the Internet.......................................................................................................22
   Meter Reading by Customer over WAP Telephone................................................................................................23
   Reversing Meter Reading Orders: Process..............................................................................................................24
   Meter Reading: Unit Summary................................................................................................................................25
   Meter Reading: Exercises........................................................................................................................................26
   Meter Reading: Solutions........................................................................................................................................27
Energy Data Management..............................................................................................................................................1
   Profile Management: Unit Objectives.......................................................................................................................2
   Profile Management: Business Scenario...................................................................................................................3
   Profile Header............................................................................................................................................................4
   Profile Allocation for Register...................................................................................................................................5
   Point of Delivery........................................................................................................................................................6
   Importing Profile Values............................................................................................................................................7
   Profile Values.............................................................................................................................................................8
   Formula Profile..........................................................................................................................................................9
   Synthetic Profiles.....................................................................................................................................................10
   Profile Management: Summary...............................................................................................................................11
Billing and Invoicing.....................................................................................................................................................1
   Billing and Invoicing: Course Objectives..................................................................................................................2
   Billing........................................................................................................................................................................3
   Billing: Introduction...................................................................................................................................................4
   Billing: Business Scenario.........................................................................................................................................5
   IS-U/CCS: Billing......................................................................................................................................................6
   Billing Procedures: Overview....................................................................................................................................7
   Definition of Billing...................................................................................................................................................8
   Billing Tasks..............................................................................................................................................................9
   Billing Periods.........................................................................................................................................................10
   Forms of Billing.......................................................................................................................................................11
   Special Forms of Billing..........................................................................................................................................12
   Generation of Schedule Records..............................................................................................................................13
   Billing Process: Overview.......................................................................................................................................14
   Universal Billing Engine..........................................................................................................................................15
   General Billing Functions........................................................................................................................................16
   Example: Billing Rule for Electricity......................................................................................................................17
   Special Billing Functions.........................................................................................................................................18
   Billing and Simulation.............................................................................................................................................19
   Simulation Types.....................................................................................................................................................20
   Document Types......................................................................................................................................................21
   Document Information.............................................................................................................................................22
   Further Processing of Documents............................................................................................................................23
   Outsorting Procedure...............................................................................................................................................24
   Outsorting Process...................................................................................................................................................25
   Billing Reversal.......................................................................................................................................................26
   Billing Reversal Process..........................................................................................................................................27
   Billing: Unit Summary.............................................................................................................................................28
   Invoicing: Introduction............................................................................................................................................29
   Invoicing: Business Scenario...................................................................................................................................30
   Definition of Invoicing............................................................................................................................................31
   Invoicing: Overview................................................................................................................................................32
   Tasks of Invoicing....................................................................................................................................................33
   Invoicing Units.........................................................................................................................................................34
   Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 1......................................................................................................................35
   Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 2......................................................................................................................36
   Invoicing Options.....................................................................................................................................................37
   Source of Billing Documents...................................................................................................................................38
   Invoicing Various Services......................................................................................................................................39
   Cross-company code invoicing................................................................................................................................40
   Bill Due Date...........................................................................................................................................................41
   Document Flow in Invoicing...................................................................................................................................42
   Settlement: Overview...............................................................................................................................................43
   Bill Printout Procedure............................................................................................................................................44
   Invoicing Reversal...................................................................................................................................................45
   Procedure for Bill Reversal......................................................................................................................................46
   Procedure for Full Reversal.....................................................................................................................................47
   Invoicing: Unit Summary........................................................................................................................................48
   Billing and Invoicing Exercises...............................................................................................................................49
   Billing and invoicing Solutions...............................................................................................................................58
Billing Master Data........................................................................................................................................................1
   Billing Master Data: Unit Objectives........................................................................................................................2
   Billing Master Data: Overview..................................................................................................................................3
   Billing Master Data: Introduction..............................................................................................................................4
   Billing Master Data: Business Scenario....................................................................................................................5
   Billing of Utility Services..........................................................................................................................................6
   Business Objects: Rate Allocation.............................................................................................................................7
   Rate Allocation: Overview........................................................................................................................................8
   Billing Class I............................................................................................................................................................9
   Rate Category I........................................................................................................................................................10
   Rate Category II.......................................................................................................................................................11
   Definition of Rate Type...........................................................................................................................................12
   Business Objects: Rate Structure.............................................................................................................................13
   Rate..........................................................................................................................................................................14
   Example: Billing Rule for Electricity......................................................................................................................15
   Rate Structure...........................................................................................................................................................16
   Rate Data..................................................................................................................................................................17
   Data for the Rate Step..............................................................................................................................................18
   Structure of the Fact Group......................................................................................................................................20
   Operand Data...........................................................................................................................................................21
   Operand Categories/Examples.................................................................................................................................22
   Rate Determination - Operands...............................................................................................................................23
   Allocation of Operand Values.................................................................................................................................24
   Schema 1..................................................................................................................................................................25
   Schema 2..................................................................................................................................................................26
   Price Categories.......................................................................................................................................................27
   Price Types...............................................................................................................................................................28
   Rate Determination..................................................................................................................................................29
   Rate Structure...........................................................................................................................................................30
   Discounts / Surcharges.............................................................................................................................................31
   Billing Master Data: Unit Summary........................................................................................................................32
   Exercises: Billing Master Data................................................................................................................................33
   Billing Master Data Solutions..................................................................................................................................36
Real-Time-Pricing..........................................................................................................................................................1
   Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Objectives..........................................................................................................................2
   Real-Time-Pricing:Business Scenario.......................................................................................................................3
   RTP Overview...........................................................................................................................................................4
   RTP interface.............................................................................................................................................................5
   RTP-Billing................................................................................................................................................................6
   Example.....................................................................................................................................................................7
   Data Model for Billing...............................................................................................................................................8
   Interface.....................................................................................................................................................................9
   Input Parameters......................................................................................................................................................10
   Calculation...............................................................................................................................................................11
   Result.......................................................................................................................................................................12
   Transfer of Results to RTP Operand........................................................................................................................13
   Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Summary..........................................................................................................................14
Budget Billings..............................................................................................................................................................1
   Budget Billing: Unit Objectives.................................................................................................................................2
   Budget Billing: Business Scenario.............................................................................................................................3
   Budget Billing Procedure: Overview.........................................................................................................................4
   Payment Plan Categories...........................................................................................................................................5
   Budget Billing Plan: Overview..................................................................................................................................6
   Creating / Adjusting Budget Billing Plans.................................................................................................................7
   Quantity-Based Extrapolation....................................................................................................................................8
   Budget Billing Amounts Due.....................................................................................................................................9
   Budget Billings: Summary.......................................................................................................................................10
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable..................................................................................................................1
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Unit Objectives...................................................................................2
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Overview.............................................................................................3
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Business Scenario...............................................................................4
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payableand FI-CA.............................................................................................5
FI-CA Has An Open Architecture.............................................................................................................................6
Special Features of FI-CA.........................................................................................................................................7
Central Objects in FI-CA...........................................................................................................................................8
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Business Transactions.........................................................................9
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Posting Documents...........................................................................10
Posting Documents: Objectives...............................................................................................................................11
Posting Documents: Introduction............................................................................................................................12
Posting Documents: Business Scenario...................................................................................................................13
Documents in Contract Accounts Receivableand Payable......................................................................................14
General Document Data...........................................................................................................................................15
Document Data: Reference and Currency...............................................................................................................16
Document Data: Link to General Ledger Accounting.............................................................................................17
Document Data: Entry Control................................................................................................................................18
Data on Business Partner Item.................................................................................................................................19
Data on G/L Account Item.......................................................................................................................................20
Manual Document Entry: Items...............................................................................................................................21
Transactions in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable...................................................................................22
Examples of Transactions........................................................................................................................................23
Transfer to General Ledger Accounting..................................................................................................................24
Summary Record.....................................................................................................................................................25
Posting Documents: Summary (1)...........................................................................................................................26
Posting Documents: Summary (2)...........................................................................................................................27
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Account Display...............................................................................28
Account Display: Objectives...................................................................................................................................29
Account Display: Introduction.................................................................................................................................30
Account Display: Business Scenario.......................................................................................................................31
Account Display: Initial Screen...............................................................................................................................32
Account Display: List Category...............................................................................................................................33
Account Display: Line Layout.................................................................................................................................34
Account Display: Navigating in the Document Display..........................................................................................35
Account Display: Summary (1)...............................................................................................................................36
Account Display: Summary (2)...............................................................................................................................37
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Payments...........................................................................................38
Payment Run: Objectives.........................................................................................................................................39
Payment Run: Introduction......................................................................................................................................40
Payment Run: Business Scenario.............................................................................................................................41
Automatic and Manual Payments............................................................................................................................42
Payment Lot.............................................................................................................................................................43
Payment Lot: Structure............................................................................................................................................44
Payment Lot: Structure............................................................................................................................................45
Payment Lot: Processing Steps................................................................................................................................46
Payment Lot: Create................................................................................................................................................47
Payment Lot: Create Items.......................................................................................................................................48
Payment Lot: Change...............................................................................................................................................49
Payment Lot: Close..................................................................................................................................................50
Payment Lot: Post....................................................................................................................................................51
Automatic Clearing: Process....................................................................................................................................52
Payment Lot: Post-processing..................................................................................................................................53
Payment at cash desk...............................................................................................................................................54
Clearing: Dialog Processing....................................................................................................................................55
Payment: Summary..................................................................................................................................................56
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Returns..............................................................................................57
Returns: Objectives..................................................................................................................................................58
Returns: Introduction...............................................................................................................................................59
Returns: Business Scenario......................................................................................................................................60
Returns: Influencing Factors....................................................................................................................................61
Returns: Activity Settings........................................................................................................................................62
Returns Lot: Processing Steps.................................................................................................................................63
Returns Lot: Create..................................................................................................................................................64
Returns Entry...........................................................................................................................................................65
Returns Lot: Change................................................................................................................................................66
Returns Lot: Close...................................................................................................................................................67
Returns Lot: Posting (1)...........................................................................................................................................68
Returns Lot: Posting (2)...........................................................................................................................................69
Returns Lot: Post-processing...................................................................................................................................70
Returns History........................................................................................................................................................71
Returns: Summary...................................................................................................................................................72
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Dunning............................................................................................73
Dunning: Objectives................................................................................................................................................74
Dunning: Introduction..............................................................................................................................................75
Dunning: Business Scenario....................................................................................................................................76
Dunning: Dunning Proposal and Dunning Activities..............................................................................................77
Dunning: Influential Factors....................................................................................................................................78
Dunning Proposal for a Business Partner................................................................................................................79
Dunning: Factors That Can Be Influenced (Selection)............................................................................................80
Dunning: Determination of Dunning Levels...........................................................................................................81
Dunning Levels........................................................................................................................................................82
Printing of Dunning Notice for a Business Partner.................................................................................................83
   Dunning: Dunning History......................................................................................................................................84
   Dunning: Summary..................................................................................................................................................85
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Deferral and Installment Plan...........................................................86
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Objectives...............................................................................................................87
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Introduction............................................................................................................88
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Business Scenario...................................................................................................89
   Deferral....................................................................................................................................................................90
   Installment Plan: Characteristics..............................................................................................................................91
   Installment Plan Category........................................................................................................................................92
   Installment Plan: Item Selection..............................................................................................................................93
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Unit Summary.........................................................................................................94
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Exercises............................................................................................95
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Solutions..........................................................................................108
Waste Industry...............................................................................................................................................................1
   Waste Industry: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................................2
   Solution Map and Integration Model for the Waste Industry....................................................................................3
   Integration Model for mySAP Waste Industry..........................................................................................................4
   mySAP Waste Industry : Involved Areas..................................................................................................................5
   Focus Areas of IS-Waste - Waste Industry................................................................................................................6
   Focus Areas of EH&S WA - Waste Management.....................................................................................................7
   The Waste Disposal Cycle with EH&S.....................................................................................................................8
   Data Model – Container Service (Simplified)...........................................................................................................9
   Technical Master Data I...........................................................................................................................................10
   Technical Master Data II.........................................................................................................................................11
   Technical Master Data III........................................................................................................................................12
   Container Management: Integration.......................................................................................................................13
   Interface to Route Planning System.........................................................................................................................14
   Waste Disposal Orders.............................................................................................................................................15
   Process: Container Delivery / Removal...................................................................................................................16
   Fleet Management....................................................................................................................................................17
   Implemented Functions I.........................................................................................................................................18
   Implemented Functions II........................................................................................................................................19
   Planned Functions for mySAP Utilities 4.64...........................................................................................................20
   Waste Industry: Summary........................................................................................................................................21
0
     IUT110 Introduction to the IS-U/CCS System




          IUT110
         Introduction to the
         IS-U/CCS System
          © SAP AG 1999




   R/3 System
   Release 4.63 / IS-Utilities/Customer Care Service
   August 2001
   5004 4795
0.2
     Copyright



          Copyright 2001 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
          Neither this training manual nor any part thereof may
          be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means,
          or translated into another language, without the prior
          consent of SAP AG. The information contained in this
          document is subject to change and supplement without prior
          notice.

          All rights reserved.




         © SAP AG 1999




   Microsoft ®, Windows ®, NT ®, PowerPoint ®, WinWord ®, Excel ®, Project ®, SQL-Server ®,
    Multimedia Viewer ®, Video for Windows ®, Internet Explorer ®, NetShow ®, and HTML Help ® are
    registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
   Lotus ScreenCam ® is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
   Vivo ® and VivoActive ® are registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc.
   ARIS Toolset ® is a registered Trademark of IDS Prof. Scheer GmbH, Saarbrücken
   Adobe ® and Acrobat ® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
   TouchSend Index ® is a registered trademark of TouchSend Corporation.
   Visio ® is a registered trademark of Visio Corporation.
   IBM ®, OS/2 ®, DB2/6000 ® and AIX ® are a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
   Indeo ® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
   Netscape Navigator ®, and Netscape Communicator ® are registered trademarks of Netscape
    Communications, Inc.
   OSF/Motif ® is a registered trademark of Open Software Foundation.
   ORACLE ® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation, California, USA.
   INFORMIX ®-OnLine for SAP is a registered trademark of Informix Software Incorporated.
   UNIX ® and X/Open ® are registered trademarks of SCO Santa Cruz Operation.
   ADABAS ® is a registered trademark of Software AG
   The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG; ABAP/4, InterSAP, RIVA, R/2, R/3,
    R/3 Retail, SAP (Word), SAPaccess, SAPfile, SAPfind, SAPmail, SAPoffice, SAPscript, SAPtime,
    SAPtronic, SAP-EDI, SAP EarlyWatch, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, and ALE/WEB.
  The SAP logo and all other SAP products, services, logos, or brand names included herein are also
  trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG.
 Other products, services, logos, or brand names included herein are trademarks or registered trademarks
  of their respective owners.
0.3
  SAP Utilities (IS-U/CCS)

           Level 2                                       Level 3
                                                         IUT220         3 days    IUT225        2 days
                                                                                  Energy Data
                                                         Device Management
                                                                                  Management
                                                         IUT221          3 days

                                                         Work Management

      IUT110            5 days   IUT210         3 days   IUT230          5 days   IUT235        2 days
      Introduction to the IS-    Basic Data/ Basic                                Real Time Pricing
                                                         Billing and Invoicing
      U/CCS                      Functions
                                                         IUT240         5 days
                                                         Contract Accounts
                                                         Receivable and
                                                         Payable
                                                         IUT250         4 days

                                                         Customer Service

                                                         IUT280          2 days

                                                         Print Workbench



        © SAP AG 1999
0.4
  Course Prerequisites



        Basic knowledge of SAP
         (For example, course SAP020: SAP R/3 Overview)
        Knowledge of business processes in a utility company
        Basic knowledge of the Windows environment




      © SAP AG 1999
0.5
  Target Group



        Participants
                 Decision makers using IS-U to support business processes
                 Project managers responsible for implementing IS-U
                 Project team modeling business processes with IS-U
                 Administrators optimizing processes in the IS-U environment
                 Consultants preparing for IS-U implementation
        Duration
                 5 days




      © SAP AG 1999
0.6
  Course Goals



                      This course will prepare you to:

                       Recognize how IS-U is integrated in the R/3
                        environment
                       Outline business processes in IS-U
                       Use and efficiently implement IS-U




      © SAP AG 1999
0.7
  Course Objectives



                      At the conclusion of this course, you will be
                      able to:

                       Describe the integration of IS-U in R/3
                       Perform the core business processes of IS-U
                       Explain the structure and processes of IS-U




      © SAP AG 1999
0.8
     Course Content



                    Preface

       Unit 1       IS-U/CCS Overview     Unit 8    Energy Data Management
       Unit 2       CIC                   Unit 9    Billing & Invoicing
       Unit 3       Move-In/Out           Unit 10   Billing Master Data
       Unit 4:      Work Management       Unit 11   Real-Time Pricing
       Unit 5       Device Technology     Unit 12   Budget Billings
       Unit 6       Device Installation   Unit 13   Contract Accounts
                                                    Receivable and Payable
       Unit 7       Meter Reading
                                          Unit 14   Waste Disposal Industry

                    Appendix


         © SAP AG 1999




   CIC: Customer Interaction Center
1
    IS-U/CCS: Overview



        Contents:

         Integration of IS-U/CCS in standard SAP components
         Incorporation of IS-U/CCS into the core business processes of
          a utility company in regulated and deregulated markets
         Overview of IS-U/CCS functions




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110                                 1
1.2
   IS-U/CCS Overview: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Present the integration of IS-U/CCS in standard SAP
                         components
                        Name the most important SAP components and their
                         roles in the utilities industry
                        Describe the functions of IS-U/CCS




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                             2
1.3
   IS-U Overview: Business Scenario



                        The course participants are new employees of
                         eNRGCo.
                        You are taking part in a 5-day training program
                        Your main tasks will be customer-oriented
                         processes in the customer center
                        You will use typical business processes to
                         become familiar with the IS-U/CCS structure




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                           3
1.4
     mySAP.com: Overview


         PERSONAL                                 INTEGRATED
                - individually adaptable           - platform for business co-operation
                          - role-specific          - industry-specific
        - standard entry into all internal         - integrated, universal business processes
                   and external services




                                                              CO-OPERATIVE

                                                                - building of business relationships
                                                                               (virtual communities)
                                                                   - integration of external services
                                                                                             (content)
                                                             - "One-Step Business" (co-operation)
                                                                                 - application hosting
                                                                      - Internet business framework
          © SAP AG 1999




   The mySAP.com concept consists of three areas:
     The my area stands for easy access to all elements of mySAP.com. Based on the results of the
       EnjoySAP initiative, the mySAP.com workplace provides personalized, role-based system access.
     The SAP area represents the availability of enterprise software over the Internet.
     The .com area stands for the Internet intiative of SAP. Trade relations and business co-operation can be
       initiated and developed over the Internet.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   4
1.5
     Workplace Internet Business Framework

                                                                       Le .
                                                                         g.
                                                                   R/2 Leg
                                                                   R/2 Syst.
                                                                       Syst.

                                                           Oep n Ext. .
                                                                    Ext     on ySAP
                                                                           N m     .com
                                                          Int rn t
                                                             e e      p.
                                                                   Com.
                                                                   Comp
                                                           a d rd
                                                         St n a s
                                                                                  R/3 4.6
                                                                                  R/3 4.6
                                                                              FI
                                                                              FI        LO
                                                                                         LO
                          Single                                                    R
                                                                                   HR
                                                                                    H
                             n
                          Sig -                                           ySAP
                                                                         mySAP
                                                                         m                  SEM
                                                                                            SEM
                                     W place
                                      orkpla
                                     Work ce
                           O n                                             ilitie
                                                                          tilit s
                                                                         Ut ies
                                                                         U
                                    In ust -spe
                                     du ry-sp cific
                                   Ind stry ecific                                    APO B2B
                                                                                      APO B2    B
                                                                             /CCS
                                                                       IS-U/CCS
                                                                        IS-U
                                       Role ase
                                           -ba d
                                      Role-b sed
                                                                                   m ySAP         p et
                                                                                          .comcom on n s
                                      Pe alize
                                        rsona d
                                     Person lized                            KM
                                                                              KM        BW
     e row r cce
    W bb se a ss                      rag     lat
                                     D g &Re te
                                     Dra &Relae                                   CRM BW
                                                                                  CRM
                                                                                   Com             within
                                                                                       pan
                                                                                           y lim
                                                                                                 i ts
                                                                            Pa n r
                                                                              rtne
                                                                           Part er
                                                                  Mrke-
                                                                   ark t-
                                                                  Ma et
                                                                                                outside
                                                                   p ce
                                                                   lace
                                                                  pla
                                                                           m ySAP        e e rvice
                                                                                  .comInt rn tse        s
                               O he Int rn t se
                                t r e e rvice   s                         SAP
                                                                          SAP

          © SAP AG 1999




   The Workplace contains links to information within and outside company limits. Links can be made to:
     Non mySAP.com components: External systems via open Internet standards
     mySAP.com components: Classical and new Web-based R/3 transactions (standard R/3 System, New
       Dimensions, industry solutions), Reports (such as Business Information Warehouse reports in BW
       2.1C), Knowledge Warehouse content
     mySAP.com Internet services: mySAP.com Marketplace
     Any Internet or intranet Websites




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                5
1.6
   mySAP Utilities: The Comprehensive Solution




                                                             Busines I I ntelligence
                                                            Busi nesss ntelligence
                                  Str ategic E nterprise
                                   Strategic E nterpr ise                                     M anagerial
                                                                                               M anager ial                 Financial
                                                                                                                             Fina ncial               Reg ulat or y
                                                                                                                                                      Regulat ory
                                                                     &&
                                      Manageme nt
                                       Management                                             Accounting
                                                                                               Accounti ng                 Accounti ng
                                                                                                                           Accounti ng              Reporting /FERC
                                                                                                                                                    Reporting/FERC
                                                             Data Warehousing
                                                              Data Warehousing

                                                                                                         Market ing
                                                                                                         M arketi ng
                                                        Mar ket R esearch
                                                        Market R es earch        Pr oduct/
                                                                                  Product/                                                                Sal es
                                                                                                                                                           Sales
                                  C ustomer S ervic e
                                  Cus tomer Servic e                                                     Program
                                                                                                          Program           Sal es Manag ement
                                                                                                                             Sales M anagem ent
                                                          & A nal ysis
                                                           & Anal ysis       Brand Mark eting
                                                                             Brand M arketing                                                            Chann els
                                                                                                                                                         Cha nnels
                                                                                                        Management
                                                                                                        Management

                                       Engin eering &
                                       Engineering &                  Product ion                  Plant Maint enanc e
                                                                                                   Plant M aint en anc e           Deco mmissi oni ng
                                                                                                                                   Decommissi oning
                                       Construction
                                        Constructi on                 Production


                                       Engin eering &
                                       Engineering &                                               M aintenance &
                                                                                                    Mainte nance &                   Transmiss on &
                                                                                                                                    Transmi ssi ion &
                                                               Operati ons M anag ement
                                                               Operati ons Manageme nt
                                       Construction
                                        Constructi on                                             Wor Man agement
                                                                                                  Wor kk M anagement              Dist ributio n S ervic e
                                                                                                                                  Distri bution S ervic e


                                       Sales C ycle &
                                        Sal es C ycle &       Connecti on & Inst allati on
                                                              C onnect ion & Inst allati on             Ser vi cee
                                                                                                         Ser vic                     M eter Reading
                                                                                                                                     Meter Reading
                                           Billing
                                            Billi ng               M anage ment
                                                                    M anagement                       Manageme nt
                                                                                                      Manag ement                    Management
                                                                                                                                      M anage ment
                                                                                                                                                                Pool/
                                                                                                                                                                Pool/
                                                                                                                                                                ISO
                                                                                                                                                                 ISO
                                                                       Ser vic e
                                                                        Ser vice                   Special C usto mer
                                                                                                    Sp ecial C ustomer
                                        Sal es C ycle &
                                        Sales C ycle &                                                                               Retail Bi lling
                                                                                                                                     Retail Billing
                                                                      Agreem ent
                                                                      Agreement                        Process es
                                                                                                        Processes


                                     Energyydata a
                                     Energ Dat                Tr aders
                                                              Traders                     Ri sk
                                                                                           Risk                 Wholes ale
                                                                                                                Wh oles ale               Rec onciliation
                                                                                                                                          Reco nciliati on
                                     M anag ement
                                     Manageme nt             Wor kbenc h
                                                             Wor kbenc h               Manag ement
                                                                                       M anag ement              Billing
                                                                                                                  Billing                 & S ettlement
                                                                                                                                           & S ett lement



                                              Invoici ng
                                               Invoici ng                     Receivabl es Man agement
                                                                              Receiv ables Manag ement                      Thir d P arty Settl em ent
                                                                                                                            Third P arty Settl em ent




                  Business                                                                                                                                                      Network
                                   Human R eso urce
                                   H uman R esource                                                                      Fixed Asset
                                                                                                                          Fixed Asset
                                                                Procureme nt
                                                                 Procureme nt                  Treasur yy
                                                                                                Treas ur                                               Real Estat e
                                                                                                                                                       Real Estat e
                                    Manageme nt
                                     Management                                                                          Management
                                                                                                                         M anage ment




                                                                                                                                                                         SAP Customer Relationship
         Finance & Controlling                                                                                                                                           Management
         Human Resource                                                                                                                                                 SAP Supply Chain
          Management                                                                                                                                                      Management
         Logistics                                                                                                                                                      SAP Business Intelligence
                                                                                                                                                                         SAP Business-to-Business
                                                                                                                                                                          E-Commerce

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                                                                      IUT110                                                                                6
1.7
     Customer Relationship Management (CRM)



            Mobile Sales



                                                                                      Contact Center




                                                                                     Internet Sales




          © SAP AG 1999




   SAP Customer Relationship Management (CRM) provides solutions that enable companies to
    effectively maintain customer relationships throughout the entire life cycle. CRM supports companies
    by understanding and anticipating the requirements of their customer base as well as those of potential
    customers. SAP CRM is subdivided into four main business scenarios:
     Mobile Sales Scenario: Enables field service employees to access to all the information necessary for
       their job. The data is saved on a lap-top database and is regularly aligned with the CRM System.
     Contact Center Scenario: Along with the Customer Interaction Center (CIC), this forms one of the
       key components of SAP CRM. The CIC enables processing of incoming and outgoing telephone calls
       using the SAPphone CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) interface, processing of incoming and
       outgoing E-mails and activity management (recording of all contacts in the contact center). The CIC
       can be used in service (Service Interaction Center SIC), sales and distribution or marketing (telesales
       and telemarketing).
     Internet Sales Scenario: Enables electronic business activities to take place over the World Wide Web
       between companies, and between companies and end-customers (B2C).
     Business-to-Business Procurement (SAP BBP): The SAP solution for business activities taking place
       between companies over the World Wide Web.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   7
1.8
    Business Information Warehouse (BW)


                                             Efficient Analysis of Information
                                             - innovative and intuitive user interface
                                             - efficient OLAP analysis functions
                                             - for all types of user



                                                   Extensive Business Content
                                                   - information model, reports and
                                                     extractors
                                                   - Metadata repository
                                                   - company comparison values

                          End-to-End Data Warehousing Solutions
                          - extraction of R/3 data and external data
                          - fully automated
                          - central control
        R/3     Other

        © SAP AG 1999




 The SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) is the mySAP.com business component that is used
  to extract and analyze data from operative business applications (OLTP systems). Besides OLTP
  Systems such as R/3 and SAP BBP (Business-to-Business Procurement: Business process in E-
  Commerce that enables employees to purchase goods and services directly from suppliers), other
  external data sources such as databases or online services can also be connected. OLTP stands for Online
  Transaction Processing.
 The SAP Business Information Warehouse supports Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) and is
  especially suitable for processing large volumes of operative and historical data.
 SAP BW contains all the necessary Metadata for current business processes. This includes InfoSources,
  InfoCubes and standard reports, transfer structures for all releases and communication structures and
  update rules for each InfoCube. These elements are part of the ready-to-go strategy that supports
  automatic data transfer with immediate analysis according to installation of the system and naming of
  the source system.
 SAP BW requests application data in regular intervals from the allocated source systems (pull
  mechanism). The back-end systems therefore contain extractors that collect data and deliver it to the
  SAP Business Information Warehouse.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                 8
1.9
   Functional Scope of the IS-U System



                                                                                      Customer
           Generation                    Transmission              Distribution       service &
                                                                                       billing

                                                        All customer-related business processes

   IS-U/
   CCS
                                 Customer Relationship Management
                                   Particular business processes
   PM
   MM
                                     Consumption     Consumption
                           Marketing    entry           billing                  Contract
      SD                                                             Invoicing
                            & Sales                                              A/R & A/P
                                      Installation     Service
                                                       billing     Invoicing
                                        services
      FI

                                  Meter & Device Management
   CRM
                                       Work Management

           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                              IUT110                                    9
1.10
   Integrated and Open System Landscape



                                                                       Electronic
             SAP BW                                                    business
                                                                       (Internet)

                                                           ITS
                                      Business objects
                                      such as business                       Tele
       Analyses                      partner, agreement,     CTI           business
                                     contracts, products
                                       and sales and
                                         distribution
                                           projects

                SAP
                IS-U/                                            Mobile
                CCS                                               Appli-
                                                                 cations

       Back end          Front end
         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                                       10
1.11
   IS-U/CCS Business Processes



                                                                         Electronic
             SAP BW                                                      business
                                                                         (Internet)
                         Device Management
                          Device Management                   ITS
                         Billing
                          Billing
                         Invoicing
                          Invoicing      Business objects
                         Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                                          such as business                     Tele
                          Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
       Analyses                           partner, activities,
                         Intercompany Data Exchange              CTI        business
                          Intercompany Data Exchange
                                         contracts, products,
                         Energy Data Management
                          Energy Data Managementand
                                              sales
                         ...
                          ...            distribution projects


                SAP
                IS-U/                                              Mobile
                CCS                                                 Appli-
                                                                   cations

       Back end                   Front end
         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                   11
1.12
   Synchronized Business Objects



                                                                              Electronic
             SAP BW                                                           business
                                                                              (Internet)

                                                                  ITS
                         Business partners Business objects
                          Business partners as business
                                            such                                    Tele
                         Contract accounts
                          Contract accounts
       Analyses                            partner, activities,     CTI           business
                         Contracts
                          Contracts      contracts, products,
                         Connection objects sales and
                          Connection objects
                         Points of delivery distribution
                          Points of delivery
                                                 projects

               SAP
               IS-U/                                                    Mobile
               CCS                                                       Appli-
                                                                        cations

       Back end                    Front end
         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                      12
1.13
    Marketing and Sales Process

                          3) Transfer of target group
                             to SAP CRM
  2) Target group selection                                4) Marketing planning
                                                                                Electronic
                                                           5) Campaign creation
          SAP BW                                           6) Campaign executionbusiness
                                                                                (Internet)
                                                           7) Activity management
                                                           8) Campaign feedback (BW)
                                                           9) Contract creation
                                                                 ITS
                                                           10) Contract synchronization

                                           Business objects
 1(a) Import of external                                                        Telebusin
                                           such as business
      addresses
    Analysis to target
      Analyses                             partner, contracts        CTI           ess
      group selection
                                             and products.
 Business partner transfer to
      target group selection       11) Automatic creation of contracts
                                   12) IDE communication with prior
                                         supplier or transmission company
                                   13) Automatic creation or change of
              SAP                        master data
              IS-U/                -----                                   Mobile
              CCS                  14) Transfer of meter reading results Components
                                   15) Billing and invoicing
                                   16) Transfer of sales and transaction
                                         statistics to BW
       Back end                      Front end
                                   17) Optional: Commission
         © SAP AG 1999                   determination




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                     13
1.14
   System Infrastructure CRM, BW and mySAP
   Utilities
                                                                                                                                                    Business
                               Marketin Prod
                                       g     uct                                                                                                      Partners:
                     Retention &An alysis &Brand                                                                                        Information       Resid. Cust.
                       ana -
                     M ge                                                                                                                 System           Nonresid. Cust.
           Custom er m t en                 gm
                                           M t     Tele-
                                                 Marketing                                                                                                    Sales Cust.
            Develop-                                                                                                                 Marketing & Sales          Service Cust.
             m ent
                                                                                                                                                                    Prospect
     Service
      Level
       gm
      M t          mySAP
                                                            rn
                                                        Inte et
                                                         a
                                                      M rketing               Replication via                           Invoicing
                                                                                                                                 mySAP
                                                                                                                         Billing &                         Contract
                                                                                                                                                          Accounting
                                                                                                                                                                      Owner
                                                                                                                                                                        Bill Recipient
                                                                                                                                                                           Installer

    Se
    Ce
      rvice
       nter        CRM 3.0                                Field
                                                          Sales
                                                                             CRM middleware                                      Utilities
                                                                                                                       Consumption                      Installation   Gas
                                                                                                                                                                             Sectors:
                                                                                                                                                                        Electricity
                                                                                                                          Entry
                                                             rn
                                                         Inte et       Of business partner, contract accounts,                            4.63 Services
                                                                                                                                     Device Management
                                                                                                                                                                    Water
                                                                                                                                                                 Waste Water
                                                                                                                                                              District Heating
       Field                                              Sales                                                                 Meters/Devices/Connecti Waste Disposal
      Service                                                          contracts, connection object and point                            ons              Cable TV
                                                                                                                                                       Service Order
                                                                                                                                        Work
            Internet                                Te -
                                                      le
                                                                       of delivery                                                                  Service
                                                                                                                                    Management Goods Contract

                                                                                                                   s
           Custom re                                Sales
                                                         BW                                                     or
                      Service            Bus.Pa rt.                                                                                              Charges
              Self                                                                                                                             Taxes / Fees
                                               or
                               Sales M t Collab -
                                      gm

                                                                                                           ct
            Service Interaction                                                                                                         n
                      Center &Su    pport ation
                                                                                                                                      io
                                                                   e                                                    ct
                                                     Fr        xt
                                                                  ra                                   xtra       ic sa
                                                                                                               cif tran
                                                        om
                                                                    ct                               e        e
                                                     an C                                                  sp d up
                                                        al y R M
                                                            sis d
                                                                      or
                                                                         s                       BW IS-U- ta ant gro
                                                                   at                                     da rge W
                                                               in a                                 om r
                                                                 B W to                           Fr aste o ta in B
                                                                                                    m ta t tion
                                                                                                     da lec
                                                                                                       se
                                Data transfer                                                           BW extractors
                         From selected target groups,
                                                                              mySAP                      From R/3 master data                                 mySAP
                         top n analyses and other                              BW                        and transaction data                                 Financials
                         analyses in BW in accordance                                                    to target group
                         with CRM
                                                                               2.1C                      selection and other
                                                                                                         analyses in BW

                                                                                               Flat
                                                                                                     f
                                                                                              data iles fro
                                                                                                   ,       m          External
                                                                                             and such a exter
                                                                                                  so o    s pr   n     data
                                                                                                       n      osp al
                                                                                                                 ects

              © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                                             IUT110                                                                                            14
1.15
     IS-U/CCS - Integration Model


                                                                                              IS-U/CCS as an integrated
                                                                                              IS-U/CCS as an integrated
                                                               SD                                  component of the
                                                                                                   component of the
                            FI
                                                           Sales &                                  SAP enterprise
                                                                                                    SAP enterprise
                                                         Distribution                            information system
                                                                                                  information system
                 Financial                                                      External
                Accounting                                                       Sales
                                                        In Bill
                                I-C + ct
                             C A) / P
                                                          vo i n                Systems
                              (F / R tr a



                                                            ic g/                                       Customer
                                     A
                                A on




                                                               in                                       information system
                                                                 g
                                   C




                                                    STOM
        Plant Maintenance                       U        E
           & Customer                             SAP
                                                           R
              Service
              Service                           Busine
                                                  sin ss
                                                Bu e                                                    IS-U


                                                                   Entr ption
                          IIns ervice




                                                            E
                                                 Partn r
                                                   rt e
                                                     ne                                                 components
                             sta v es
                             Se



                                           CA




                                                           IC


           MM                               R
                                            A




                                                                       y
                                                         V                        External
                                                                    sum
                                lllat




                                                E
                  PM/                             & S ER                                                Standard SAP
                                                                                Consumption
                                    tion




                  CS                                                                                    components
                                                                Co n
                                       n




                                                                                   Entry
             SD                               Device                              Systems
                     CO                     Management                                                  External systems

                                 AM         PM      GIS,
                                                    CAD, MM
                                 Asset Management & SCADA
                               Materials Management


          © SAP AG 1999




   Central business partner model (R/3) => the customer is the central data object.
   Cross-application component FI-CA for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
         Designed for processing a large volume of postings from sales and collection activities for a large
         number of customers
   Industry-specific enhancements for the utilities industry enable the use of the standard R/3 component
    PM/CS (Plant Maintenance/Customer Service).
    => ideal prerequisites for processing service activities
   PM/CS is integrated with the following components:
         SD: Management of customer quotations and orders, and also execution of billing
         CO: Allocation and settlement of costs related to service activities
         MM: Processing of material requirements and goods movement related to service activities
   The results of service billing can be transferred to IS-U invoicing; further processing of debits occurs via
    FI-CA.
   Material master records are managed in MM at the same time as device categories in IS-U; purchasing
    and stockholding of devices are processed using MM components.




(C) SAP AG                                                            IUT110                                                 15
1.16
   The Strengths of mySAP Utilities

         Deregulation-enabled functionality
         Integration of application areas
                  Homogeneous interaction between accounting and core logistics
                   processes
                  Business processes for all areas
                  Shorter lead times for business processes
         Flexibility
                  Can be adapted to local deregulation rules
                  Can be implemented in all types of companies
                  Supports all types of service
                  Enables development of individual business strategy
         Customer-orientation
                  User friendly
                  Oriented to business processes
                  Competition-oriented
                  Informative
                  Communicative
         Open architecture
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                  16
1.17
   Solutions for the New Industry Market Model

              Solution Map SAP Utilities

                                   Classic utility company




                                           Deregulation

         Generation               Transmission & Distribution   Sales & Distribution




             Generation                  Transmission           Marketing, sales and
                                           Distribution         distribution, billing,
       © SAP AG 1999                   Device Management         customer service




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                    17
1.18
   Deregulated Market: Business Perspective


                Settlement
                coordinator
              (= transmission company)                                      Exchanges and
                                                                           bilateral contracts


                                                                                   Energy
                                                           Balance              procurement
        Grid access regulations for
                                                         comparison              contracts
       use of the transmission grid,
         schedule and settlement
                   results



                                              Negotiated grid access,
           Distribution                     outline contract for smaller
                                             customers, schedule and              Supplier
            company                              settlement results



           Grid connection
           contract, grid usage
           contract                                                             Energy supply
                                                                                  contract




         © SAP AG 1999                   Business partner




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                      18
1.19
   Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (1)



        Call-
        Call-center functionality
                   Faster and more direct access to all relevant information and
                    transactions required during contact with customers is
                    admissible. This includes customer overviews, changing
                    master data, displaying bills, entering meter reading results,
                    account information and so on.
                   Work items allow callbacks and outbound campaigns.
        Master data template
                   Product modeling on the basis of configured materials and
                                                                           -
                    pricing in SD. The master data generator is used to post edit
                    campaigns.


        IS-
        IS-U content for BW
                   Sales statistics, consumption statistics, transaction statistics
                    and so on
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                    19
1.20
   Sales Processing

    Product selection                                       Master data generation
    using mySAP CRM                                         or change in
    channels:                                               mySAP Utilities:

                                                         Fixed product information
                                                         Fixed product information



                                                                                Master data
                                                                                Master data
                                                                                 template
                                                                                 template



                        mySAP CRM
                        mySAP CRM             mySAP Utilities
                                              mySAP Utilities                    Master data
                                                                                 Master data   mySAP
                         product
                          product                product
                                                 product                          generator
                                                                                  generator    Utilities


                        Configuration
                        Configuration              Configuration
                                                   Configuration




                                                         Variable product information
                                                         Variable product information




                                        Workflow
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                                       20
1.21
   Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (2)


        Internet Self Services
         B2C (Business to Customer scenarios)
                  Registration/password change for Internet user
                  Maintain move-in data
                  Maintain move-out data
                  Maintain personal data
                  Display consumption history
                  Enter meter reading results
                  Display and payment of a bill
                  Issue collection authorization
                  Display account balance
         The data is updated immediately or is transferred to the
          appropriate user for further processing.
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                  21
1.22
   Internet Self Services: Start Page




         Select
         service




          Enter
        user and
        password


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110   22
1.23
    What is Energy Data Management?


       Profile                                                                Billing
       Management
                                  Spot price                   Additional
                                                            agreement: Spot   John Smith

         EDM                       KW
                                                                delivery      10 Park Avenue
                                                                              12345 NY
                                   60
       • Historical                                                             Billing period
         profile                   30                                           05.01. – 06.01.
                                                                                                            Pr
                                                                                             C o ns um pt i o n i ceC ha r ge
       • Price profile             10                                          O n- Pe ak kWh 1 0 0 kWh $0 . 25 $ 2 5 .0 0
                                                                               O f f -Pea k kW h 4 0 0 kWh $0 . 10 $ 4 0 .0 0
       • Forecast                                                              S p ot kW h       1 0 0 kWh $0 . 50 $ 5 0 .0 0
         profile
                                             Agreed price                      A mo un t Du e                       $ 1 15 .0 0




                                          Settlement



        © SAP AG 1999




Energy Data Management (EDM) enables you to manage consumption data and corresponding business
  processes. EDM is particularly useful for managing and billing consumption data that is measured at
  specific intervals (for example load profiles and load shapes).
 EDM enables you to bill interval data such as RTP rates (real-time pricing) and time-of-use rates.
 Settlement
   deals with settlement processes, amounts and charges, as well as procurement schedules and network
     profiles.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                                            23
1.24
   Energy Data Management 1




                                                                            Load
                                                                            Load
                                    Auto. MR
                                   Auto. MR                                profile
                                                                           profile
                                   Auto. MR
                                     systems                               mgmt
                                                                            mgmt
                        oa
                             d      systems
                                   systems                                                                              Real-time     Invoicing
                                                                                                                                      Invoicing
                  w   nl
               Do           na
                               l
                                                                                                                         pricing
                        sig                                                                                             Preliminary




                                                                                     load profiles
    Interval                                                                                                              billing      Contract
                                                                                                                                       Contract




                                                                                                      EDM
                                                                                                              EXPORT
                                                      IMPORT




                                                                           Derived
                          d




      meter
                      loa




                                                               Point of
                                                               Point of
                    wn


                                    l
                                 na




                                                               delivery
                                                               delivery                                                               A/R + A/P
                  Do




                                                                                                                                      A/R + A/P
                             sig




                                             MD
                        Data
                                                E
                        entr
                            y                             Do
                                                                                                                                      Scheduling
                                                                                                                                      Scheduling
     Tradit.                                                 wn                                                          Billing
                                                                                                                         Billing
                                                                loa
     meter                                                          d       MR
                                                                            MR
                    D                                     Up
                  en ata                                    loa
                                                                d          data
                                                                            data
                    try
                                          Meter
                                                                           mgmt
                                                                           mgmt
                                         reading       Print
                                        document                                                                                        Other
                                                    Data entry                                                                         modules
                                         customer
                                           meter
                                          reading
                                                                          EDIFACT                                        Device
                                                                                                                         Device
                                                                                                                       Management
                                                                                                                       Management
                                                                        Public network
                                                                               network


         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                                                           IUT110                                        24
1.25
   Energy Data Management 2

         Variant-based billing (IS-U/CCS)
                   Differentiation of various rate periods using registers
                   Consumption billing for each register (per rate period) using any
                    complex billing rules
                   Construction of cost estimates from basic formulas
                   High billing throughput
         Profile-based billing (IS-U/EDM)
                   Differentiation between fixed intervals of measurement (such as
                    15 min, 30 min, 1hr)
                   Measurement using interval meters
                                                                                  l-
                    Consumption billing for each interval in accordance with interva
                    specific conditions
                   Billing complies with the typical table calculation procedure
                   Low billing throughput

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                    25
1.26
   IS-U Overview: Unit Summary



                        IS-U/CCS supports customer-oriented core business
                         processes of utility and service companies.
                        IS-U/CCS is an integrated component of the SAP
                         enterprise information system.
                        IS-U/CCS can be used for billing and managing
                         standard divisions as well as additional new services.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                  26
2
    CIC



          Contents:

           Master data
           Objectives of the Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
           Typical processing steps
           Implementation and use
           Most important application areas
           Customer contacts




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                     1
2.2
   CIC: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Name the most important IS-U/CCS business objects

                        Describe the range of applications

                        Explain the elements of the Customer Interaction
                         Center

                        Carry out some typical customer processes

                        Create and use customer contacts




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                             2
2.3
   CIC: Business Scenario



                        Customer call and identification via Front Office

                        Data environment
                              Display of business data

                        Changes to data
                              Change bank details

                              Change rates

                        Customer contact




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                         3
2.4
   The IS-U House




                                                    Connection Object


                            Apartment 1= Premise
                                                                                Hall
                                                            Installation 1:
                                                             Installation 1:
                                            Contract 1:
                                            Contract 1:                                          Apartment 3
                                                               Electricty
                                                               Electricty
                                            Electricity
                                             Electricity         meter
                                                                  meter
                                                                               Device location
                                                                               Device location
                                                                                    Hall
                                                                                    Hall
                                                            Installation 2:
                                                             Installation 2:
                                Contract
                                Contract    Contract 2:
                                            Contract 2:
                                account        Gas                                               Apartment 2
                                account        Gas            Gas meter
                                                              Gas meter
                   Business
                   partner
                                            Contract 3:
                                                            Installation 3:
                                                             Installation 3:                     Basement
                                            Contract 3:                        Device location
                                                                               Device location
                                              Water
                                              Water                             Basement
                                                                                 Basement
                                                            Water meter
                                                            Water meter

                           Service Connection: Water Service Connection: Gas           Service Connection: Electricity
   Supply
   Grid



      Street
           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                 IUT110                                                        4
2.5
   Various Business Partners


                                                         Existing
       Owners
                                                                         Debtor




   Tenants                                     SAP
                                          Business partner

                                                                         Installer



                 Interested party

        Employee                       Individuals and companies
                                       Business partner
                                        relationships
                                       Flexible interfaces
         Nonresidential                Integration of business roles   Group
         customer
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                               5
2.6
    Roles of the Business Partner




                         Business partner
                                                          • Name
                                                          • Address
                                                          • Personal data
                                                          • Communication
                 Contract partner             Installer                  Prospect
                • Payment                 • Type of company         • Branch of industry
                transactions              • Division license        • Relationships
                • General data            • Work field              • Contact history
                (account class,           • License                 • ...
                social security,          • Main utility company
                creditworthiness,         • Identification
                driver's license no.,     • ...
                employee class)
                • ...



         © SAP AG 1999




 The central business partner concept enables you to:
   Define the business partner globally
   Model different roles for a business partner in the system
 The specific roles of the business partner in IS-U are:
   Contract partner
   Installer
   Contact person
   Prospect
  Other roles and data fields are dependent on Customizing settings.
 A business partner is included in different business processes, depending on his or her role:
   A customer receiving utility and maintenance services
   A bill recipient
   Supplier
   A prospect targeted by marketing activities
   The owner of an apartment or house




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                         6
2.7
    Business Partner Data



              General                                               BP Relationships
               Form of address, name                                Hierarchical
               Legal form, company                                  Equal
               Group, search terms                                  Marital




                                                                                 Payment
      Addresses                                  SAP                             Transactions
       Standard address                       Business
       P.O. box address                        Partner                      Bank details
       Other addresses




                  Communication                                Additional Data
                   Telephone, fax                               Identification numbers
                   Extensions                                   Legitimation
                   Internet, E-mail, online                     Register entry




             Cross-role data                                              Role-specific data
          © SAP AG 1999




 Business partners are divided into various groups, to which different attributes are allocated. IS-U
  differentiates between:
   Individuals
   Organizations
   Groups
 Depending on the business context, the business partner can assume different roles. IS-U differentiates
  between:
   Contract partner
   Installer
   Contact person
   Prospect
  Other roles depend on Customizing
 For each contract partner, an SD business partner is created in the background.
 A programmable interface, which will incorporate customer-specific fields, is currently being planned.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                    7
2.8
   Contract Account Data


                       General data                          Dunning data
                   Account name
                   Account no. in legacy                   Dunning control
                    system                                  Dunning letter recipient
                   Terms of payment                        Dunning block reason
                   Tolerance group


                    Control                                     Incoming payments
                                              Contract
          Alternative bill recipient
                                                                    Payment method
          Paid by collective bill
                                                                     Bank details
                                              Account
                                                                 
           account
                                                                    Alternate payer
          Additional bill


                Account assignment                       Outgoing payments
                   Where-used list for Ols                 Payment method
                   Planning group                          Bank details
                   Account determination                   Alternate payee
                   Settlement category

            General data                                         Dunning/payment data
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                  8
2.9
   Collective Bills




                                     Contract 1                                       Bill
                                                         150
      Contract           Contract   (Elec. - domestic)                                CA 1
      Contract
      Partner
       Partner          Account 1
                                     Contract 2          100
                                    (Water - domestic)                           Total : 250 UNI




                                     Contract 3          300       Bill
                                    (Gas - business)                               Bill cover
                         Contract                                  CA 2
                                                                                     sheet
                        Account 2    Contract 4
    Contract                                             100                        CA 2/3
     Contract                       (Elec. - business)         Total : 400 UNI
   Account for
   Account for                                                                   Total : 450 UNI
                                                                                             UNI
    Collective
    Collective                                                                   (Statistical
       Bill                                                        Bill
        Bill                                                                     posting toto
                         Contract    Contract 5                    CA 3          contract
                                                         50
                        Account 3   (Elec. - business)                           collective billing
                                                                                 collective
                                                                                 account CBA 1)
                                                                                            CBA
                                                               Total : 50 UNI




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                                 9
2.10
     Contract Data

                                                         Data Relevant to Billing


              General                                               Billing Data
              Contract Data                                         • Joint Invoice
              • Contract account                                    • Billing block reason
              • Division                                            • Outsorting group
              • Company code
              • Plant/comp. consum.
              • Statistics group                                        Acct Assignment Data
              • Authorization group                                      • Account determination ID
                                              Contract                   • Cost center
                                                                         • Business area
               Budget Billing
                   Data
             • Budget billing
               Adjustment                                                  Scheduling Data
             • Budget billing cycle                                        • Contract start/end date
                                                                           • Renewal dates
                                                                           • Cancellation dates
                               Deregulation
                                  Fields

           General Data                                                     Move-In/Move-Out Data
          © SAP AG 1999




   In the Statistics group field, you specify a statistics group for a contract. It is used for determining data
    for sales statistics.
   The authorization group prevents unauthorized access to specified objects. To be able to carry out any
    activity protected in this way, the user must have authorization for both the activity and the authorization
    group.
   Data relevant to budget billing (the budget billing cycle, for instance) maintained in the contract
    overrides the default values defined in the portion or the Customizing settings.
   The outsorting group determines which validations are to be carried out in billing. A contract can also be
    outsorted manually.
   The meter reading block reason specifies why the contract has been blocked for meter readings. If you
    make an entry in this field then the contract can no longer be billed. The contract will not be released
    again for billing until you enter a billing release reason (the billing release reason overrides the billing
    block reason).
   A business area is an organizational unit that covers a restricted area of activity/responsibility in your
    company. Value movements entered in Financial Accounting can be attributed to this business area for
    the purposes of external accounting.
   Scheduling data is provided mainly for information purposes. It allows you to display information on
    when a contract was signed or cancelled, for example.



(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                    10
2.11
   Connection Object Data



               Location Data                                 General

               • Maintenance plant                           • Description
               • Location description                        • Processing status
               • ABC indicator                               • Notes



         Plant Maintenance                                          Address
         • Structure
         • Maintenance planning                Connection           • Street, house number
           plant                                 Object             • Postal code, city
         • Maintenance planning                                     • Political regional structure
           group



                 Additional Data                            Attributes
                  • Structure/equipment list                • Regional structure group
                  • Account assignment                      • Authorization group
                  • Classification


        PM data                                                           IS-U data

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              11
2.12
   Premise Data



               Location Data                             Connection Object
                                                        Forms the link between
                   Storey
                                                         the premise and the
                   Room number
                                                         regional structure
                   Location description



         Attributes                                             Installation
             Premise type
         

             Owners
                                           Premise             Can comprise several
         
                                                                installations to be billed
            Number of occupants



                                                     Technology
                    Additional Data

                       Notes                           Can be assigned to a
                       Update log                       device location



                         General data                      Relationships

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                           12
2.13
   Installation Data



                Process Data                                      Billing
                                                                     Rate category
                   Current premise
                                                                     Rate data for devices
                   Current business partner
                                                                      and registers
                   Current contract
                                                                     Reference value



        Control Data                                                  Business Partner
             Supply or consumption                                        Conclusion of the contract
                                               Installation
                                                                     
            Definition of base period                                    with the business partner
            Meter reading control




                                                              Regional Structure
                    Additional Data                              Linked via the premise
                        Installation type                        and connection object
                        Guarantee of supply                     Override default meter
                        Notes                                    reading unit
                        Update log

                         General data                                  Relationships
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                               13
2.14
   Point of Delivery Data



              Point of delivery ID
                                                    Header data
             • Structure category
             • History                           • Description
                                                 • Point of delivery type
                                                 • Point of delivery role



                                     Point of
                                     delivery
                                                     Deregulation
                Technical                          • Installation
                                                   • Premise
             • Register                            • Service type
                                                   • Grid (distributor)
                                                   • Settlement unit




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                              IUT110                              14
2.15
   Business Objects in IS-U/CCS

          IS-U
           IS-U
                                   Business
          FI-CA
          FI-CA                                                    Regional
                                    partner
                                                                   structure
         SD, CS, PM
         SD, CS, PM
         Cross appl.
         Cross appl.               Contract
                                   account
       Integration with
        Logistics
                                   Contract
                                   (utility)
       Service

                        Point of                                  Connection
                                                                  Connection
                                   Installation        Premise
                        delivery                                    object
                                                                    object


                  Device                               Device
                                    Device
                  category                             location
                                                                  Connection

                                    Meter
                                    reading

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                       15
2.16
   What Is a Customer Interaction Center?



                                                                 -
         Large utility companies process several million customer
          oriented business processes every year
         There are usually special departments for this:
                  Customer center
                  Call center
                  Customer service agents
         The IS-U Customer Interaction Center (CIC) supports these
          departments in the system




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                   16
2.17
   Customer Interaction Center: Requirements



         Efficient user interface, short training period
         All common service functions directly accessible
         Entry with incomplete data and comprehensive search help
         User-specific adjustment of the interface and of the
          available business processes
         Connection to external communication systems (e.g.
          Computer Telephony Integration, Internet)




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                          17
2.18
    Integration with External Communication Systems




                                                                       WWW




                     Fax         Letter           Telephone         Internet           In person
                           Archive              Call center           Internet
                         integration            integration         integration

                 IS-U/CCS Front Office Functions




                                               IS-U
                                   Customer Information System



         © SAP AG 1999




 As a customer information system, IS-U/CCS enables you to integrate external communication systems
  in your daily work.
 The following slides describe the three most important interfaces:
   Archiving of documents created in IS-U (for example invoices to customers, welcome letters, and so
     on.), as well as archiving incoming (or outgoing) documents which are initially only available in paper
     form (faxes, letters, and so on).
   Integration with a call center solution via the SAPphone component.
   Access to IS-U functionality via the Internet or via an intranet.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                 18
2.19
    The IS-U/CCS Customer Interaction Center


                                                                     Service       Initiate       Customer
                                                                                                  Customer
                                      Identification Information
                                                                     function      workflow       contact
                                                                                                  contact




                                                        Customizing


    Identification
                                        Front Office: Initial Screen
                                       Front office Edit            Goto        System     Help
                                                                                                           X
                                                                                                                 Clipboard
       Definable field selection                                                                                   Temporary storage of
       Use AND to join fields            Context   Processe
                                                           s
                                                                                                                     business objects
       Generic search with *                                                                                       Quick follow-up calls
       Display results                                                                                             Good contextual
                                          Search
                                          criteria last/first
                                          Name:                                                   Addr.Cat.
                                                                                                                     overview
                                          Street/house number                                       Bus. part.
                                          PostCd/city/cntry                                         Conn.obj.
                                          Business partner                      Tel. no.
                                          Activity date
                                           Customer Premise Install. Technical
                                          Call Description
    Information                                                                                                  Processes
       Display of business objects
       Field representation of                                                                                     Front Office processes
        severalbusiness objects                                                                                     R/3 workflow processes
       Examples: customer,                                                                                         Examples: customer
        contract account, contacts,                                                                                  change and service
        bill and so on                                                                                               connection process

          © SAP AG 1999




 The CIC is available in two different layouts. The CIC with different vertical screen areas (see above) is
  the standard layout. In the L-shape layout (see next page), selected sectors including utilities, media and
  telecommunications are available.
 The CIC/Front Office screen is divided into four different areas:
   Clipboard (also called business data display):
     Used to temporarily save processed business objects.
   Identification (search criteria, data finder):
     This is where you enter search criteria to locate a business object. Examples of search criteria include
     a name, address or telephone number.
   Information (business object display):
     Once the relevant business objects have been identified, various types of information can be
     displayed.
   Processes:
     This is a list of change transactions, Front Office processes, and workflows which can be carried out
     for previously identified business objects.





(C) SAP AG                                                         IUT110                                                                     19
2.20
     Customer Interaction Center (L-Shaped)

                                                         Telephony
                                                         Telephony
           Identification
           Identification                                functions
                                                          functions                  Call
                                                                                     Call
                                                                                    status
                                                                                    status




                                                                                        Action box
                                                                                        Action box




                                                                     Application area
                                                                     Application area
          Navigation
          Navigation                                                 • Customer overview
                                                                     • Customer overview
            area                                                     • R/3 transactions
                                                                     • R/3 transactions
             area
                                                                     • User-
                                                                     • User-defined HTML pages
                                                                       User-defined HTML pages
                                                                     • Web pages
                                                                     • Web pages



          © SAP AG 1999




   The concept of the CIC (L-shaped) focuses on processing the business partner.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                             20
2.21
   Workflow Inbox


         In the application area of the CIC
         List of all work items to be performed
         E-mail and fax inbox




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110        21
2.22
   E-Mail and Fax in the Workflow Inbox

                                 E-mail, fax, letters
                                 E-mail,      letters
                                 (scanned documents)
                                 (scanned
                                                             System
                                                             System


       Business partner
                                 Confirmation
                                 Confirmation               Workflow
                                                            Workflow




                                                Work item in inbox for E-
                                                Work                   E-
                                                mail, fax, letters
                                                mail,      letters
                                        t es
                                           es
                                   Execu t
                                   Execu


                                                Customer data displayed in
                                                Customer data displayed in
             Call center agent                  CIC
                                                CIC
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                                22
2.23
    Typical Uses of the CIC: Identification




                          e
                        Id ntification




          Of:                                           Supported by:
           Business partners and                        Data finder
            associated data such as
            connection objects                           Integration of external
                                                          communication systems,
                                                          such as CTI



        © SAP AG 1999




 The CIC enables customer service agents to quickly identify customer or processes, even if the customer
  details are incomplete.
 CTI = Computer Telephony Integration




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                23
2.24
     Typical Uses of the CIC: Information




                             e tifica
                           Id n      tion   In    a
                                              form tion




           Supported by:
            Modifiable lists
            Information masks




          © SAP AG 1999




   Once the customer has been identified, the agent can display information on the customer, his or her
    installations, as well as previous and current transactions.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                  24
2.25
    Typical Uses of the CIC: Front Office Process




                                                                  rry u
                                                               Ca O t
                                                                  Fron t
                                e tifica
                              Id n      tion   Informa
                                               Inform tion       O ffice
                                                              Proce s sse
                                                                    q ire
                                                              if Re u d




         Supported by:
          Predefined and company-specific business processes (for
           example name changes, changes to bank details, move     -in
           processing, interim billing, various types of complaints)


        © SAP AG 1999




 Standard business processes are supported by a number of service functions in IS-U/CSS that are
  designed for use in the Front Office of a utility company.
 In many cases, the business process can be carried out completely using one or more of these service
  functions.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                  25
2.26
    Front Office Processes



          Sequence of steps that can be processed:
           by an agent
           in one step




                                 Example: changing bank details


                 Change
                 bank/payment                                        Log customer
                 data for a contract                                 contact
                 account



         © SAP AG 1999




 A Front Office process is a sequence of steps that is specially designed for processing a particular
  business transaction.
 The lifetime of a Front Office process is limited to the lifetime of the Front Office session that initiated
  the process.
 All steps in a Front Office process can be carried out by a customer service agent.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   26
2.27
    Typical Uses of the CIC: Workflow




                                                               Perform
                                                                 tO
                                                             Fron Office
                                                                     ffice          itia e
                                                                                  In t
                                Id nt tion
                                  enifica
                                    tifica       Inform tion Proce s
                                                 Informa           sse             ork
                                                                                W flow
                                                             if Re u d
                                                                  q ire              qu d
                                                                               if Re ire




          Supported by the SAP Workflow Management System by
          means of:
           Pre-defined workflows (for example service connection
            processing, administration of disconnection orders)
           Customer-specific workflows (for example rate changes)


         © SAP AG 1999




 If the business process cannot be fully processed immediately, the remaining steps of the process can be
  coordinated by means of a workflow.
 IS-U/CCS contains a number of standard workflows. These can be modified to meet individual
  requirements.
 You can also create your own workflows.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                27
2.28
   Using R/3 Workflow: Changing a Rate (Example)


                       I'd like to
                       sign up for                             Front Office:
                       an off-peak                                 enter
                       rate.                                      inquiry

                                                                           Customer service
                                                                                agent




                    Letter of                                               Check
                   notification                                           feasibility

                                                      Change/create
                                     Change          (programmable)
                                     contract             meter
         Data in
                                                                                Sales agent



                            Billing agent                Technician

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                        28
2.29
     Typical Uses of the CIC: Customer Contact




                                                             rry t
                                                         Ca ou                         Cu     e
                                                                                         stom r
                                                            service         itia
                                                                          In te
                                                                          Initia
                                                                                            a
                                                                                        cont ct
                           Id n
                             e tification   In    ation
                                              form tion                    orkflow
                                                                         w flow
                                                                           ork
                                                           function                       log
                                                        if n ce ry
                                                             e ssa         e
                                                                          ne ssa
                                                                       if n ce ry




           IS-U/CCS Contact Management supports:
                                                                                           
            The logging of CIC contacts
            Automatic creation of customer contacts as the final step in
             Front Office processes and workflows
            Manual creation of customer contacts for logging purposes


          © SAP AG 1999




   Customer contacts can be created, changed or displayed either directly in the Customer Interaction
    Center or in the menu under Utilities Industry -> Customer service -> Create/Display/Change Customer
    contact.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                               29
2.30
    Contact Management in Customer Service


                                                                WWWWWW




              Fax               Letter        Telephone       Internet         In person

                         Recording of contacts resulting from:
                               Personal customer service, telephone calls

                               Correspondence, fax, Internet, e-mail

                         Evaluation of contacts for:
                               Comprehensive overview of customer service

                               Quality and efficiency of consulting processes

                                               Utility
                                               company



        © SAP AG 1999




 Contact management in IS-U/CCS is designed to record all types of contact between the utility company
  and the customer.
 Customer contacts can be classified during creation according to class, type and the corresponding
  activity.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              30
2.31
    Customer Contact Data



                  General                                             References
                     Business partner                               Reference to any
                     Business partner                                business objects
                     Contact number                                 Permissibility can be set




         Process Description                                                Notes
            Date, time                        Customer Contact               User-defined text
            Contact class                          in IS-U                   Indicator for additional
            Activity                                                          documents



                                                                      Additional Data
                      Communication
                                                                     Self-defined fields
                     In person, telephone, fax,                      such as division or
                      Internet, E-mail, online                        company code
                     Incoming, outgoing                             Authorization group


         © SAP AG 1999




 Contact classes and activities can be created according to the requirements of the utility company.
 Contact classes are used to group customer contacts according to their general subject area.
  Example include information, billing, and budget billing.
 Contact activity describes the type of activity between the business partner and the utility company.
  Example include rates information, account information, and so on.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                               31
2.32
   CIC: Unit Summary



                        The CIC is oriented towards the needs of information-
                         based and operational processes
                        The processing interface is an efficient work
                         environment that provides quick access to critical
                         information
                        The transparency and flexibility of the CIC provides an
                         optimal link to business processes.
                        Contact management enables you evaluate the
                         complete contact history of business partners




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                   32
2.33Customer             Interaction Center Exercises

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Using the CIC

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Describe the objectives and the areas of implementation of the CIC
                        • Use the CIC to carry out processes efficiently


                     As an employee in the customer center, you must process customer
                     inquiries quickly, completely, and correctly. This increases both
                     customer satisfaction and efficiency at work. A sound working
                     knowledge of the CIC will help you achieve this.



   1-1       Which four units make up the CIC? What are their tasks?
             Unit 1: _____________________________________________
             Task: _____________________________________________

             Unit 2: _____________________________________________
             Task: _____________________________________________

             Unit 3: _____________________________________________
             Task: _____________________________________________

             Unit 4: _____________________________________________
             Task: _____________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                         33
   1-2       True or false?
             1-2-1 The CIC is the initial access point for users who handle both simple and
                   complex business processes.
                   __________________________________________________

             1-2-2 The CIC provides flexible, powerful search functions.
                   __________________________________________________

             1-2-3 The CIC dictates how the processes are handled.
                   __________________________________________________

             1-2-4 The CIC automates business processes.
                   __________________________________________________

             1-2-5 The data finder always identifies the business partner as the result of a search.
                   __________________________________________________


   1-3       To which business partner is the device with serial number TB010110## allocated?
             What is the address of the connection object?

                          Proceed as follows:

                          •   Call up the data finder using the      button
                          •   On the Technical data tab page, enter the serial number in the
                              Device data area.
                          •   To leave the data finder, choose Continue.
                          In the CIC, choose Continue again.


             Enter the address of the connection object in which the device is
             located:___________________________________________________________
             _________________________________________________________________
             ____________________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                 34
   1-4       Which premises are contained in the connection object from task 1-3?

                          Proceed as follows:
                          In the navigation area (Environment tab page), select the
                          premise. Choose the Connection object environment activity
                          using the right mouse button.


              Premise number                 Short text




   1-5       End the contact.

   1-6       Identify all the customers using the connection object on 0## Main Street. How
             business partners does the connection object contain?


                          Proceed as follows:
                          In the selection area, use the street of the connection object
                          as the search criterion. Enter the street and house number.
                          You can also make a partial entry, such as Main*. Confirm
                          your entry by choosing Enter.


              Business partner no. First and last names of business partner




             Choose Mr Petersheim and complete the following table:
              Question                          Answer
              How many contract accounts
              are assigned to Mr
              Petersheim?
              Which types of contract does
              Mr Petersheim have?
              Which devices are assigned to
              Mr Petersheim?

   1-7       Display the data environment of the premise to which contract TB010110## belongs.


(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                          35
   1-8       From the data environment in task 1-7, save the devices belonging to the premise to the
             clipboard.

   1-9       Display the data for the devices and complete the table below:
              Information               Electricity       Gas meter    Water meter
                                        meter
              Serial number
              Device category (or
              material) number
              Description of the
              device category or
              material
              Division
              Current business
              partners
              Current device location



   1-10      How can you recognize that advanced search criteria have been entered?
             ____________________________________________________________

             ____________________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                           36
                    Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Exercises

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Customer contact management

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Create various customer contacts
                        • Evaluate and display customer contact history


                     By completely documenting all customer contacts, you will be able to
                     provide a more efficient service to customers. The link to business
                     objects allows you to access relevant information instantly.




   2-1       Create a customer contact using the following information:
             2-1-1 Customer TB010110## reports a complaint by telephone. You record the
                   complaint in a customer contact.
             2-1-2 You provide customer TB010110## with general information which you make
                   more specific by supplementing it with information from the object link in the
                   customer contact. Insert contract TB010110## and contract account
                   TB010110##.

   2-2       Display contacts
             2-2-1 Display all customer contacts in the CIC for customer TB010110##. Check the
                   list of object links. If necessary, switch to the detail display of the business
                   object.
                   How many contacts does the customer have? Of what type?
                   ________________


                     Date        Class                Action              Type




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                           37
             2-2-2 Use the customer overview in the CIC to display the current customer contacts
                   for customer TB010110##.
             2-2-3 Evaluate all the customer contacts. Display all customer contacts entered with
                   contact class 8 (complaint).

                          To do this, use the information system. From the SAP Easy
                          Access menu, choose:
                              Utilities Industry  Information System  Report
                              Selection  } Customer Service  List of Customer
                              Contacts.



   2-3       True or false?
             2-3-1 All customer contacts are always created automatically.
                   ______________________________________________________

             2-3-2 Customer contacts are divided into contact classes and further sub-divided into
                   contact activities.
                   ______________________________________________________

             2-3-3 Customer contacts can only ever be displayed for one business partner at a time.
                   ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                               38
                         Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Exercises

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Master data in IS-U/CCS

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Explain the central business partner model and how it is integrated
                          in the R/3 System.


                     As an employee in customer services, you have been assigned to
                     telephone service today. Some customers only wish to obtain
                     information, but others want to have their data changed. You are using
                     the CIC as your central working environment.



   3-1       Customer TB010110## has two contract accounts. The following exercises are based
             solely on his Private Account 0##.
             The customer notifies you of new bank details that are to be used for bank collections
             for his private account.

                          •   Start from the CIC.
                          •   Use the customer overview
                          •   Process each step from the customer overview.



             3-1-1 Enter the selection criteria, display the customer overview, and enter the current
                   bank details for bank collections for the customer’s private account. Describe
                   the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-1-2 Switch from customer overview to the change mode for the business partner,
                   enter the new bank details, and save your data.
                   Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                39
                    ______________________________________________________

             3-1-3 Switch from the customer overview to change modus for the contract account,
                   choose the private account, and enter the new bank details as the payment
                   method for incoming payments. Save your changes. Describe the menu paths
                   and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   Return to the CIC.

   3-2       Customer TB010110## has two contract accounts. The following exercises are based
             solely on his Community Account 0##. The customer notifies you of new bank details
             that are to be used for bank collections for his community account.
             3-2-1 In the navigation area ( Environment tab page), select the contract account of
                   customer TB010110## and call the Change bank data activity. Describe the
                   menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   _______________________________________________________
                   _______________________________________________________


             3-2-2 Enter the new bank details for the business partner and save your data. Describe
                   the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-2-3 Enter the new bank details as the payment method for incoming payments in
                   the contract account and save your data. Describe the menu paths and mouse
                   actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-2-4 Enter a remark in the customer contact and save your data. Describe the menu
                   paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________


   3-3       Change the contract description for residential electricity contract TB010130## of the
             community account.
             Change the contract description of the residential electricity contract of the communal
             account from the old description residential electricity contract 0## to the new

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              40
             description communal electricity contract 0##. Describe the menu paths and mouse
             actions you use for this procedure.
             ___________________________________________________________
             ___________________________________________________________
             ___________________________________________________________
             ___________________________________________________________

             End the contact.

   3-4       (For countries with budget billing procedures): Customer Constance Bishop
             (TB010120##, Massachusetts Ave 0##), asks for information on her budget billings:
                          •     Enter the search criteria to identify the customer.
                          •     Call up the customer overview
                          •     Provide information on the budget billings.


             3-4-1 When was the last budget billing due for business partner TB110110##?
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-4-2 How much was the budget billing amount?
                   ______________________________________________________


   3-5       True or false?
             3-5-1 Data for a business partner who is also a contract partner, installer, and contact
                   person has to be entered more than once.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-5-2 A contract account can be assigned to several business partners.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-5-3 The contract account is the contract partner’s customer account.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-5-4 The contract contains rate data for all divisions.
                   ______________________________________________________


   3-6       Name three different logs that are updated when master data is created or changed. List
             the changes for each log. To do this, use contract TB010130##.

             1. __________________________________________________________

             2. __________________________________________________________


(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                            41
             3. __________________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                              42
   3-7       True or false?
             3-7-1 The connection object is always a building.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-2 The connection object can comprise one or more premises.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-3 The connection object is managed as a piece of equipment in the Plant
                   Maintenance component (PM).
                   _____________________________________________________

             3-7-4 The device location is subordinate to the connection object.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-5 Individual devices are installed in the connection object.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-6 The premise is managed as a functional location in PM.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-7 The installation groups together the measuring devices of a division and a
                   premise for the purpose of joint billing.
                   ______________________________________________________

             3-7-8 The installation manages basic billing control parameters.
                   ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                           43
2.34Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Solutions

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Using the CIC


   1-1
             Unit 1: Identification (selection area)
                     Task: Selects data using flexible search criteria.
             Unit 2: Navigation area
                     Task: Provides specific information in response to customer inquiries. Starts
                     complex business processes, for example SAP Business Workflow.
             Unit 3: Application area
                     Task: Provides overview pages containing inbox for SAP business workflow,
                     CIC contact management, and so on.
             Unit 4: Action box
                     Task: Calls specific business processes.

   1-2
             1-2-1 True. The CIC integrates both simple information and environment displays
                   and workflow processes that are used to control comprehensive business
                   processes.
             1-2-2 True. The CIC enables you to enter a variety of information in order to find the
                   data of a business partner. For example, you can determine a business partner
                   by means of their name or by their device number.
             1-2-3 False. The CIC is very flexible and is easily adapted and integrated with process
                   flows for different user groups.

                    True. It supports the user in implementing processes.
             1-2-4 True. CIC processes and workflow processes are integrated in the CIC. This
                   means that business processes are controlled and forwarded automatically.
             1-2-5 False. The data finder only identifies the business objects you were searching
                   for. These objects must belong to a business partner.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              44
   1-3       Call the CIC. From the SAP Easy Access menu choose:
             Utilities Industry → Customer Service  Front Office/Customer Interaction Center
              Customer Interaction Center.
             Activate the data finder by choosing
             Open the Technical Data tab page.
             In the Device data area, enter the serial number TB010110## in the Serial number
             field.
             Exit the data finder by choosing
             Choose         again. The first time you call the data, the system searches using the
             selection criteria. If the system finds data that meets the search criteria, the second data
             call confirms the search criteria. The system then displays the data.
             The system displays the connection object in which the device is located.
             All the master data belonging to the connection object is also displayed.

   1-4       Select the premise in the navigation area (Environment tab page). The Choose the
             Connection object environment by clicking on the right mouse button. Choose
             Continue.

      Premise number                    Short text
      TB010110##                        0## Massachusetts Avenue, Boston
      TB010120##                        0## Massachusetts Avenue, Boston

   1-5       Return to the CIC (F3). Choose the End contact button.

   1-6       In the identification area, search for the street of the connection object. Enter your
             search criteria. Since this connection object contains more than one business partner,
             all the business partners appear in the hit list.

      Business partner no. First and last names of business partner
      TB010110##               Elmer Petersheim
      TB010120##               Constance Bishop


             Choose Mr Elmer Petersheim. The data environment for the business partner is
                   displayed. The answers are as follows:




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                               45
       Question                       Answer
                                Mr Petersheim has two contract accounts:
       How many contract accounts are
            assigned to Mr      Private account: TB010110##
            Petersheim?
                                Community account: TB010120##
                                  Mr Petersheim has four utility contracts:
       Which types of contract does Mr
             Petersheim have? Electricity contract: TB010110##

                                      Gas contract: TB010180##
                                      Water contract: TB010120##
                                      Electricity contract: TB010130##
                                  to Petersheim has 3 devices:
       Which devices are assigned MrMr
             Petersheim?          Double-rate meter: TB01011##
                                      Water meter: TB01012##
                                      Gas meter: TB01018##



    1-7       Select the premise and choose Premise environment.
              From the tree structure, you can identify the following relationships:
              Four utility installations are allocated to the tree structure:, gas, water, and two for
              electricity. A utility contract, contract account, and business partner is allocated to each
              utility installation.
              One electricity installation contains no devices. This is a flat-rate installation that does
              not measure consumption or energy. Meters are allocated to all the other installations.

    1-8       You are in the environment of premise TB010110##. To save all the devices in the
              clipboard (corresponding tab page in the navigation area), repeat the following
              procedure for each device:
              Click on the device. This selects the line. Choose To clipboard or F8. You have now
              added the object to the clipboard. Repeat for all devices in the premise. Once you have
              added all the devices to the clipboard, return to the CIC. To confirm your actions, call
              the Clipboard tap page in the navigation area.

    1-9       On the Environment tab page of the navigation area, open the structure as far as the
              device level. To display a device, double click on it. You can now answer the following
              questions:

Information                Electricity meter  Gas meter       Water meter
Serial number                      TB010110##       TB010180##      TB010120##
Device category (or material)      TD-DRA-00             TD-GA-00              TD-WA-00
(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                46
       number
                                            IS-U
Description of the deviceIS-U double-rate meter gas meter         IS-U water meter
       category or material
                     Division 01
             Current business TB010110##TB010110##                TB010110##
                     partners
                       TB010111DL0##
             Technical device                       TB010111DL0##        TB010111DL0##
                     location


1-10   Call up the data finder and select the Other search criteria tab page. The button turns green
       when advanced selection values have been added.




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                             47
                                                                                      Solutions

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Customer contact management


   2-1
             2-1-1 Call the CIC.
                    Utilities Industry → Customer Service  Front Office/Customer Interaction
                    Center  Customer Interaction Center.
                    Select your customer. In the action box, call the Create contact function (call
                    group Customer).
                    In the Class field, enter 8 (complaint).
                    In the Action field, select 1 (unfriendly employee).
                    In the editor lines at the bottom of the screen, enter a reason for the complaint
                    and save the contact.
             2-1-2 Choose the action box call again.
                    In the Contact class field, enter 1001 Information
                    In the Activity field, enter 1001 General information provided.
                    Enter additional text on the information in the editor lines.
                    Change to the Business objects tab page. To add a link, press the Add object
                    button. Choose an object role that refers to the Utility Contract object type. The
                    system calls the data finder so that you can search for a specific contract.
                    Enter TB010110## in the contract field and choose Enter. The residential
                    electricity contract has been added to the link list. Carry out the same procedure
                    to add Contract account TB010110## to the link list. Save the contact.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                  48
   2-2
             2-2-1 In the navigation area choose the Documents tab page. Choose Refresh. This
                   gives you a list of all customer contacts for this customer. Double-clicking on
                   the individual lines displays detailed information on the customer contact.
                     You can configure the system to display customer contacts in the application
                     area; in the Customer overview tab page. The following contacts exist:
              Date                   Class    Action                Type

              08.10.98       Move-in          New customer moves in

              03.04.98       Move-in          New customer moves in

              03.04.98       Move-in          New customer moves in

              Today’s date Complaint          Unfriendly employee

              Today’s date Information        General information
                                                    provided


             2-2-2 In the action box, call the Customer overview (call group Information) The
                   most recent customer contacts are listed in the center table. By double-clicking
                   on the individual customer contacts, you activate the detail display.
             2-2-3 From the SAP Easy Access menu choose:
                     Utilities Industry  Information System  Report Selection  } Customer
                     Service  List of Customer Contacts.
                     Enter the following search criteria: Contact class: 8 (Complaint). Choose
                     Execute or F8. All contacts relating to complaints are displayed. Return to the
                     CIC.

   2-3
             2-3-1 False. Customer contacts can also be created manually. The system creates the
                   CIC contact automatically. To stop the customer contact being created,
                   deactivate the contact log.
             2-3-2 True.
             2-3-3 False. The information system can analyze all customer contacts according to
                   different criteria.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               49
                                                                                    Solutions

                     Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
                     Topic: Master Data in IS-U/CCS


   3-1
             3-1-1 Once you have identified the customer, call the Customer overview (call group
                   Information).
                    Double-click on the account Private Account 0##. This brings you to the
                    master data display of the contract account. Switch to the Payments/Taxes tab
                    page.
                    In the data area Incoming Payments you can read the bank details for incoming
                    payments in the field Bank details ID. Return to the customer overview.
             3-1-2 Place the cursor in the address field of the business partner. Choose Change or
                   F5. This brings you to the master data change screen for the business partner.
                    Switch to the Payment transactions tab page. Enter the new bank details.
                    In the ID field, enter GIRO and in the Cntry field, enter the key US . In the
                    Bank key field, enter a bank sort code using F4. In the Bank acct field, enter an
                    account number. Save your changes. You have now entered the new bank
                    details for the business partner and have returned to the customer overview.
             3-1-3 Position the cursor on Private Account 0##. Choose Change contract account.
                   This brings you to the master data change screen of the contract account.
                   Switch to the Payment/Taxes tab. Enter the new bank details for incoming
                   payments.
                    Under Incoming payments, enter GIRO in the Bank details Id field. Double-
                    click the Bank Details ID field. The new bank details are displayed (double-
                    clicking refreshes the screen).
                    Save your changes. You have now defined new bank details for incoming
                    payments and have returned to the customer overview. Return to the CIC.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                              50
   3-2
             3-2-1 In the navigation area, select the second contract account. Call the Change
                   bank data activity using the right mouse button.
             3-2-2 This brings you to the business partner to record the new bank details. Switch to
                   the Payment Transactions tab page. Now enter the new bank details. To do
                   this, enter the key GEM in the ID field.
                    In the Cntry field, enter the key US. In the Bank key field, enter a bank using
                    F4. Enter an account number in the Bank acct field. Save your changes. You
                    have now entered new bank details for the business partner and are brought
                    automatically to the previously chosen contract account.
             3-2-3 Switch to the Payment/Taxes tab page. In the ID field, enter the key GEM .
                   Double-click the Bank Details ID field. The new bank details are displayed
                   (double-clicking refreshes the screen). Save your changes. You have now
                   defined new bank details for incoming payments.
             3-2-4 In the last step, you created a customer contact. Enter a comment in the editor
                   lines at the bottom of the screen and save the changes.

   3-3       In the navigation area, select the contract and choose the Change contract activity.
             Enter the new description Community electricity contract 0## in the Text Contract
             field. Save the changes and return to the CIC.

   3-4
             3-4-1 Choose the customer overview for business partner TB110110##. Position the
                   cursor on the budget billing data. Double-click to display the budget billing
                   plan.
             3-4-2 The cumulative amount is located in the corresponding column. Return to
                   customer overview.

   3-5
             3-5-1 False. You can use the SAP business partner model to assign different roles to a
                   business partner. Only role-specific data which was not entered previously has
                   to be added.
             3-5-2 False. In IS-U/CCS, the contract account is configured in such a way that it can
                   only be allocated to a single business partner. However, a business partner can
                   have several contract accounts.
                    True. When you customize the contract account category, you can define the
                    contract account so that it can be allocated to several business partners.
             3-5-3 True. The contract account is a structure which allows the billing of posting
                   data for contracts or benefit types which have the same
                   collections/disbursements agreements. A customer account is managed for a
                   contract account.


(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                51
             3-5-4 False. The contract is an agreement between a business partners and utility
                   company which applies to a particular division. The contract contains control
                   data for billing, the generation of budget billing plans, and for managing
                   contract accounts receivable and payable. The rate data is stored in the
                   installation and in the installation structure.

   3-6       Enter the business partner key in the data finder and identify the business partner data.
             Double-click on contract TB010130## to display the master data. Here, the following
             three logs are located under the Extras menu:

             1) 1) Creation data
             2) Field changes
             3) Contract changes

   3-7
             3-7-1 False. A connection object can also be a piece of property, a well, or a building
                   site.
             3-7-2 True.
             3-7-3 False. The connection object is at the top of the hierarchy of functional
                   locations.
             3-7-4 True. Device locations are modeled as functional locations in the PM
                   component and the connection object is the higher-level concept.
             3-7-5 False. Devices are installed in device locations and are therefore indirectly
                   allocated to a connection object.
             3-7-6 False. The premise is used exclusively in IS-U/CCS to group together
                   installations of different divisions.
             3-7-7 True. Devices, registers, and fixed payment settlement factors, which are to be
                   jointly billed, are grouped together and assigned to a premise. A premise can
                   contain several installations. These can refer to the same or to different
                   divisions.
             3-7-8 True. The billing class and rate category are allocated to the installation. These
                   influence how billing runs.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              52
3
     Move-In/Out



           Contents:

            The business processes move-in, move-out, and move-
             in/out
            Effects on both the business and technical master data




          © SAP AG 1999




   You can enter all the data required for moving in or out using the pre-defined transactions move-in,
    move-out, and move-in/out. This enables you to process the whole transaction immediately, including
    sending the bill to the customer moving out and a welcome letter to the customer moving in.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                   1
3.2
   Move-In/Out: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to

                        Describe the business processes move-in, move-
                         out, and move-in/out.
                        Implement the business processes move-in, move-
                         out, and move-in/out from the CIC
                        Explain the changes to the master data




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                            2
3.3
   Move In/Out: Business Scenario



                        A customer reports a move-in.

                        You carry out the move-in in the CIC as follows:
                              Check if the customer is an existing business partner

                              Enter the premise and move-in date

                              Enter and check the personal data

                              Check the meter reading results




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                    3
3.4
   Move-In Definition



              Move-in
                Business
                 partner    At move-in, a contract is
                            concluded for each
                Contract    installation selected at one
                account     or more premises



                Contract




             Installation


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                  IUT110                         4
3.5
   Move-In: Prerequisites


                                                Connection
                                                Connection
         The following technical master          object
                                                  object
          data must be entered before
          move-in:
                  Connection object
                                                 Premise
                                                 Premise
                  Premise

                  Installation

         The device can be installed           Installation
                                                Installation
          before move-in, but this is not
          a prerequisite.


                                                  Device

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                  5
3.6
   Move-In: Business Master Data




                           Should be re-used for existing
              Business
              Business      customers
               partner
               partner



               Contract
               Contract    Can be re-used for existing
               account
                account     customers



               Contract
               Contract    Is created during move-in




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                     IUT110                        6
3.7
     The Move-In Process


                            Customer      Contract Validation                           Security           Welcome
                            visit/call                                                                      letter

                                           Contract
                                           Bank details 1
                                                             1
                                           Payment method
                                                              1
                                           A lternative payer
                                           ....
                                                            1
                                            FI -CA document
                                                             3
                                             FI -CA document




                                                                                                                      Move-in
                                                                                                                     complete


                                                                  Move-in
        Customer
        moves in                                                                              Move-in
                                                                                July          Mrs. Smith


                                                                                31
                                                                               BB          Move-In/Out
                                                                               amount
                                                                               $250


                              Business                             Meter       Budget            Customer
                           partner, account                       reading      billing            contact
                                                                                plan
          © SAP AG 1999




 Essential steps for move-in
   Identify premise
   Identify or create customer
   Select contract account and edit or create account, as necessary
   Create contract
 Optional steps for move-in
   Add contact data
   Prepare and carry out move-in meter reading
     Record results of move-in meter reading
     Maintain rate data
     Check the billability of the billing structure
     Manually maintain creditworthiness or result of automatic creditworthiness calculation.
     Request cash security deposit
     Create budget billing plan
     Create welcome letter



(C) SAP AG                                                            IUT110                                                    7
3.8
   Move-In: Options for Processing


      Parameters                                                                                                      Parameters
         Premise                                                                                                       Premise
         Business partner                                                                                              Classification of new
         Move-in date                                                                                                   business partner
       Special feature                                                                                                  Move-in date

            Transfer of existing contract
             account possible                Existing                                         New
                                             customer                                       customer


                                                                               Call
                                                                                in
                                                                               CIC
                                                Front Office: Initial Screen                                   X
                                               Front office           Edit               Goto                System     Help


                                               Context    Proces
                                                             ses



                                                 Search
                                                 Name:
                                                 criteria last/first                                  Addr.Cat.
                                                 Street/house number                                    Bus. part.
                                                 PostCd/city/cntry                                      Conn.obj.
                                                 Business partner                     Tel. no.
                                                 Activity date
                                                                                          Processes
                                                Information
                                                         Environment              Change
                                                  Call Description                Call Description




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                          IUT110                                                                       8
3.9
   Move-In: The IS-U House



                                                   Connection object


                          Apartment 1= Premise
                                                                               Hall
                                                           Installation 1:
                                                            Installation 1:
                                           Contract 1:
                                           Contract 1:                                          Apartment 3
                                           Electricity
                                            Electricity    Current meter
                                                           Current meter
                                                                              Device location
                                                                              Device location
                                                                                   Hall
                                                                                   Hall
                                                           Installation 2:
                                                            Installation 2:
                              Contract
                              Contract     Contract 2:
                                           Contract 2:
                              account         Gas                                               Apartment 2
                              account         Gas           Gas meter
                                                            Gas meter
                   Business
                   partner
                                           Contract 3:
                                                           Installation 3:
                                                            Installation 3:                     Basement
                                           Contract 3:                        Device location
                                                                              Device location
                                             Water
                                             Water                             Basement
                                                                                Basement
                                                           Water meter
                                                           Water meter

                          Service conn.: Water    Service connection: Gas             Service connection: Electricity
      Supply
      grid



      Street
          © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                        9
3.10
   Move-Out: Business Scenario



                        A customer reports a move-out
                        You can carry out the move-out from the CIC using
                         the following steps:
                             Identify the customer
                             Enter the move-out date
                             Maintain the personal data (new address)
                             Create a meter reading order




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                           10
3.11
    The Move-Out Process



                Customer reports Contract                                Final meter         Move-out
                   move-out                                            reading results      confirmation



                                        X Contract
                                          Bank detail s 1
                                          Payment method
                                          Alternative payer
                                          ....
                                           FI -CA document
                                            FI -CA document
                                                           1


                                                           1
                                                            1


                                                            3




                                                                                                       Move-out
                                           Move-out                                                    complete




                                                        X
     Customer
     moves out
                                                                July
                                                         31
                                                        BB
                                                        amount
                                                        $250


                    Contact data                    Budget                               Final
                                                    billing                              billing
                                                     plan

         © SAP AG 1999




 Essential steps for move-out:
   Identify and choose customer and contract
   Enter move-out date
   Enter final meter reading results
 Optional steps for move-out:
   Add contact data
   Edit the customer moving out and the contract account
   Prepare and carry out final meter reading
   Carry out final billing immediately and print and issue final invoice
   Create move-out confirmation
 IS-U will do the following for you:
   Terminate the contract
   Stop any budget billing collection
   Suspend any current dunning procedure
   Change any dunning procedures that may affect open items




(C) SAP AG                                                             IUT110                                     11
3.12
   Options for Move-Out Processing


       Parameters                                                                                       Parameters
            Business partner                                                                             Premise or
            Move-out date                                                                                Business partner
                                                                                                          Move-out date




                                Business
                                                                            Move-out
                                partner
                                moves out
                                                                Call:
                                                                 in
                                                                CIC
                                   Front Office: Initial Screen                                  X
                                  Front office           Edit            Goto                  System     Help


                                  Context    Proces
                                                ses



                                    Search
                                    Name:
                                    criteria last/first                                 Addr.Cat.
                                    Street/house number                                   Bus. part.
                                    PostCd/city/cntry                                     Conn.obj.
                                    Business partner                  Tel. no.
                                    Activity date
                                                                            Processes
                                   Information
                                            Environment             Change
                                     Call Description               Call Description




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                             IUT110                                                                 12
3.13
   Move In/Out: Business Scenario



                        A new customer reports a move-in and the move-out
                         of the previous customer
                        You can carry out the move-in/out from the CIC using
                         the following steps:
                              Check if the new customer is already a business
                               partner
                              Enter premise and move-in/out date
                              Enter and check the personal data
                              Enter the meter reading results




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                              13
3.14
   The Move-In/Out Process




                       M -ou
                        ove t                  ove
                                              M -in

                            Tran
                                spor
                                       t




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110     14
3.15
     Options in Move-In/Out Processing


         Parameters                                                                                                 Parameters
            Business partner                                                                                         Premise
            Move-out date                                                                                            Move-out date
            New premise                                                                                              Business partner or
            Move-in date                                                                                              classification of new
                                                                                                                       business partner
                                                                                                                      Move-in date
                                         Move-in                                         Move-
                                         /out for                                      in/out for
                                         business                                       premise
                                         partner
                                                                       Call
                                                                        in
                                                                       CIC
                                             Front Office: Initial Screen                                     X
                                            Front office Edit Goto System Help


                                            Context   Proces
                                                         ses



                                             Search
                                             Name:
                                             criteria last/first                                     Addr.Cat.
                                             Street/house number                                       Bus. part.
                                             PostCd/city/cntry                                         Conn.obj.
                                             Business partner                      Tel. no.
                                             Activity date
                                                                                         Processes
                                             Information
                                                      Environment                Change
                                              Call Description                   Call Description




          © SAP AG 1999




   In the move-in/out transaction, you have the following processing options:
     Move-in/out for premise.You can process the move-out or move-in of two different business partners
      into one premise.
     Move-in/out for business partner.You can process a move-out for a business partner from one premise
      and their move-in to another premise.




(C) SAP AG                                                       IUT110                                                                        15
3.16
   Move-In: Master Data


                   Business
                   Business                 Connection
                                            Connection
                    partner
                    partner                   object
                                              object



                   Contract
                   Contract                  Premise
                                             Premise
                   account
                    account



                       Contract
                       Contract             Installation
                                            Installation
                                  Move-in



                                              Device

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110                   16
3.17
   No Changes to Installation Data


                                            02/01/.2000




       Move-in         Customer             Move- Move-in              Customer
                                            out
                           1                                               2




                        Contract 1
                        Contract 1                               Contract 2
                                                                 Contract 2


             Nov 1st    Dec 1st   Jan 1st    Feb 1st        Mar 1st.   Apr 1st    May 1st




                                            Installation


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                      17
3.18
   Installation History


        Installation
           10815
       01/01/90 - 08/14/1992             Terminated contract 10004711

       08/15/92 - 03/31/1993                    No contract assigned

       04/01/93 - 12/16/1996             Terminated contract 10004713

       12/17/97 - 12/31/9999
                                          Current contract 10004714




                               Information on the
                               installation's data
                               environment

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                           18
3.19
   Move-In/Out: Unit Summary



                       You are now able to:

                        Describe the business processes move-in, move-out,
                         and move-in/out
                        Implement the business processes move-in, move-
                         out, and move-in/out from the CIC
                        Explain the changes to the master data




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                               19
3.20Move-In/Out                 Exercises

                     Unit: Move-In/Out
                     Topic: Move-In

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Perform the full move-in process in the system
                        • Display the move-in document generated.

                     A customer comes in person to the service center and informs you that
                     she would like a utility contract for an apartment that is currently vacant.
                     You use the CIC to perform the move-in, with today’s date as the start
                     date.


   1-1       A business partner moves in to a premise.
             1-1-1 Identify the customer
                   The customer tells you that her name is Constance Bishop, living in Boston,
                   and that she is moving into a new apartment, also in Boston. At present she is
                   living in 0## Massachusetts Avenue in Boston, MA 02100.
                   Identify the customer in the system. Once you have done this, the business
                   partner should be available in the CIC.
             1-1-2 Identify the new premise
                   Mrs Bishop requires utility contracts for her new apartment 0## East Side
                   Highway.
                   Identify the premise into which Mrs Bishop is moving. (Once you have done
                   this, you should be able to access the premise from the clipboard). Execute the
                   Identify premise call that is located in the Identify call group (action box). In
                   the Data Finder, choose the Technical data tab page and enter the street and
                   house number in the connection object area. Choose Save Enter. If the system
                   can determine a premise, it is displayed in the navigation area on the Clipboard
                   tab page. Select the entry and display the object (right mouse click - Display).
                   Enter the number of the premise here: _____________
             Choose Environment  Data, and answer the following question: Which installations
                   from Mrs Bishop’s new apartment are found in this premise? Enter them in the
                   following table:

             Installation number                  Division




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              20
                    Return to the CIC.

             1-1-3 Perform the move-in. To do this, execute the M/in: known customer call under
                   the Move I/O call group in the action box
                   Perform the move-in from the CIC . Use the business objects that you saved to
                   the clipboard. Select both entries.

                         The system prompts you to maintain the move-in date in an
                         additional step in the CIC (specify move-in parameters).
                         Enter today’s date.




                •      When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract account?,
                       answer Yes.
                •      Perform the move-in for all the installations in the premise.

                       You are now in the move-in processing screen.
                •      Name/Admin. tab page
                       In the contact data, record the fact that Mrs Bishop came by in person.
                •      Bank data tab page
                       Since Mrs Bishop has confirmed that she will continue to use the same
                       account, you do not need to make any changes here.
                •      Payment Data tab page
                       Check the payment methods that have been entered. Mrs Bishop has agreed
                       that any credit may be transferred to her bank account. Change the outgoing
                       payment method accordingly.
                •      Contract Data tab page
                       Enter the following values in the new contracts:


                         To switch between the contracts, activate the Electricity,
                         Gas and Water tab pages.




              Division Contract text
                    01 Electricity contract – 0## East Side Highway
                    02 Gas contract
                    03 Water contract — 0## East Side Highway


(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                            21
                   •      MR Data
                          Since the meter reading at device installation was taken so long ago, the
                          system does not automatically propose it as the meter reading at move-in.
                          Therefore, use the Select All button to select all the registers and choose
                          Estimate.
                   •      Save the move-in.
                   •      Return to the CIC by pressing F3.

             1-1-4 Display the current business partner data.
                   Choose Refresh in the navigation area (Environment tab page). The system
                   displays the new data you have created. In the Documents tab page of the
                   navigation area, choose Refresh. A new contact exists. Display this contact
                   (double click on the object) and choose the Business Objects tab page. Here you
                   can find the move-in document. Display this document and make a note of the
                   document number:
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-1-5 Customer overview
                   Display the customer overview for Constance Bishop. Note that both premises
                   are visible in the lower part of the screen.
             1-1-6 Customer environment
                   Display the customer environment for Constance Bishop.

             1-2       True or false?
             1-2-1 The move-in is a workflow process
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-2 A move-in connects the contracts of a business partner to the installations of a
                   premise.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-3 The installation contains the move-in date.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-4 During move-in, a business partner and his/her contract accounts and contracts
                   must already exist in the system.
                   ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                22
                                                                                   Exercises

                     Unit: Move-In/Out
                     Topic: Move-Out

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Perform the full move-out process in the system
                        • Display the move-out document generated.


                     A customer telephones and informs you that she is moving out at the end
                     of the month.
                     Perform the move-out from the CIC and enter the customer’s new
                     address.
                     In addition, request a meter reading order.

             2-1    Business partner move-out
             2-1-1 Identify customer
                   Sarah Peterson lives in 0## Massachusetts Avenue in Boston, MA 02116.
                   Identify the customer in the system. Once you have executed this step, the
                   business partner should be available in the clipboard
             2-1-2 Obtain an overview of the data environment of Mrs Peterson. To do this,
                   choose the go to the selection area and choose either the Customer Environment
                   or Customer Overview call.

                    How many contract accounts does she have? ___________________________

                    How many utility contracts? ___________________________
                    Complete the following table (with the corresponding key values):

       Division        Contract                      Installation




             Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs Smith’s account?
                    ______________________________________________________



(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                          23
             2-1-3 Perform the move-out
                   Do this from the CIC using the Move-Out Partner call under the Move-I/O
                   call group. Use the Business partner Sarah Peterson business object that has
                   been saved in the clipboard.
                •      Move-out date
                Last day of the current month
                •      Address data tab page
                       Enter Mrs Peterson’s new address:
                       0## Independence Avenue in Boston.
                •      MR Data tab page
                       Generate a new meter reading order for the meters.
                •      Save the move-out, return to the CIC and refresh the data.




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                              24
                                                                                     Exercises

                     Unit: Move-In/Out
                     Topic: Move-In/Out

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Perform a move-in/out in the system
                        • Display related documents
                        • Understand the move-in/out data environment


                     Harry Jones is moving into premise 0## Constitution Avenue in Boston,
                     MA 02129 tomorrow.
                     The previous tenant moved out of the premise today.
                     Mr Jones reports the move-out and his subsequent move-in, and provides
                     the meter readings for all the registers.

             3-1    Move-in/move-out of a premise
             3-1-1 Identify the new customer
                   Find out if Harry Jones is already a customer.
                   Harry Jones does not exist. Create the business partner in the selection area. To
                   do this, chosoe the Create button and maintain the following data:

                        Field name                         Value
                        Title                              Mr
                        Category                           Person
                        Sex                                Male
                        Last name                          Jones
                        First name                         Harry0##
                        Street                             Independence Avenue
                        Number                             2##
                        Post code                          69120
                        City                               Boston
                        Country                            US




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                            25
                          To enable each group to carry out the exercise, please attach
                          your group number to the end of the first name. You should
                          therefore subsequently search for Harry (0###) Jones.

             Choose Save Enter. You can now attempt to identify Mr Jones again (press Enter
                   twice)

             3-1-2 Identify the premise and its environment
                •       Identify the premise on the ground floor of 0## Constitution Avenue in
                        Boston, MA 02129. Use the Connection Object Environment call under
                        Information call group in the action box.
                •       Find out who was previously registered as a business partner at that address.

                        Business partner number: _____________________________

                        Name: _____________________________________________

                •       Select the premise and choose Copy to Clipboard or F8.

             3-1-3 Perform the move-in/out
             Do this from the CIC (Premise move-in/out). Use the business partner Harry 0# Jones
                    and Premise 0## Constitution Avenue in Boston, MA 02129 business objects
                    from the clipboard.
             You are on the initial move-in/out screen. You can check the dates here (such as move-
                    in or move-out date. Choose Save Enter.
             You are now in move-out processing.
                •       Enter the business partner’s new address:
                        0## Apple Tree Lane in Washington D.C.
                •       Move-out: tab page MR Data
                        Estimate the meter reading results
                •       Move-out: Save the move-out.

             You are now in move-in processing.
                •       Move-in: Bank data tab page
                        Mr Jones has account number 08154711## at the Mellon Bank in Boston
                        (under ID 1).
                •       Move-in: Payment data tab page
                        Mr Jones agrees to a direct debit and would like any credit balances to be
                        transferred to this account.
                •       Move-in: MR Data tab page
                        Check the meter reading data. Have the move-out meter readings been

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               26
                        transferred?
                        What is the meter reading type?
                •       Save the move-in.
             3-1-4 Data environment for the premise following move-in/out
                   Display the premise environment.
                   Which new contracts were created?

       Division        Contract                       Installation




                •       Switch the view from today’s data to a view which comprises the data for a
                        particular period (for example 01/01/1998 to tomorrow).
             Note that the contracts for the premise’s installations can be displayed historically.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                               27
3.21Move-In/Out Solutions

                       Unit: Move-In/Out
                       Topic: Move-In


   1-1       Business partner moves in to a premise
             Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center
             → Customer Interaction Center
             1-1-1 Identify the customer
                •         Enter the following data in the search criteria:
              Field name                           Value
              Last name                            Bishop or Bis*
              First name                           Constance or Co*
              Street                               Massachusetts Avenue, M*, or
                                                   initial
              House number                         0## or initial
              Post code                            02100 or initial
              City                                 Boston or initial
                •         Choose Enter until the data is displayed in the navigation area.
                •         The business partner identified is now also displayed in the clipboard.
             1-1-2 Identify the new premise.
                •         Enter the following data in the search criteria:
              Field name                           Value
              Street                               East Side Highway or Ea*
              House number                         0##
                •         The premise required is now in the clipboard (Clipboard tab page in the
                          navigation area).




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                            28
                    To display the desired premise information:
                •      Select the premise in the clipboard and choose the Display call via right
                       mouse click.
                •      In the premise display, choose Environment  Data.
                •      The number of the premise is TB060110##.
             Installation number                   Division
             TB060110##                            Electricity
             TB060120##                            Water
             TB060170##                            Gas
                •      Return to the Customer Interaction Center (using the F3 function key).

             1-1-3 Peform the move-in
                •      The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.
                •       Select the premise line.
                •      Choose the M/in: known customer call under the Move I/O call group.
                •      Enter today’s date in the move-in date field. Choose Execute or F8.
                       • When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract
                       account?, answer Yes.
                •      Confirm that you want to perform the move-in for all three installations on
                       the premise by pressing Enter or the green checkmark.
                •      Name/Administration: Contact data tab page
                       The personal visit of Mrs Bishop to the customer center is saved under
                       contact type.
                        Using field selection (F4), choose the value Personal.
                •      Payment data tab page
             Field name                 Value
             Outgoing payment.          B
             method
             Bank ID – outgoing         1




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             29
                •       Contracts tab page
                     Divisio Contract text
                     n
                        01     Electricity contract – 0## East Side Highway
                        02     Gas contract – 0## East Side Highway
                        03     Water contract – 0## East Side Highway
                •       Save the move-in.
             1-1-4 Display the business partner data.
                •       Proceed as described in the exercise.
             1-1-5 Customer overview
                •       Choose Customer overview from the Information call group.
                •       Return to the Customer Interaction Center.
             1-1-6 Customer environment
                •       Choose Customer environment from the Information call group.
                •       Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

   1-2       True or false?
             1-2-1 False, since all steps can by carried out by one employee at the same time and
                   without interruption.
             1-2-2 True.
             1-2-3 False, move-in and move-out dates are managed in the contract. However, the
                   installation is assigned to a contract after move-in.
             1-2-4 False. During move-in, a new business partner can be added and the contracts
                   and contract account created.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              30
                                                                                       Solutions

                       Unit: Move-In/Out
                       Topic: Move-Out


   2-1       Business partner moves out
             Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center
             → Customer Interaction Center
             2-1-1 Identify the customer
                  •       Enter the following data in the search criteria:
                                  Field name       Value
              Last name                            Peterson or Pe*
              First name                           Sarah
              Street                               Massachusetts Avenue or Ma*
              House number                         3## or initial
              Post code                            02116 or initial
              City                                 Boston or initial


                  •       Choose Enter until the data is available in the navigation area.
                  •       The business partner identified is now also found in the clipboard.

             2-1-2 Navigation area: Customer overview and customer environment.
                  •       Choose Customer environment from the Information call group.
                  •       Return to the Customer Interaction Center.
         •   How many contract accounts does Mrs Peterson have?

              No. of contract accounts             Contract account number
              1                                    TB010140##




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                        31
                       •   How many utility contracts does Mrs Peterson have?        2

              Division          Contract                   Installation
              Electricity       TB010160##                 TB010160##
              Water             TB010170##                 TB010170##


       •     Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs Smith’s account?          No.

             2-1-3 Perform the move-out
                •          The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.
                •          Choose the Move-out partner call that is found under the Move I/O call
                           group.
                •          Enter the move-out date
                •          Maintain your data on the Administration/Name and Address Data tab
                           pages.
              Field name                             Values
              Street                                 Independence Avenue
              House no.                              0##
              Post Code                              69190
              City                                   Boston.


                •          MR Data tab page
                           Activate the Service Notification/Order indicator.
                •          Save the move-out.
                •          Return to the CIC.
                •          Update the Environment and Documents tab pages in the navigation area.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                           32
                                                                                 Solutions

                     Unit: Move-In/Out
                     Topic: Move-In/Out


   3-1       Move-in/out of a premise
             Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center
             → Customer Interaction Center
             3-1-1 Identify the new customer
                •         Enter the following data in the search criteria:
                                  Field name       Value
              Last name                            Jones
              First name                           Harry(###)
                       • Search results:
                       Using the specified selections, no object from category Business partner
                       was found.
                       •     Create the business partner.
                       • Choose Enter until the data for the new business partner created appears
                       in the clipboard.
             3-1-2 Identify the premise and its environment
                •      Proceed as described in the exercise.
              Business partner                     Name
              TB000110##                           Ashley Smith
                •         Return to the Customer Interaction Center.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                          33
             3-1-3 Perform a move-in/out for a premise.
                   •      Select both objects from the clipboard.
                   •      Choose the Premise move-in/out call that is found under the Move I/O call
                          group. You can correct any data here if necessary.
                          •   You start move-in/out processing by pressing Enter.
                          •   Move-out: Address data tab page
              Field name                          Values
              Street                              Apple Tree Lane
              House no.                           0##
              Post Code                           69190
              City                                Washington D.C.


                          •   Move-out: MR data tab page
                          Select all registers
                          Choose the Estimate button.
                          •   Save the move-out document.
•   The system switches to process the move-in.
                          •   Move-in: Bank data tab page
              Field name                          Values
              ID                                  1
              Country                             US
              Bank key                            70080010
              Bank account                        08154711##


                          •   Move-in: Payment data tab page
              Field name                          Values
              Incoming payment. method            D (Direct debit)
              Bank details ID                     1
              Outgoing payment. method            B (Outgoing paym./bank
                                                  transfer)
              Bank ID – outgoing                  1
                          • Move-in: MR Data tab page
                          The meter reading type is 04 (derived meter reading).
                          •   Save the move-in document.

(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                          34
             3-1-4 The data environment of the premise after the move-in/out
                •         New contracts
                 Division       Contract                     Installation
                 01             Internally assigned contract TB000110##
                                number
                 03             Internally assigned contract TB000120##
                                number
                         •   Data environment from 01/01/1998 – to date
                      Press the button Period F7 and enter 01/01/1998 in the Valid from field.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                          35
4
    Work Management



                                     Contents:

                                     Technical objects in Work Management
                                     Customer-related Work Management
                                      (Installation services)
                                     Interfaces to external systems




         © SAP AG 1999




 A large number of work orders are accepted, planned, calculated, carried out and if necessary, billed to a
  customer in a utilities company. IS-U uses functions which already exist in the various components of
  the R/3 standard system to manage these orders. These functions are merged with IS-U-specific business
  processes in Work Management and industry-specific functions are added.
 Work Management uses a large number of functions from the Plant Maintenance (PM) and Customer
  Service (CS) components. These functions are described extensively in the documentation for PM, e.g.
  in the online documentation and in the PM handbook under PM - The functions in detail.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                   1
4.2
   Work Management: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the tasks of Work Management
                        List the most important interface systems of Work
                         Management
                        Define the functions of service and installation orders
                        Carry out simple processes in the system in the area
                         of Work Management




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                  2
4.3
    What Areas does the Work Management System
    Cover?



           Acquisition, planning, calculation, execution of internal and
            external work orders
           Creation of bills for customers
           Examples:
                   Creation and extension of service connections
                   Energy consulting
                   Unscheduled meter reading
                   Disconnection and reconnection
                   Maintenance
                   Repairs
                   Installation, extension or removal
                     of technical equipment

        © SAP AG 1999




 The day to day business of a utility company includes processing a large number of work orders. The
  orders must be accepted, planned, calculated, executed and when necessary, billed to a customer.
 There are two different types of work orders; internal work orders and external work orders (which relate
  to Customer Service). External work orders are mapped with service orders in the Customer Service
  (CS) component. Internal work orders are mapped with plant maintenance orders in the Customer
  Service (CS) component.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                 3
4.4
   Utility Management Services


                    Services for which Work Management can be
                                    implemented:
                 Typical services for private / commercial customers
                                           ..




               Generation
               Generation           Transmission
                                    Transmission            Distribution
                                                            Distribution

                                                          • Power distribution
                                                          • Power distribution
             Plant servicing
             Plant servicing                              • Installation
                                                          • Installation
                                   Network services
                                   Network services       • Electricity supply
                                                          • Electricity supply
         Plant management
         Plant management                                 • Meter reading
                                                          • Meter reading




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                                    4
4.5
   Work Management: Technical Objects




         Technical objects
         Installation services
         Interfaces




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110   5
4.6
     Overview of Technical Objects



            Description:                                                   Description:
              Technical objects in                                           Technical objects with a direct
              transmission and distribution                                  reference to the customer can
                                                                             be reproduced in IS-U.



            Example:                                                       Example:
                 Transformer substations                                       Connobj
                                                 Plant
                                                 Plant          Customer
                 Transmission lines          Maintenance        Service        Premise
                 Transformer stations                         IS-
                                                               IS-U             Device location
                                                       PM/CS
                 Transformers                                                  Devices
                 Switching stations                                            Device relationship




                                                Technical objects in
                                                       the
                                                   supply area




          © SAP AG 1999




   Object links: connections between individual systems
   Hierarchy between functional locations and equipment.
   Classifications: Describe technical data of all object types.




(C) SAP AG                                                  IUT110                                             6
4.7
   Supply Grid

                                                    Pylons
                                                   (equip.)
                      Distribution station ST
                      Distribution station ST
                                435
                                435                                       Distribution station ST
                                                                          Distribution station ST
                         (functional loc.)
                          (functional loc.)                                         571
                                                                                    571

                           Field Field
                           Field Field                                         Field
                                                                               Field   Field
                                                                                       Field
                            01
                            01    02
                                   02                                           01
                                                                                 01     02
                                                                                         02
      Line no. 186
      Line no. 186                                 Line no. 187
                                                   Line no. 187
       (func. loc.)
       (func. loc.)                                 (func. loc.)
                               Field 03
                               Field 03             (func. loc.)                 Field 03
                                                                                 Field 03

                                                Transformer                                         Line no. 188
                                                                                                    Line no. 188
                                                Transformer
                                                   fields
                                                    fields

              Line no. 189
              Line no. 189

                                                                   Object connection used to connect
                                                                   two systems with different
                       Field
                       Field    Field
                                Field                              hierarchies
                        01
                         01      02
                                  02
                                                                   Line network with subsections

                          Field 03
                          Field 03
                                                                   Distribution station with
                                                                   transformer fields
               Distribution station ST
               Distribution station ST
                         768
                         768

          © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                       7
4.8
     Connection Object




                                                  Connection obj.
                                                    (func. loc.)
                                              Premise
                                                                                         Technical installations
                                                                                             (equipment)
                                              Premise



             Transformer     Connection       Dev. loc.         0716192      0716192


             (equipment)     (equipment)      (func. loc.)      0539802      0539802

                                                               125.256.01   125.256.01



                                                             Devices (equipment)




         © SAP AG 1999




   The technical installation is division-dependent.
 A maximum of one technical installation can be created for each division in each premise. An
  equipment is created in PM automatically.
 Since the technical installation is a piece of equipment, it can be subject to regular maintenance,
  for example.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                            8
4.9
   Work Management: Services




         Technical objects
         Installation services
         Interfaces




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110   9
4.10
     Installation Services

                                                                                                   Premise
                                                                                                   Premise




                                      Domestic installation services

                                   Damage repairs

                                       Monitoring of domestic installations

                              Device services (installation/removal)

           me
              te
          rea r no:
                                Maintenance of appliances
             ding    32
                  : __ 4561
                      ___
                         _




                                              Special meter readings                                 OFF

                                                                                                     ON


                                       Reconnection/shutdown

                                       Other on-site services
          © SAP AG 1999




   The tasks of installation services center around the connection object and the device location. Services
    may relate to equipment in the utility company or at the customer's installation, for example:
     Consulting, installing, maintaining, monitoring, extending
         Own installations: connection, technical measure installation, ...
         External installations: heating, air conditioning, elevators, ...
     Certification, meter reading
     Break-in protection, security, fire protection, elevators, installation control, energy consulting ...




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                   10
4.11
     Basic Structure of a Work Order


                                                    Examples: order type, dates, plant, reference object,
           Order header                                          priority, description


                                                              Equipment (assembly)
                    Object list                               Functional locations
                                                              Maintenance notifications

                                                      Examples: work center, control key,
                    Processes                                     description, standard time,
                                                                  activity type, wages

                                                       Examples: materials, quantities, units of measure,
                                  Material list        storage location, batch, item category, availability

                                                              Examples: protective clothing, crane, traffic
                               Production resources          lights, fire extinguisher,signs, excavator


                          Billing rule



                   Costs (planned/actual)

          © SAP AG 1999




   Header data is information used to identify and administer work orders. This information applies to the
    whole order. Examples of header data are the order number, description, order type, dates for order
    execution, priority, the person who created the order and the person who last changed it.
   The object list contains functional locations, equipment, assemblies, maintenance notifications, and/or
    materials with serial numbers. A single object can be entered in the order header as a reference object. In
    the object list, several objects can be entered.
   Processes are used to describe the work to be carried out according to the order (the process includes the
    work center, the time required and the control key).
   Materials are spare parts that are needed and used to execute the order.
   Production resources (e.g. tools, protective clothing, and special heavy goods vehicles) are also needed
    to execute the order, but are not actually used in the order.
   The data in the billing rule states who is usually responsible for the costs. The data is taken from the
    master record of the reference object. It can, however, be changed during the first steps of the billing
    process for the order.
   The cost data informs you of the estimated costs, as well as the planned and actual costs of the order, the
    relevant cost categories for the order, the updating of key figures in the PMIS with value categories, and
    the updating of these key figures with actual costs.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                    11
4.12
     Sequence of Order Processing


           Entry/notification

                          Planning

                               Release

                                       Printout

                                             Execution

                                                   Confirmation

                                                      Technical completion

                 For service orders only                             Invoicing

                                                                              Billing

                                                                                  Commercial
                                                                                  completion

          © SAP AG 1999




   Processing starts when a customer or employee reports an outage, disruption or other request
    (such as a modification request). An order can be created directly, or on the basis of a
    notification.
   Typical planning tasks include defining work processes, reserving replacement parts or defining
    working hours.
   The order is then transferred for scheduling and control. Availability is checked, capacity
    required is provided and the necessary shop papers are printed.
   Execution includes obtaining replacement parts from the stock and actually executing the order.
   Once work is complete, the actual times required to complete the work are recorded. Other
    technical information is also entered to document repairs and define the status of the technical system.
    The order is then billed in Controlling.
   Billing is performed prior to invoicing for a service order and a bill is created for the customer.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                     12
4.13
    Service Product: Concept


           Description of energy
       resources for work, materials...
                                                               Connection objec,t
             external resources
                                                                    device

                                          Technical
                                           object
             Instructions

                                           Service              Customer                 Service
                                           product                order                   order
                Service
                material
                                          Configur.


                 Sales view
              Price information                                Characteristics
                                                                  Values
                                                               Dependencies

         © SAP AG 1999




 IS-U uses the customer order from the Sales & Distribution application component (SD) and the service
  order from the Plant Maintenance component (PM) to manage customer-related business transactions.
  These documents are linked using a service product. A service product is a service that is sold in SD and
  performed in PM.
 You can assign a general maintenance task list to a service product. You can also specify a technical
  object (such as equipment) for which the service is to be performed.
 The system copies the general maintenance task list and the technical objects into the service order in the
  PM component. You can use configuration in the customer order or the technical object to define and
  analyze individual instructions.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                 13
4.14
   Service Product: Create Service Connection

                                    Service product
                                    Service product



       Service material                                                 Instructions

                                      Configuration                 1. Dig trench
                                                                        Time: 0.5h per m
                                                                        Tool: Excavator
       Cable per m        60 UNI   Chars         Values
                                                                    2. Secure excavation
       Excavation per m 150        Type of ground: Light                Only for soft ground
                        UNI
                                   Length:         10m              3. Lay cable
       Connection boxes                                                 Material: X m cable
        Type A     1,200 UNI       Connection type A
        Type B     1,500 UNI                                        4. Install connection boxes
                                   Internal service Yes                 Time: 1h
       BB amount for                                                    Material: Connection box
       internal service    300
                            UNI                                     5. Fill trench
                                                                        Time: 0.2 h per m


                                                       Service object
                                                       Service object
     Quotation, customer order
     Quotation, customer order                                              Service order
                                                                            Service order
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                               14
4.15
     The Installation Services Process




                                      Customer
                                                                                       Document
                                             3            4
                             1
                                                               IS-U/                           10
                     Front office                              CCS                FI-CA
                                                                                                                            UTILITY BILL
                                                                                                                                                P.O. #:




                                                                                                   Customer                                 Premise

                                                                                                              Qty Shipped                                   Price           Total
                                                                                                                             Description




                                      Workflow        Management                                Qty Ordered




                      SD                     2             5
                                                                                                               DATE             SALE SPE RSON                           To tal

                                                                                                                                                           S ubt otal

                                                                                                                                                          Sales Tax




                                                                                   9   Invoicing:
                      Request for                                       Billing
                                       Quotation      Order                            Installation
                      quotation                                        request           services




                                                                                  OR
                                                                             8            IS-U/
                                                           6
                      PM/CS                                                               CCS
                                                 7
                                                      Work                               Invoicing:
                                                                                        installation
                                                      order                                Supply
                                                                                          services


          © SAP AG 1999




   Management of a service connection could be performed as follows:
    (1) A customer requests a quotation for the installation of a service connection. The customer service
        representative identifies the customer in the CIC or creates the corresponding customer master
        record (if the customer is not already defined in the system).
    (2) The customer service representative creates a customer quotation in the Sales & Distribution (SD)
        component.
    (3) A quotation notification is created and sent to the customer. A service order can be generated
        automatically in the background in the CS component (6).
    (4) The customer accepts the quotation.
    (5) The customer service representative generates a sales order. Order items can be automatically
        transferred from the quotation.
    (6) A service order is created automatically in the background if this was not created with the quotation
        (3).
    (7) The service connection is made on site.
    (8) If the service is invoiced according to consumption (i.e. if the actual costs incurred are to be billed), a
        billing request is created in the SD component.
    (9) The invoice is triggered and posted in the SD component. If the service is not invoiced according to
        consumption, but on a flat rate, the invoicing procedure is based on the sales order. As an alternative
        to invoicing in SD, it is also possible to create the invoice for the service in IS-U/CCS and to offset it
        with consumption billing.
(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                                                                                        15
    (10) The invoiced amount is then entered as a debit amount in the FI-CA component.





(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                  16
4.16
    Create Service Connection

                                                         Create
                                    Accept           customer order
                                   quotation                                   Create
                Create                                                      service order
               quotation




                              Customer                Agent
                                                                          System
          Agent
                                         Workflow
                                                                                Create
                    Payment                                                  service conn.
                                      Trigger               Confirm
                                     invoicing            service order




          Customer                                                        Technician
                                   Agent                  Agent

        © SAP AG 1999




 The "service connection" business process (such as new installation of a service connection or
  extension of an existing service connection) can be further divided into three subprocesses:
   Management of quotations
   Order processing
   Order completion and invoicing
 The order processing subprocess includes the external customer order and the internal service
  order.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                            17
4.17
   Work Management: Interfaces




         Technical objects
         Installation services
         Interfaces




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110   18
4.18
     Possible Configuration of an Interface Scenario


                      R/3                                  MDI               Mobile
                                      Customer                                Mobile
                   Standard                           Service orders         devices
                                                                             devices
                                                      Completion
                                         service      confirmations
                              Work
                              Work                    Service orders
                                                                         Decentralized
                                                                         Decentralized
                           Management
                           Management                 confirmations        resource
                                                                           resource
                                                                           planning
                                                                           planning
                 Applications
                                                                                 Outage
                                                             Outage
                                                                                 confirmations
                                                             notifications
                                                             and orders
                    Situation
                    monitoring                                               Outage
                                                                              Outage
                                 SCADA         Transformer
                                                                             analysis
                                                                             analysis
                                               station
          Geographical
                                               outages
          data

              AM/FMGIS                       Connection information


         © SAP AG 1999




   MDI: Mobile Data Interface
   SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
   GIS: Geographical Information System
   AM/FM: Asset Management / Facility Management




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                            19
4.19
   Technical Objects in Work Management and GIS



                                                  Object ID

        Transformer
        Transformer                               Connectivity
                              Transformer
                              Transformer
           station
           station                                information
                        WMS




        Connection
        Connection            Connection
                              Connection
          object
          object                             Object ID

                                             Connectivity information:
                                             GIS Business
              Device
              Device            Device       Connector
                                Device
             location
             location
                        CCS                                         GIS


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                           20
4.20
    Device Repairs


                     Customer complains about a faulty device




                         Agent selects the service object
                         in the CIC




                          The service order, instructions, tools
                          and materials are sent to the
                          responsible technician



         © SAP AG 1999




 In the CIC you can trigger the generation of a repair order by first selecting the customer and starting the
  process.
 You select the corresponding technical object from the displayed customer overview screen.
 The repair order is automatically created.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   21
4.21
   Work Management: Unit Summary



                       You are now able to:

                        Identify the most important tasks and interface
                         systems in Work Management

                        Carry out simple processes in the system in the area
                         of Work Management

                        Describe which external systemscna be used in
                         conjunction with Work Management




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                22
4.22Work Management Exercises

                     Unit: Work Management
                     Topic: Service Orders

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Perform the Front Office process “Create service order”.



                     You will become familiar with a sub-area of Work Management.




   1-1       Create a service order using the CIC.
             1-1-1 Business partner Elmer Petersheim, Massachusetts Avenue0## in Boston
                   reports a device fault. Create a service order (repair order). using the CIC.
                    Identify the business partner.
                    Under the Environment tab page in the navigation area, select the dual rate
                    meter and access the Front Office process Create repair order by means of a
                    right mouse click.
             1-1-2 Which order number has been assigned by the system?
                    _________________________________________________________

                    What is the customer contact number?
                    _________________________________________________________

             1-1-3 Which work center has been determined?




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             23
4.23Work Management Solutions

                     Unit: Work Management
                     Topic: Service Orders


   1-1       Create service order.
   Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center →
   Customer Interaction Center
             1-1-1 Use the search functions in the CIC to determine your business partner. Enter
                   the data and confirm this by pressing Enter. By pressing Enter a second time,
                   the customer data will be recorded in the Environment tab page. Expand the
                   structure of Elmer Petersheim’s private account to the dual rate meter and select
                   this. Access the front office process by right mouse clicking and choosing
                   Create repair order.
                   The service order is created in the background. Save the customer contact.
                   Contacts and service orders are listed under the Documents tab page in the
                   navigation area once you have pressed Refresh. You can display both
                   documents by selecting them and choosing Display (right mouse click).

                    Customer contact number: __________

                    Service order number: __________

             1-1-2 You can also determine the service order from the clipboard in the navigation
                   area or from the customer contact in the Business objects tab page (select and
                   right mouse click on Display in each case).

             1-1-3 The work center is recorded in the service order. Choose order display and
                   display the Operations tab page.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                               24
5
    Device Technology



        Contents:

         Device category as the basis for device definition
                  Device category data and attributes
                  Integration in the standard R/3 System
         Devices and registers
                  Device data
                  Integration in the standard R/3 System
                  Register data
         Device lifecycle
         Device inspection
                  Sample lot
                  Certification

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110              1
5.2
   Device Technology: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the function of the device category
                        Process device-related activities
                              Definition of the device category and device features
                              Creation and delivery of devices
                        Explain device inspection
                              Sampling procedure
                              Certification
                        Explain how the device category and the device are
                         integrated in the standard SAP System



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                  2
5.3
   Demands on Device Management



                           Technical modeling of complex devices and
                            installation structures (such as integrated water
                            meters, instrument panels)
                           Organization of billing-related data (such as rental
                            prices, meter readings)
                           Recording of comprehensive device history as the
                            basis for meter reading, billing, maintenance, and
                            inspection
                           Controlling device stocks in terms of quantity and
                            value, integration in Materials Management and
                            Asset Management



      SAP Utilities

          © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                               3
5.4
   Device Management: Business Scenario



                        Creation and delivery of new devices

                              Definition of the device category and device
                               information

                              Ordering and posting the goods receipt for the new
                               device

                        Inspection and certification of devices




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                 4
5.5
   Device Technology: Device Category



         Device category as the basis for device definition
         Devices and registers
         Device lifecycle
         Device inspection




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110                     5
5.6
   The Device and the Device Category


                       Device category                       Device
                                                                Serial number
                                                                 Sie-970701-503
                                                                Manuf. by Siemens
                                                                Prod. year: 1997
                                                                Valid from 01.07.97


                                                                Serial number
                                                                 AEG-980101-125
                                                                Manuf. by AEG
                                                                Prod. year: 1998
                                                                Valid from Jan. 1,
                                                                 1998

                                                                Serial no.
                                                                 LGY-980701-300
            Single-rate meter that is subject to
             certification                                      Manuf. by
                                                                 Landis&Gyr
            Plastic housing and external seal
                                                                Prod. year: 1998
            Six pre-decimal places, one decimal
             place                                              Valid from July 1,
                                                                 1998

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                             6
5.7
     Modeling of Devices


              Basic device cat.      => Basic functions of device categories, such as:
                                            Meters
                                            Transformers
                                            Pressure regulators


            Device category 1        => Features of similar devices
                                            Definition of technical device data
                Device category 2           Recording of inspection and certification periods
                                            The device category corresponds to the material in
                                             the MM component



                                     => Specific device data
                     Device 1                   Device number/serial number
                                                Activity dates, such as installation, removal, or meter
                          Device 2               reading
                                                Certification and maintenance data
                            Device 3            "Device" corresponds to "equipment" in the Plant
                                                 Maintenance (PM) component
          © SAP AG 1999




   Examples of basic device categories:
     Meters measure consumption
     Transformers convert. (Example: electrical voltage)
     ARCRs (audio frequency ripple control receivers) transmit information via the electricity grid by
       means of audio frequency modulation.
     Remote meters measure consumption from a distance
     Counters calculate heat quantities generated in district heating
     Correctors calculate standard cubic meters from gas values
     Pressure regulators adjust gas pressure
     Sensors act as pulse generators, e.g. temperature sensors




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                               7
5.8
    Integration with Logistics




                    IS-U
             Device management                                            Logistics




              Device category                                            Material




                        Device                                        Equipment



        © SAP AG 1999




 IS-U functions of device management include:
   Technical data such as the register group, the input/output group, and command group and so on.
   Installation, as well as removal and replacement of devices
   Installation structure for modeling devices and register relationships, in addition to rate data
   Organization and carrying out of meter readings in the service territory
   Inspection: sampling procedure, certification, periodic replacement
 Integration of IS-U/CCS Device Management with the standard R/3 Logistics component makes it
  possible to use the following:
   Inventory Managment (MM-IM component)
   Purchasing (MM-PUR component)
   Warehouse Managment (MM-IM and MM-WM components)
   Plant Maintenance (PM component)
   Classification system




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                8
5.9
   Definition of Device Category




                       Device category




                                                                       e
        The device category groups together devices with the same featur s
        (data).
                                                                       r
        Device categories are managed as materials with a material numbe in the
        Materials Management application component.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                 9
5.10
   Device Category Data



               Basic data                                      General
                                                               • Construction class
               • Description of material                       • Function class
               • Value, price                                  • Price class
               • Allocated documents                           • Notes



         Logistics                                                     Certification
         • Storage
         • Warehouse management            Device category             • Certification requirement
         • Transport data                                              • Certification period
         • Quality management



                 Planning                                    Additional data
                                                             dependent on basic device category

                  • Procurement planning                     • Register group
                  • Price estimate                           • Winding group
                  • Forecasts                                • Input/output group


        MM data                                                                IS-U data

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               10
5.11
    Possible Elements of the Device Category


                         Function-related

                            Informative


                                                             Material
                                                                MM


           Register group
                                            Device category
                                                      IS-U



                                                                                  Input/output
                                                                                     group
                 Winding group



                                                      Command
                                                       group

         © SAP AG 1999




 Certain functional element groups are required, depending on the basic device category. Examples:
   Devices of the basic device category METERS must be allocated to a register group. However, an
     input/output group may be assigned for technical descriptions of the available device interfaces, if
     desired.
   Allocation of a winding group in which the billing data is recorded is obligatory for devices of the
     TRANSFORMERS basic device category. An input/output group can also be maintained for
     information purposes (such as for service technicians), if required.
 Data on device category elements can be arranged according to division category (the reactive
  current/active current indicator can for instance only be maintained in the register group of the electrical
  division).




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   11
5.12
   Device Category: Device and Register



         Device category as the basis for device definition
         Devices and registers
         Device lifecycle
         Device inspection




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110                     12
5.13
   Definition of Devices




                        Device
                        category

                                                    Device




                                                                       rocess
        A device is an instrument that is used to measure consumption, p
        data, or control and protect other instruments.
                                                                       mponent
        Devices are managed in the Plant Maintenance (PM) application co
        as pieces of equipment with serial numbers.


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                 13
5.14
    Device Data

                                                   Header data
                                               • Material and serial no.         General
                                               • Equipment category              • Device category, basic
         General
                                                 and number                        category
          • Inventory number
                                               • Status                          • Lock status
          • Weight/volume
                                                                                 • Change documents
          • Reference data
                                                                                 • Time slices
          • Manufacturer data
          • Stock information

                                                                                     Processes
                                                                                     • Installation and removal
          Processes                                        Device                    • Modification and
          • Maintenance orders                                                         disconnection
          • Service orders                                                           • Certification
          • Messages                                                                 • Meter reading
          • Capacity planning



                                                                           Device-specific data
                     Plant maintenance
                                                                           • Group data, prod. year
                         • Maintenance plant
                                                                           • Manufacturer, cat.desc.
                         • Maint. planning plant
                                                                           • Ownership status
                         • Maint. planner group
                                                                           • Certification data
                         • Main work center
        PM                                                                                                  IS-U

         © SAP AG 1999




 The device master record is divided into various sections (tabs):
   General data: technical data, reference data, manufacturer data
   Location data: area assignment and account assignment elements
   IS-U data:
       Technical data: register group, winding group, command group (depending on the device basic
       category)
       Certification /inspection data: year of certification, certification status, lot, year of replacement,
       inspection status
       Processes: installation, removal, modification, and disconnection
       Master data: business partners, connection object, device location, location, premises
       Meter reading results, designated plants
       Serialization data: allocated to material and serial number with stock information, plant and
       location.
 When devices are moved (e.g. goods receipt, goods issue, installation, removal), the equipment status
  is updated (ESTO, AVLB, INST). The status of the device informs the user that a certain business
  process has been performed. (Example: ESTO means that the device was entered in the system via a
  goods receipt posting and is available in a warehouse).




(C) SAP AG                                                  IUT110                                                 14
5.15
   Definition of a Register




              Device
              category

                                          Device


                                                                         Register


        A device that meters consumption, energy, and so on.
        This can refer to the actual instrument or simply the display inan
        electronic device.
        The register is identified by a register number in the device.


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                 15
5.16
    Register Data


                                               Register
             General                         configuration       Meter readings
             • Register category
                                                                  • Recorded meter reading
             • Register type (time zone)
                                                                  • Estimated meter reading
             • Pre-decimal places
                                                                  • Multiple allocation
             • Decimal places


       Technology                                                       Meter reading
      • Quantity unit                                                   • Reason
      • Register code, such as                 Register                 • Type of reading, meter
        reactive energy or active                                         reader
        power                                                           • Date
      • Display type, transformer                                       • Status


               Meter reading
                                                                Register relationships
               • Number of meter reading
                 results per meter reading                      • Relationship type
               • Indicator: nonmetering                         • Relationship register
                 register                                       • Operation code

                                              Sample register
        Technical data                         relationship                       Process data
         © SAP AG 1999




 Examples of register relationships:
   Active/reactive relationship
   Serial switching relationship
   On-peak/off-peak
     relationship
   Control relationship
   VCF relationship (thermal gas billing)
   VCF calculation relationship (thermal gas billing)
 You can assign individual validations to each register relationship to check the meter reading results.
  Example: Meter reading results from two registers that are connected by a control relationship can only
  differ by a maximum of 1%. If this tolerance is exceeded, the meter reading result is not accepted and is
  assigned the status "implausible".




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                               16
5.17
   Device Technology: Device Lifecycle



         Device category as the basis for device definition
         Devices and registers
         Device lifecycle
         Device inspection




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110                     17
5.18
   Central Data Objects - Integration in Logistics


                                             Business
                                                                          Regional
                                              partner
                                                                          structure


                           FI-CA             Contract
                         document            account

                             Billing
                          document            Contract
                                           (Utility supply)
                        (Utility supply)


                        Point of                              Premise    Connection
                                               Installation
                        delivery                                           object
       IS-U
       IS-U
       FI-CA
       FI-CA            Device                                Device
                        category               Device
                                                              location
     Cross appl.
     Cross appl.
                                                                         Connection

   Integration
                        Register               Register       MR
   with Logistics
                         group                                service

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                           18
5.19
    Device Life Cycle



                            Purchase          Purchase
         MM        PM      requisition        order

                                                                       Goods
                                                                       receipt




                                                                                        Goods
        Retirement                                                   Transfer
                                                                                        issue



                           Inspection/
                            Inspection/
                          certification/
                          certification/                             Installation
       IS-
       IS-U
                        reprogramming
                        reprogramming

                                               Removal/
       Device management
                                             replacement
       Installation


        © SAP AG 1999




 Devices are created in an integrated system using standard R/3 components, such as Purchasing (MM-
  PUR), Inventory Management (MM-IM) and Plant Maintenance (PM). Devices are created as pieces of
  equipment in the system by posting a goods receipt for any number of devices of a particular device
  category. The entire goods procurement process can be performed in an optional first step (purchase
  requisition ordering and so on).
  A prerequisite is that the device category has already been created and therefore exists as a material
  master in the MM component. The serial number profile of the material master (in Customizing) ensures
  that the device in question is supplied with the necessary IS-U data.
 If the Materials Management (MM) component is not implemented, it is also possible to create devices
  directly in IS-U/CCS. However, IS-U/CCS does not provide inventory management functionality.
 Although device installation is performed within IS-U/CCS, it is, however, based on a modified version
  of the PM component.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                19
5.20
   Documentation for the Device Lifecycle



                      Specification of the device: device category, device
         IS-U         Installation: installation, removal, replacement, installation structure
                      Meter reading: organization, meter reading orders, entry of meter
                       reading results
                      Inspection and certification: internal or external periodic replacement
                       procedure or sampling procedure
                      Purchasing: purchase orders, inquiries/quotations, outline agreements
         MM
                      Warehouse logistics: transport, stocktaking, transfer posting
                      Inventory management: goods movement, reservation
                      Valuation, stocktaking, material requirements planning

                      Maintenance of technical objects and equipment
         PM           Work planning, maintenance planning
                      Maintenance processing

                      Service contracts: contracts, maintenance plans
         CS           Service processing: notifications, orders, completion
                       confirmations
                      Service planning: scheduling, work plans
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                            20
5.21
   Device Technology: Device Inspection



         Device category as the basis for device definition
         Devices and registers
         Device lifecycle
         Device inspection




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110                     21
5.22
   Introduction: Device Inspection and Certification



                          External certification involves a device being inspected
                           by a state inspection authority. If a device passes an
                           inspection according to the prescribed margins of error, the
       SAP Utilities       device is certified for the calibration validity period.

                          Internal certification involves the utility company
                           voluntarily inspecting a device according to company
                           standards. When the internal certification period expires,
                           the device is inspected again in accordance with the
                           company's criteria and the certification is renewed.

                          In the certification procedure, you can either inspect all
                           devices or a sample of devices.




         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                      22
5.23
    Certification Procedures Overview


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Sieme ns

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Siemens                                                Proper ty no..

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       4567,8                                                                          4567,8                          Prop erty no..                                         SIE-$/)($%)/

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       SIE-$/)($%) /

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Siemens                                                                          Sieme ns

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Property no..                                                                    Property no..

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      SIE-$/ )($%)/                                                                    SIE-$/)($%)/


                                                                                                                                     4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               4567,8
                                                                        4567,8                                                       Siemens                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                Sieme ns                                         4567,8
                4567,8
                                                                                                                                     Prop erty no..
                                                                                                                                                                                Proper ty no..   4567,8                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Sie mens
                                                                        Siemens                                                      SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Sie mens
                                                                                                                                                                                SIE-$/)($%)/                                     Sie mens                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Property no..
                                                                        Prop erty no..                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Sieme ns
               Siemens                                                                                                                                                                                                           Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       4567,8                                                                                  SIE-$/)($% )/
                                                                        SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Property no..                   SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           4567,8                                                                                                                       SIE-$/)($%)/
               Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                4567,8                           SIE-$/) ($%)/
               SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Sieme ns
                                                                                                                                                               Si emens                                                                                                                                                                                                Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Property no..
                                                                                                                                                               Pr operty no..                                                                                                                                                                                          SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                              4567,8                                                                                                                                                                       SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                               SI E-$/)($%)/


                                                                                                              Sieme ns                                                                                           4567,8                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4567,8
                                                                                                              Property no..
                                                4567,8                                                        SIE-$/) ($%)/                                                                                      Sie mens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Property no..                   4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4567,8                                                                                    Proper ty no..
                                                Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                                                           4567,8                          SIE-$/)( $%)/
                                                Property no..                                                                                                                                                                                    Siemens
           4567,8                               SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Property no..                                                                                                                                          Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Property no..
           Siemens
                                                                                                                                                       4567,8                                                                                    SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             SIE-$/ )($%)/
           Prop erty no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        SIE-$/)( $%)/                                                4567,8
           SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                             4567,8                                                    Sieme ns

                                                                                                                                                       Property no..                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Sieme ns

                                                                                             Si emens                                                  SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Property no..

                                                                                             Pr operty no..                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SIE-$/)($%)/

                                                                                             SI E-$/)($%)/




                                                                                                                                                   Device
                                                                                                                                                  category                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Device
                                                                                                                                                     A                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  category
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           B

                               Sample                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Periodic replacement list
                               4567,8                           4567,8                   4567,8                      4567,8                                                                                                                                                                4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   4567,8                        4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  4567,8
                               Siemens                          Sieme ns                 Siemens                     Siemens                                                                                                                                                              Siemens          4567,8                        4567,8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          4567,8 Property no..                     Si emens                      Sie mens
                               Prop erty no..                   Proper ty no..           Property no..               Property no..                                                                                                                                                Sieme ns          4567,8 Pr operty no.. 4567,8 Property no..
                               SIE-$/)($%)/                     SIE-$/)( $%)/            SIE-$/)($%)/                SIE-$/)($%)/                                                                                                                                   4567,8 Proper ty no.. )($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SIE-$/           Sie mens                      Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4567,8 Property no.. 4567,8 Property no..

                                                                                                                                                      Replacement
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   SI E-$/)($%)/                 SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Sieme ns
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4567,8 Property no.. $%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SIE-$/)(                                         Siemens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Siemens          4567,8 Property no.. 4567,8 Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           SIE-$/)($% )/                 SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SIE-$/)($%)/        Siemens                        Sie mens
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Prop erty no..                    SIE-$/) ($%)/                   SIE-$/)($%)/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Si emens                           Property no..                   Pr operty no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SIE-$/)($%)/      Siemens                         Sie mens




                                                                                                                                                      orders for sample
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Pr operty no..                     SIE-$/)($%)/                    SIE-$/)($% )/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Property no..                   Property no..
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 SI E-$/)($%)/




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Replacement
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            SIE-$/)($%)/                    SIE-$/)($%)/




                                                                                                                                                      devices and spare                                                                                                                                                                                                     orders for all
                                                                                                                                                      sample devices                                                                                                                                                                                                        devices
         © SAP AG 1999




 You certify the devices in device category A individually (since, for instance, they may be particularly
  prone to errors, or because the number of devices is too small to allow use of the sampling procedure).
  Therefore, these devices are included in the periodic replacement list and are removed. All of the devices
  are then inspected. When they pass inspection, they are certified individually.
 You certify device category B using the sampling procedure, which requires that only a certain
  percentage of the devices (sample devices) have to be removed. The sample devices are determined
  using the lot procedure. If the devices pass the inspection, then the internal certification periods of all
  devices assigned to this lot are increased by the time period set in Customizing (for example, for 4
  years). Normally, the checked devices themselves are certified individually (for example, for 16 years).




(C) SAP AG                                                                                                                                                                                                              IUT110                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       23
5.24
   Certification Procedure



       Description:                                              Description:
         Only a representative sample                              Devices due for certification are
         of devices is removed for                                 removed completely and
         inspection and replaced.                                  replaced by identical devices.



       Procedure:                                     Periodic Procedure:
                                        Sample
            Create lot                             replacement  Create periodic replacement
                                                         list      list
            Compile lot
            Determine lot devices                                    Select device categories

            Perform first drawing                                    Create list in foreground or
                                                                       background
            Inspection                          IS-U                 Replacement orders created
                                                                       automatically



                                          Certification
                                           of devices

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                24
5.25
   Sampling Procedure



         Description:
                  Used for selecting and placing devices in sample lots.
                  A defined number of devices are drawn for inspection from this
                   lot.
                  The results of the inspection determine the renewal period of
                   the lot.
         Goals:
                  Official lots:
                   Renewal of the calibration validity of the lot devices if the
                   sample devices are certified.
                  Internal lots: Quality control




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                25
5.26
    Inspection Using the Sampling Procedure


                                                               Conduct
                                                               Conduct
              Create
              Create         Compile
                             Compile         Determine
                                              Determine          first
                                                                  first
                lot
                lot            lot
                               lot           lot devices
                                             lot devices       drawing
                                                               drawing


                                              Conduct
                                              Conduct             Check
                                                                  Check
                                              second
                                               second          inspection
                                                                inspection
                                              drawing
                                              drawing            devices
                                                                  devices


                                                   no
                                                           ? Inspection
                                                               passed
                                                                          ?   yes


                                                                                 Certify
                                                                                 Certify
                                            Break up lot
                                            Break up lot                      inspection
                                                                               inspection
                                                                                devices
                                                                                 devices



                                              Transfer
                                              Transfer                          Renew
                                                                                Renew
                                             devices to
                                             devices to                           lot
                                                                                  lot
                                                PRL
                                                PRL


        © SAP AG 1999




 The flow chart shows the typical flow of the sampling procedure. Certain steps, however, can be
  omitted, depending on your settings in Customizing. (For example, a second drawing is normally not
  possible).
 If required, you can use the standard R/3 Quality Management component (QM) to organize and manage
  inspection data. This component contains powerful functionality for working with inspection
  regulations, operations and results.




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                              26
5.27
     Periodic Replacement



                                                   In periodic replacement, devices
              Rem




                                                    that are to be certified are
                                                    removed, and replaced by the
                  ova




                                                    same kind of devices.
                     l




                                                   Devices that are to be replaced are
                                  Installation


                                                    managed in the periodic
                                                    replacement list.
                                                   Devices that are to be replaced on
                                                    a certain date are selected from the
                                                    periodic replacement list.
                                                   A work order is then created for the
                                                    devices that are to be replaced.



          © SAP AG 1999




   The periodic replacement component is optional. It is needed if:
        Devices are to be certified individually
        A lot does not exist for the sampling procedure, and the devices have to be certified individually




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   27
5.28
   Device Technology: Unit Summary



                        The device category divides devices into functional
                         groups and specifies their features.The device
                         category corresponds to the material in MM.
                        The device is a measuring instrument that “inherits”
                         the features of the device category.These “inherited”
                         features can be enhanced by individual
                         specifications, if required.
                        Integration in the PM and MM application
                         components allows you to completely process all
                         service and logistics functions.
                        Devices are certified and inspected for internal and
                         external purposes by means of periodic replacement
                         and sampling procedures.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                 28
5.29Device Technology Exercises

                     Exercises: Device Technology
                     Topic: Creating and Delivering Devices



                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Distinguish between devices, device categories, and basic device
                          categories.
                        • Provide information on devices.
                        • Understand integration with the SAP PM and MM components.


                     Provide information on the devices installed at a customer’s location.
                     The creation and delivery of devices is standardized by integration in
                     SAP components.




   1-1       Display all devices for customer TB010110## and select the water meter.
             1-1-1 To which device category does this device belong?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-1-2 When was the last meter reading result recorded and what was the result?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-1-3 How many registers does the meter have?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                        29
             1-2    Display all devices for customer TB010110## and select the double-rate
                    electricity meter.
             1-2-1 When is the device due for certification again?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-2-2 Is the device already in a lot?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-2-3 Has the device already been drawn as a sample device?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-2-4 What is the calibration validity?
                   How long is the internal certification period?
                   _____________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________


   1-3       Specify the connection data for device TB010110##.
             1-3-1 What is the current connection object?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-3-2 What is the current device location?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-3-3 Display the structure graphic and describe the procedure.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

   1-4       Display the material master data for device TB010110##. (Comment: the device
             category – i.e., the material – is assigned to Plant “U003”).




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                         30
   1-5       True or false?
             1-5-1 Device technology is integrated into the R/3 logistics component.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-2 Devices are based on a basic device category.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-3 Device categories group together similar devices.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-4 The device category is managed in the MM component
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-5 The register group is allocated to the device category for information purposes.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-6 The device is managed in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component as a piece of
                   equipment.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-7 Devices can be allocated to more than one lot.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-8 Only the sampling procedure can be used when inspecting devices for internal
                   and external purposes.
                   ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                             31
5.30Device Technology Solutions

                      Exercises: Device Technology
                      Topic: Creating and Delivering Devices


   1-1
             1-1-1 Select the customer in the Customer Interaction Center. Select the premise in
                   the navigation area. Choose Premise environment (right mouse click). Expand
                   the sub-tree and double-click the device TB010120##. The device category is
                   displayed on the IS data tab page. Do not leave this screen.
             1-1-2 After pressing the MR results button, all the readings are displayed.
                    This lists all meter reading results.
                    Return to device display.
             1-1-3 You are located in the device display for TB010120##. Double-click on the
                   Register group field (tab page Group). The master data for the register group is
                   displayed. You can obtain information on the number of registers and their
                   technical specifications and functionalities from the table entries. Return to the
                   premise environment.

   1-2
             1-2-1 Double-click on Double-rate electricity meter.
                   The data environment of the meter is displayed.
                   Double-click on the device TB010110##.
                   Switch to the IS data tab page.
                   On the lower set of tabs, switch to tab page Cert/ins. data. The field Next repl.
                   year displays the year in which the device must next be certified, either
                   internally or externally. Do not leave this screen.
             1-2-2 In the IS-data view, choose the Ins. data tab.
                   If the Lot field is filled, the device has been allocated to a lot. Otherwise, a lot
                   has not yet been allocated.
                   Do not leave this screen.
             1-2-3 In the view IS data  Ins. data.
                   If the Samp.dev.status field is empty, the device has not yet been drawn as a
                   sample device.
                   Possible status of sample devices:
                   – Not sample device
                   – Sample device from first drawing
                   – Sample device from second drawing
                   – Spare device from first drawing
                   – Spare device from second drawing
                   – Device cannot be used as a sample device

(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                   32
             1-2-4 The calibration validity is stored in the device category.
                   Double-clicking the on Device category field displays the material data for the
                   device.
                   Switch to the Cert./order data tab page. The calibration validity is displayed in
                   years. This is used to calculate the next year of replacement.
                   In the Int. cert. per. field, the internal certification period is displayed. This
                   shows the internal period set by the company, after which a device must be re-
                   inspected and certified.

   1-3       Choose the Mast. data tab page.
             1-3-1 The current connection object is TB010110##.
             1-3-2 The current device location is TB010111DL0##.
             1-3-3 In the menu, choose Structure  Structure graphic or Strg F7.
                    When a dialog box appears with the question “Expand structure upwards?”
                    choose “Yes”.
                    You are now looking at an illustration of the structure. Here you can further
                    expand the structure using the Levels above button.
                    The current connection object is TB010110##.

   1-4


                     •   Determine the device category of the device TB010110## in the
                         device master data.
                     •   Open a new session and change to logistics using the path Logistics
                         → Materials management → Material master → Material →
                         Display → Display current
                     •   Enter the key for the material (= device category) and choose the
                         Data button.
                     •   Select all views and confirm the entry.
                     •   As materials are always defined for a specific plant, you must also
                         specify the plant. Enter the plant key U003 and confirm it.



   1-5
             1-5-1 True. IS-U device technology is integrated in the components MM, PM and CS.
             1-5-2 False. Devices are based on a device category, which in turn consists of one or
                   more basic device categories.
             1-5-3 True.
             1-5-4 True. The device category is managed in the component MM using the material
                   number.


(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              33
             1-5-5 False. Register groups are assigned to the device category. However, these not
                   only have an informative purpose, but also a functional purpose and are used
                   for processing and inspecting meter reading results.
                   For example, validation checks for the number of premises, possible meter
                   reading overflows or when converting results depending on the transformation
                   relationship.
             1-5-6 True. The device is managed in PM using the serial number.
             1-5-7 False. Devices can only be allocated to one lot.
             1-5-8 False. In addition to the sample procedure, the periodic replacement procedure
                   can also be used.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                           34
6
    Device Installation



        Contents:

         Device installation/removal/replacement
                  Technical installation/removal
                  Billing-related installation/removal
         Installation structure
                  Device allocations
                  Register relationships




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110       1
6.2
   Device Installation: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe and perform device installation, removal,
                         and replacement. You will also be able to describe
                         how these functions are integrated with the Service
                         Management (SM) application component.
                        Explain the relationship between the connection
                         object, the device location, and the device, and how
                         they are integrated in the Plant Maintenance (PM)
                         application component.
                        Display devices of an installation and describe the
                         installation structure.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                               2
6.3
   Device Installation: Business Scenario



                        Device installation if replaced periodically
                              Create and plan service orders

                              Execute service orders: Remove old devices and
                               install new ones (device replacement)




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                             3
6.4
   Installation: Installation, Removal And
   Replacement




         Device installation, removal and replacement
         Installation structure




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110                4
6.5
     Business Scenario: Replacement of Sample
     Devices
                                  Generation of
                                  Generation of
                                  work orders
                                   work orders
                                    to replace
                                    to replace                                                Planning
                                                                                              Planning
                                   the devices
                                   the devices                                                   the
                                                                                                  the
                                     affected
                                     affected                                                work orders
                                                                                             work orders


             Sample
             Sample                                                      Team leader
         devices in a
          devices in a
          lot must be
                                    Device                                field force
           lot must be
         replaced for
         replaced for           inspection agent
         certification
          certification




                Technical
                Technical
          conclusion of the
          conclusion of the
          service order and
          service order and
           triggering of the
            triggering of the                                                      Field force
                 invoice
                  invoice                                                          employee
                                    Device
                                inspection agent


                                                                                           On-site technical
                                                                                           On-site technical
                                                                                        execution of the order
                                                                                        execution of the order
                                                                                           and completion
                                                                                            and completion
                                                       Team leader                       confirmation of the
                                                                                          confirmation of the
                                Changes to data
                                Changes to data         field force                      order in the system
                                                                                         order in the system
                                 in the system
                                  in the system
                                   ("full device
                                    ("full device
                                 replacement")
                                 replacement")
          © SAP AG 1999




   Devices of a particular device category are due for certification. After the sample devices are defined
    using the lot procedure, the corresponding work orders are automatically generated for the removal of
    these devices.
    The work orders contain a complete description of the process, as well as a list of materials and
    resources that may be needed.
   The work orders are then scheduled for execution, taking resource capacities and deadlines into account.
   In the next step, the work order is executed on-site according to the process description: the old device is
    removed and is replaced by a new device of the same category.
   As soon as the work order is executed, it is documented accordingly in the system by means of a
    completion confirmation.
   When the completion certification has been successfully generated, the device replacement is carried out
    in the system and the order can be closed and invoiced, if necessary.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                      5
6.6
   Service Order Execution: Determining the Device
   Location
             Execute
             service     Determine
              order    device location



         The device location indicates where a device is installed in the
          connection object.

                                                                         o
         The address of the connection object links the device location t
          regional structure.

         The location can be specified in more detail using location data,
          location supplement, and a long text.The service order is used to
                                                                         i
          forward this information together with the address data to the feld
          force employee.

         The device location is a functional location in the PM application
          component.

                                                                         ices)
         The structure of the functional locations and the equipment (dev
          installed provides a comprehensive overview of the technical
          systems installed.
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                                  6
6.7
   Definition of the Device Location

       Execute
                    Determine
       service
                  device location
        order




                  Connection
                    object
                                             Device
                                            location

                                                               Device

                         The device location is the location
                         in the connection object that is
                         independent of a division and in
                         which any number of devices can
                         technically be installed.
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                    7
6.8
   Device Location Data

       Execute
                       Determine
       service
                         device
        order
                        location




                        Independent of
                                                              Reference to premise
                           division
                  • Installation location for
                                                             • The device location can
                    devices of all divisions
                                                               be allocated to a
                  • Installation location for
                                                               premise if required
                    all device categories




                                                   Device
                                                  location



                 Location data                                Integration with PM
                   • Exact location and                      • The device location is
                     location supplement                       defined as a functional
                   • Long text                                 location below the
                   • Link to regional structure                connection object


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                               8
6.9
   Relationships Between Technical Objects

       Execute
                         Determine
       service
                       device location
        order




                                                                        Equipment
                                                                     Connection

                                                                     Higher-
                                                                     Higher-level
                                  Connobj                     Functional location
                                                                        Equipment
                                         Device                          Device

                                   Device                             Lower-
                                                                      Lower-level
                                  location                    Functional location

          IS-U objects                                                                    PM objects
         Legend
                 Installation of equipment             Hierarchical relationship between functional
                                                       locations


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                               9
6.10
   Service Order Execution: Device Replacement &
   Service Order Confirmation

             Execute                                      Perform     Confirm         Service
             service                    Determine          device     service          order
              order                   device location   replacement    order         executed


                                    The field force employee performs an on -
                                     site meter reading for the sample device
                                     and then physically removes the device.
                                    The new device is installed in the device
                                     location. Since the new device has to
                                     perform the tasks and functions of the old
                                     device, it must be identical from a technical
                me
                                     point of view.
                   te
               rea r no:
                  ding    32
                       : __ 4561

                                    A function test is performed and new meter
                           ___
                              _




                                     readings can be taken as a basis for billing.
                                    This concludes the technical aspect of the
                                     service order and the field force employee
                                     enters the corresponding completion
                                     confirmation in the system.

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                   IUT110                             10
6.11
   Data Changes: Installation Location

             Execute                              Perform     Confirm    Service
             service            Determine          device     service     order
              order           device location   replacement    order    executed



             Change
             data in             Locate
             system            installation



         The Back Office employee responsible receives the completion
          confirmation for the service order in electronic or paper form.The
          completion confirmation contains all the central information forany
          data changes required in the system.
         The customer service representative can locate the installation
          affected using the device number of the device removed and startthe
          "Full replacement" transaction using the following data:
                      Device location
                      Installation
                      Activity date
                      Device number of the sample device
                      Device number of the new device
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                        11
6.12
    Data Changes: Device Replacement

             Execute                              Perform           Confirm             Service
             service           Determine           device           service              order
              order          device location    replacement          order             executed



             Change                              Perform              Data
             data in            Locate
                              installation        device             change
             system                            replacement          completed




           The customer service representative enters the meter reading from
            the device removed and the meter reading at installation of thenew
            device. This ensures that there are no gaps in the consumption
            history, which provides the basis for billing.
                                                                           .
           Once the data has been saved, the device replacement is complete




         © SAP AG 1999




 The following steps are performed automatically in the background for a device replacement:
   Billing-related removal of the old device: This terminates the business relationship between the device
     and the business partner's installation (and therefore the contract).
   Technical removal of the old device: This removes the link to the device location, (and therefore to the
     connection object). All existing register relationships are terminated and the current time slice for the
     device is removed. At the same time, a new time slice begins. The status in the device master record
     is changed from EEGB (equipment installed) to EFRE (equipment free).
   Technical installation of the new device: The connection of the new register to the device location (and
     therefore the connection object) is established. The device receives the status EEGB. At the same
     time, a new time slice is opened for the device, beginning on the installation date. Any register
     relationships are transferred from the old device to the new meter.
   Billing-related installation of the new device: The new device is connected to the business master data
     (installation, contract, business partner). Data that is relevant to rates (such as the rule for determining
     the settlement price, rate data at device and register level, information about extrapolation of
     consumption values) is transferred to the new device.
 Processing steps that are performed automatically for a device replacement can also be performed
  separately (for instance by different customer service representatives). Individual transactions, such as
  technical installation, billing-related installation, and full installation (= both steps in one transaction)
  can be used to perform each step of the installation and removal processes separately.

(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                    12
(C) SAP AG   IUT110   13
6.13
    Technical and Billing-Related Installation

                                        Business
                                        Business
                                         partner
                                         partner



               Contract 1
               Contract 1                   Contract
                                            Contract                   Contract 2
                                                                       Contract 2
             (Company code 1)
              (Company code 1)                                        (Company code 2)
                                                                       (Company code 2)
                                            account
                                            account
              Generation and
              Generation and                                          Distribution and
                                                                      Distribution and
               transmission
                transmission                                          customer service
                                                                      customer service




              Installation
              Installation                  Premise
                                            Premise                    Installation
                                                                       Installation
                   1
                   1                                                        2
                                                                            2


                  Billing-related                          Billing-related
                  installation
                                                           installation




                                                                              Device
                                                                              Device      Connection
                                                                                          Connection
                                                       Technical             location
                                                                             location       object
                                                                                            object
                                                       installation
                                 Device 1
         © SAP AG 1999




 Devices can be allocated to several installations from a billing perspective (billing-related installation).
  However, each device can be allocated to only one device location from a technical point of view
  (technical installation).
 In the example above, the utility services of the division are divided into two areas, each of which is
  supplied by a different service provider. These two basic services are "generation and transmission'" and
  "distribution and customer service". The contracts for each of these basic services are managed under
  different company codes.
  This model clarifies how deregulated energy supply can be reflected in IS-U/CCS. The billing-relevant
  data in the utility installation and in the installation structure can be established individually for both
  contracts. Since one contract exists per installation, a separate installation in the relevant division is
  created for each contract. Accordingly, any meters installed are allocated twice from the point of view of
  billing.
  When both contracts are managed in the same system, one of the companies can carry out billing and
  customer service on behalf of the other, or a third company can carry out these tasks for both companies.
  The customer then receives only one bill for both services and has one contact person for all queries.




(C) SAP AG                                               IUT110                                             14
6.14
   Installation: Installation Structure




         Device installation, removal and replacement
         Installation structure




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110                15
6.15
     Example of an Installation Structure


                                        Serial switching




                                                                                            Electricity




                                                      Audio frequency ripple
                                        Electricity
                                                      control receiver
     Supply
     grid



     Street
                          Device allocation
                          Register relationship
          © SAP AG 1999




   The installation structure comprises all technical and billing-related data for a utility contract.
   In the example above, switching between the two rates of the double-rate electricity meter is controlled
    by an ARCR (audio frequency ripple control receiver). For information purposes, this is described in the
    system as a device allocation of the ARCR type. At the same time, one of the registers of the double-rate
    electricity meter has a serial switching relationship with another register. The consumption of the serial
    switching register (secondary register) is automatically deducted from the consumption of the main
    register during the billing run.




(C) SAP AG                                              IUT110                                              16
6.16
     Technical Installation Structure



             Device allocations                           Register relationships

                 Audio frequency ripple                        Reactive/active
                  control receiver                               relationship

                 Transformers                                  Serial switching
                                                                 relationship
                 Pressure regulator
                                                                On-peak/off-peak
                 Customer-specific                              relationship
                  allocations
                                                                Control relationship
                                                                VCF relationship
                                                                VCF calculation
                                                                 relationship
                                                                Customer-specific
                                                                 relationships


          © SAP AG 1999




   Device allocations describe relationships between installed devices. A device allocation is always
    composed of a controlling and a controlled device (Example: A calculation factor, which is taken into
    account in consumption billing, is defined in the installation structure at register level for the
    "transformer" allocation category).
   In a reactive/active relationship, all active registers of a register category and all reactive registers of
    the same register category are added and the total is used to perform the cosine phi examination.
   The serial switching relationship is automatically subordinate to all other relationships during meter
    reading and validation.
   The on-peak/off-peak relationship describes the relationship between registers of different register
    categories (e.g. on-peak and off-peak registers).
   In a control relationship, all registers are added and the totals compared with the designated control
    register.
   The VCF relationship (gas division only) is needed for billing difference quantities that result from
    different meter readings for the operating volume meter of the corrector and another external operating
    volume meter.
   The VCF calculation relationship (gas division only) is needed for billing difference quantities that
    result from different meter readings for the operating cubic meter meter of the corrector and another
    external operating cubic meter meter.



(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                       17
6.17
    Billing-Related Installation Structure



           Rate data                                    Extrapolation data


              Relevance to                                 Expected period
               settlement price                              consumption
              Relevance to billing                         Fixed consumption
              Price class                                   values weighted linearly
                                                             (absolute or relative value)
              Rate type
              Rate fact group
              Discount




         © SAP AG 1999




 Rate and extrapolation data are usually determined during maintenance of the installed device. However,
  these can be changed at any time under "installation structure" in the menu.
   During device installation (or afterwards), the "relevance to settlement price" indicator determines
     whether a settlement price should be charged or not.
   If the "relevance to billing" indicator is activated at register level, a plausible meter reading result is
     expected for billing.
   The price class can be defined at the device category, device, or register level. The price class, together
     with the price level, determines the settlement price (e.g. meter rental) from the rate.
   The rate type is maintained at device or register level and controls rate determination, together with
     the installation's rate category.
   The rate fact group is also assigned at device or register level. The rate fact group contains specific
     values (e.g. constants) and/or keys (e.g. price keys) that are assigned to a rate.
   Discounts can be assigned at register level for quantities and services ("register discount").
 Period consumption is used in the extrapolation of meter readings when no representative meter
  reading results are available (such as for new customers).




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                  18
6.18
   Device Installation: Summary



                        The precise location of the devices is identified using
                         device location in IS-U/CCS. The device location is a
                         functional location in the PM application component.
                        Devices can be removed or installed in two separate
                         steps that are distinguished in terms of billing and
                         technical factors. Devices can also be removed or
                         installed in one step for both billing and technical
                         data.
                        During device replacement, full removal of the old
                         device and full installation of the new device is
                         carried out in one step.
                         In this way, technical and billing-related data is
                         automatically transferred from the old device to the
                         new device.
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                   19
6.19Device Installation Exercises

                     Unit: Device Installation
                     Topic: Installation and Removal of Devices



                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Display all the devices in an installation
                        • Install and remove devices
                        • Describe integration with the PM component


                     A customer’s water meter is faulty and must be replaced. To replace a
                     device, the following steps are performed in the system:
                        • Billing-related removal of the faulty device from the installation
                          and technical removal from the device location.
                        • Technical and billing-related installation of the new meter.



   1-1       Water meter TB010120## belonging to customer TB010110## was faulty and was
             replaced by a new device with the same technical features by a field force employee.
             As the office-based employee responsible, you will first carry out the full removal of
             the old device and then the full installation of the new device in the system.
             (Note: this transaction can be processed quickly in one step using the transaction
             “device replacement”. In this transaction, the system carries out the full removal and
             installation in the background. However, in order to illustrate the individual steps in
             this task, you should carry out the device replacement step by step).
             1-1-1 First, in the Customer Interaction Center, determine which device location and
                   installation the device is assigned to. Use today’s date as activity date.
             1-1-2 Access the device management component in a new session and carry out the
                   removal of device TB010120## in one step for today’s date.
             1-1-3 Then carry out the full installation of the new meter TB010200## in one step.
                   Choose today’s date as the installation date and enter the meter reading at
                   installation as 97.8 m³. Assign a rate type and a fact group to the register.
             1-1-4 Finally, in the data environment display in the Customer Interaction Center, log
                   the device replacement.

   1-2       Check the following features of the device you have just installed.


(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             20
             1-2-1 Installation date and installation reason:
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-2 Meter reading at installation:
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-3 Current business partner assigned:
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-4 Device manufacturer:
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-5 Maintenance planning plant:
                   ______________________________________________________


   1-3       Display the structure graphic for the functional locations and their equipment for the
             newly installed device and complete the installation in the device location.

   1-4       (Optional) Consumption has increased for a flat-rate installation. For this reason, the
             utility installation must be extended by installing an additional meter. Extend the flat-
             rate electricity installation by installing a meter using today’s date and the following
             details:
             Connection object: TB010110##
             Device location:     TB010112DL0##
             Installation:        TB010130##
             New device:          TB010130## with a meter reading at installation of 250.
             Only assign household rate data at register level.

             Note that you must adapt the billing-relevant data for the installation to the new
             circumstances before the device is installed to ensure that billing and the billing-related
             installation of the device are correct. To do this, you must assign a suitable rate
             category (e.g. “E1”) and limit the installation facts.

   1-5       True or false?
             1-5-1 During technical installation, the device is assigned to a device location and to
                   an installation. Rate data can not be maintained, but device locations can,
                   however, be created, searched for and changed.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-2 Only devices of the same division can be installed in a device location.
                   ______________________________________________________



(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                               21
             1-5-3 Billing-relevant rate data must always be maintained during device installation.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-4 The device location is managed as a functional location in PM.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-5 The device location is the highest level in the functional location hierarchy in
                   PM.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-6 Device installation and removal automatically generates a time slice for the
                   device. ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                22
6.20 Device Installation Solutions

                     Unit: Device Installation
                     Topic: Installation and Removal of Devices


   1-1G
             1-1-1 Find customer TB010110## in the CIC
                   Choose the water meter TB010120## with a right mouse click
             1-1-2 Choose device management from the SAP Easy Access menu:
                    Utilities Industry  Device Management.
                    Choose the following for device removal:
                    Device Installation  Removal  Full
                    Device location: TB010111DL0##
                    Installation:    TB010120##
                    Old device       TB010120##
             1-1-3 Choose the following for device installation:
                    Device Installation  Installation  Full
                    Device location: TB010111DL0##
                    Installation:    TB010120##
                    New device:      TB010200##
             1-1-4 In the CIC, call up the data for business partner TB010110##.
                    Choose the action box Info  Customer environment
                    Choose utility installation TB010120## by double-clicking on it.
                    Branch to the device history of the devices assigned to the installation by
                    pressing the Device history (DevHist) button.

   1-2
             1-2-1 Access device management or double-click on the device in the CIC.
                    Utilities Industry  Device Management.
                    Choose:
                    Technology  Device  Display
                    Enter TB010200## in the Serial number field.Press Continue to confirm your
                    entry.The system displays the device master data.
                    To obtain an overview of the time slices, press the Display time slice overview
                    button.
(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                            23
                     To check the installation date, choose IS data  Act./codes.
             1-2-2 Using the MR results button you can call up a list of the previous meter
                   readings.
             1-2-3 Choose IS Data  Mast. Data
             1-2-4 Choose tab page General in the upper work area.
                   The producer of the device is listed in the field Manufacturer.
             1-2-5 Plant maintenance planning plant: Choose the tab page Organization. This
                   informs you of the allocation of the device to a planning plant.

   1-3       Call up device management as follows:
             Utilities Industry  Device Management.
             Choose device display as follows:
             Technology  Device  Display
             Choose the following menu items to call up the structure graphic:
             Structure → Structure graphic
             The structure graphic screen appears:
         -       The entire structure graphic is displayed.

   1-4       First, call up the installation: Select flat-rate installation in the navigation area. Choose
             rate maintenance (right mouse click).
             Choose the time slice overview and specify today’s date as the selection date. Activate
             the Prorate indicator and choose the newly created time slice by double-clicking on it.
             A new time slice for the installation data relevant to billing opens automatically.
             The rate category entered (E4) was defined as the rate category for flat-rate
             installations and is only suitable for the rate types set down in the (installation) facts.
             Since another rate has to be found for the device installed, a rate category which
             matches a rate type at device or register level must be specified. For this reason, change
             the rate category in the current time slice to “E1”.
             To ensure that your billing is correct, you must also specify the validity of the previous
             rate type in the installation facts. To do this, choose the Facts button. On the following
             screen, select the rate type by double-clicking on it. Limit the period of validity to the
             day prior to the installation of the device. (You may have to delete another
             automatically generated continuation line, before you can transfer the settings).
             Transfer the settings using the Transfer button and then save the changes to the
             installation.
             The installation is now ready for billing-related device installation.
             Choose the following for device installation:
             Device Installation  Installation  Full
             Enter the initial data:
             Connection object          TB010110##
             Device location:           TB010112DL0##
(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                               24
             Installation:              TB010130##
             Activity date:             Today’s date
             New device                 TB010130##
             To continue processing, press Enter.
             Enter the Activity Date:
             Activity reason:           02 Installation extension
             Meter reading:             250
             Rate type:                 1002 Off-peak active energy
             FactGr.:                   0001 Residential customer
             Activate the indicator for payment of rental and settlement charges.
             Save your entries.

   1-5       True or false?
             1-5-1 True.
             1-5-2 False. The device location describes the installation place in the connection
                   object that is not dependent on a division. The device location can be explicitly
                   assigned to a particular premise, if desired.
             1-5-3 False. The billing-relevant rate data is not required during technical installation.
                   This can be added during billing-related installation or full installation.
             1-5-4 True.
             1-5-5 False. The connection object represents the level above the device location in
                   the hierarchy.
             1-5-6   True.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              25
7
    Meter Reading

        Contents:
         Meter reading organization:
                  Scheduled and unscheduled meter readings
                  Street route
                  Scheduling
         Meter reading procedure:
                  Creating the meter reading order
                  Options for result entry
                  Meter reading validations
                  Monitoring and correction of meter reading results
         Special functions:
                  Meter reading by customer via the Internet and
                   telephone
                  Reversal
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                    1
7.2
   Meter Reading: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able
                       to:
                        Describe the meter reading procedure
                              Scheduling and street route
                              Meter reading processing
                        Enter meter reading results by means of:
                              Automatic and manual payment run
                              Single and mass entry
                              Single and mass estimation
                              Meter reading correction




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                       2
7.3
   Meter Reading: Business Scenario



                        A customer telephones the customer call center
                         to report his/her move-out
                              The customer service agent enters the move-out
                               date and the meter readings
                              An implausible reading means that the utility
                               company has to carry out a control reading


                        Meter reading processing
                              Creation of meter reading order
                              Entry or estimation of meter reading results
                        Start of billing and invoicing
                              Final billing, followed by invoicing


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                3
7.4
   Meter Reading: Meter Reading Organization



         Meter reading organization:
                  Scheduling
                  Street route
         Meter reading procedure
                  Processing the meter reading
                  Checking of meter reading results
                  Extrapolation of meter reading results
         Special functions
                  Meter reading by customer via the Internet
                  Reversal function




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110              4
7.5
   Types of Meter Reading


      Indicator                                                  Indicator
         Predefined meter reading                                  There are special reasons for
          strategy                                                   the meter reading request,
         Date and area scheduled in                                 such as a move-in/out
          regional structure                                        Date and area cannot be

         Resources can be planned                                   scheduled
                                                                    Meter reading cannot be
      Process
                                                                     planned
         Create meter reading
          schedule                                               Process
         Specify meter reading
                                                   Unscheduled      Create a single meter reading
          sequence                     Scheduled                     order
         Create mass meter reading                                 Enter consumption
          orders                                                    Check results
         Enter results                                             Release for billing
         Check results
         Release for billing



                                             Meter
                                            reading

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                                 5
7.6
    Regional Structure and Scheduling


                 Regional structure                          Master data          Scheduling

                                                              Business
                                                               partner



                                                              Account



              Postal regional structure                                                  Portion
                                                             Contract

                          Street          Street
          City                            section
                                                                                          Meter
                                                             Installation                reading
                                                                                           unit

                                                              Premise
                         Political
                         structure
                                                             Connection
                                                               object

         © SAP AG 1999




 Portioning: Grouping of contracts that are to be billed together. You allocate a contract to a portion
  either directly in the contract or indirectly via the meter reading units entered in the installations.
 Scheduling: Controlling and planning of the following processes:
       Meter reading order creation
       Periodic billing
       Budget billing collection
 Scheduling is managed at the meter reading unit and billing portion levels.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                  6
7.7
   Scheduling Tasks




                              Grouping together of contracts:
                                   For joint billing
       Portion 1
                                   Where budget billing options are identical
             Portion 2              (budget billing cycle and scheduling)




                               Grouping of utility installations:
        MR unit 1
                                       Of the same billing class and division category
             MR unit 2
                                       For joint billing
                 MR unit 3
                                       To control special features of meter reading,
                                        such as MDE, intervals



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                   7
7.8
    Portions and Meter Reading Units




      Portion A                                                               Portion B
             MR unit A.1                                                            MR unit B.1
             MR unit A.2                   A                                        MR unit B.2
             MR unit A.3                                                            MR unit B.3
                                                            B
                                                                                    MR unit B.4

                                                                                    MR unit B.5

      Portion C
             MR unit C.1
           MR unit C.2              MR unit C.3



         © SAP AG 1999




 A portion normally contains several meter reading units, which are structured according to location
  and/or scheduling requirements.
 Meter reading units in a portion do not have to be located near one another; their grouping can also
  depend on other factors, such as billing conditions.
 Example:
   Portions A and B represent different city districts consisting almost entirely of households and small
     businesses (such as residential customers). Meter reading units in these portions are structured in such
     a way that they correspond to the daily work quota of the meter reader.
   Since other meter reading cycles and billing conditions apply to nonresidential customers, major
     customers (such as industrial and business groups) within the area concerned are allocated to a
     separate portion (C).
     This portion consists of three meter reading units that are not in close proximity to each other. They
     are "islands" inside portions A and B.
   The utility company bills residential customers periodically. Portion A is billed on June 15; portion B is
     billed on July 15.
   Non-residential customers are billed monthly. This means that portion C is billed on June 15, July 15,
     and so on.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   8
7.9
    Generation of Schedule Records



      Schedule master records                                                  Schedule records
                                                                                MR unit

                                                                               A_AUG01 2000
        MR unit
        A_AUG01                                                                A_AUG01 2001


                                           Generation of                       A_AUG01 2002
         Portion                         schedule records
         P_AUG01                                                                   Portion

        Parameter record                                                       P_AUG01 2000
        P1
                                                                               P_AUG01 2001

                                                                               P_AUG01 2002



        © SAP AG 1999




 Schedule records are generated from the settings in the parameter record and schedule master records
  (portion and meter reading unit).
 Schedule records refer to specific dates, which control meter reading and billing.
 Schedule records must be generated for portions and meter reading units before meter reading orders can
  be generated.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                 9
7.10
    Scheduling: Annual Billing


                                                                                                                  End of
       Portion A                   Schduled billing date                                                          billing
                                                                                                                  period
       07/27         07/28      07/29             07/30     07/31       08/01         08/02     08/03


                       Meter reading period for meter reading unit 1
                                                                                                                  End of
                                                                          Billing period                          meter
                                                                                                                  reading
        Scheduled                                   Meter reading period for meter reading unit 2                 period
        meter                                                          for all meter reading units
        reading
        date                     Meter reading period for meter reading unit 3




      2001
      2001                                                             2002
                                                                       2002
     Portion A                                                        Portion A
     07/27 07/28 07/29 07/30 07/31 08/01 08/02 08/03                  07/27 07/28 07/29 07/30 07/31 08/01 08/02 08/03
               Meter reading
               Meter                                                            Meter reading
                                                                                Meter reading
                                        Billing
                                        Billing                                                         Billing
                                                                                                        Billing




         © SAP AG 1999




 End of billing period: This is the date on which the portion is to be billed for the first time. This date,
  together with the length of the billing period (that is, the period length), determines the date of the next
  billing (start of the next billing period = end of the billing period + 1 day).
 The scheduled billing date is the date on which the contracts belonging to a portion are billed. This takes
  the SAP calendar into account.
 The end of the meter reading period corresponds to the end of the billing period, and is used as a basis
  for defining dates of subsequent meter reading periods.
 The scheduled meter reading date is the date on which the schedule specifies the register is to be read. It
  is also the date for which periodic meter readings are generated in scheduling. It forms the basis for
  calculating the expected consumption during meter reading order creation; it also acts as the final date
  for determining the budget billing amount.




(C) SAP AG                                                   IUT110                                                         10
7.11
   Meter Reading Organization: Street Route


             MR
             MR
             unit
             unit      City distr. 1
              A
              A

                                       Street 1                     Str
                                                                       ee
                                                                          t   rou
                                                      Connection                    te
                                       Street 2        object 1

                                                      Connection    Device
                                       Street n        object 2    location
                                                                       1
                                                      Connection    Device
                                                                                     Device 1
                       City distr. 2                   object n      loc. 2

                                                                   Device
                                                                                     Device 2
                                                                    loc. n
                       City distr. n

                                                                                     Device n



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                        11
7.12
   Meter Reading: Process



         Meter reading organization:
                  Scheduling
                  Street route
         Meter reading procedure
                  Processing the meter reading
                  Checking of meter reading results
                  Extrapolation of meter reading results
         Special functions
                  Meter reading by customer via the Internet
                  Reversal function




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110              12
7.13
   Overview: Scheduled Meter Reading

                        Meter       Create          Output
                       reading   meter reading   meter reading
                         due        orders          orders


                                       Manual                      MDE
                                     meter reading             meter reading
                                         due                       due

                                         Print                  Download
                                     meter reading             meter reading
                                      documents                    data


                                      Read meter                 Read meter



                                         Enter                    Upload
                                     meter reading             meter reading
                                        results                   results


                                                    Results
                                                  determined



                                                    Check
                                                 meter reading
                                                    results
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                               13
7.14
   Creating Meter Reading Orders

                                               Meter         Create          Output
                                              reading     meter reading   meter reading
         Meter reading                         due          orders          orders
           orders
                                                                Manual                      MDE
                 Single meter reading orders                 meter reading             meter reading
                                                                  due                       due
                 Mass meter reading orders
                                                                  Print                  Download
         Single order data                                   meter reading             meter reading
                                                               documents                    data
                 Selection via the meter reading unit,
                  contract, installation or device             Read meter                 Read meter

                 Additional dates for billing control
                                                                  Enter                    Upload
         Mass order data                                     meter reading             meter reading
                                                                 results                   results
                 Selection via From meter reading unit and
                  To meter reading unit                                     Results
                                                                           determined
                 Schedule task in task management
         Specification of meter reading reason                              Check
                                                                          meter reading
                                                                             results
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                                      14
7.15
   Issuing the Meter Reading Orders

                                                    Meter        Create          Output
     Output media                                  reading    meter reading   meter reading
                                                     due         orders          orders


                                                                    Manual                      MDE
                                                                  meter reading             meter reading
                                                                      due                       due
       • Cover sheet     MDE   • Meter reading notification
       • Meter reading         • Card for meter reading               Print                  Download
         documents               by customer                      meter reading             meter reading
                                                                   documents                    data


                                                                   Read meter                 Read meter
          Meter reading information
             (selection)
                                                                      Enter                    Upload
             Expected reading with area                          meter reading             meter reading
                                                                     results                   results
             Any number of previous meter
              reading results
                                                                                Results
             Street route                                                     determined

             Notes for the meter reader
              (dynamic / static)                                                 Check
                                                                              meter reading
                                                                                 results
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                      15
7.16
   Types of Result Entry

                                                         Meter       Create          Output
         Automatic                                     reading   meter reading   meter reading
                                                          due        orders          orders
                  Upload interface
                  Automatic estimation                                 Manual                      MDE
                                                                      meter reading             meter reading
         Manual                                                          due                       due

                  Fast entry                                             Print                  Download
                                                                      meter reading             meter reading
                          Fast entry without correction               documents                    data

                          Fast entry with correction
                                                                       Read meter                 Read meter
                  Single entry

                                                                          Enter                    Upload
                  Result correction                                  meter reading             meter reading
                                                                         results                   results
                          Plausible results
                          Implausible results                                      Results
                                                                                   determined
         Meter reading by customer
                  Via the Internet
                                                                                     Check
                  Via WAP telephone                                              meter reading
                                                                                     results
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                       16
7.17
   Result Entry Data

                                                   Meter       Create          Output
     Reference to meter                          reading   meter reading   meter reading
                                                    due        orders          orders
      reading order (fast entry)
            Entry number                                         Manual                      MDE
                                                                meter reading             meter reading
            Check digit                                            due                       due
     Meter reading
                                                                    Print                  Download
      data                                                      meter reading             meter reading
                                                                 documents                    data
            Recorded meter reading
            Date and time of meter reading                      Read meter                 Read meter

            Meter reader's notes
            Meter reading type (such as meter reading by the       Enter                    Upload
                                                                meter reading             meter reading
             utility company, by the customer, or estimation)      results                   results
            Meter reader number
            Date and time of maximum reading                                 Results
                                                                             determined
     Functions
            Correction and release of meter reading results                   Check
                                                                            meter reading
          Estimation      of meter reading results                            results
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                    17
7.18
   Checking Meter Reading Results: Overview

                                                  Meter         Create           Output
                                                 reading     meter reading    meter reading
                                                   due          orders           orders
        Entry of meter reading results
                Manual                                              Manual                     MDE
                                                                   meter reading            meter reading
                Automatic                                             due                      due

        Types of validation                                           Print                 Download
                                                                   meter reading            meter reading
                Fixed checks                                       documents                   data
                Independent checks
                                                                    Read meter                Read meter
                Dependent checks
        Correction
                                                                       Enter                   Upload
                                                                   meter reading            meter reading
                Correction and release of meter reading results
                                                                      results                  results
                Estimation of meter reading results
                Correction aids                                                Results
                                                                               determined



                                                                                 Check
                                                                              meter reading
                                                                                 results
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                                       18
7.19
   Check Meter Reading Results: Process


                                                   Implausible
                                                     result
                            Correction aids
        Device: 4711000
                                                                              Plausible
        Meter
        reading: 78133                                                          result

                                   Independent             Dependent
                                      checks                checks
                               Examples:                   Examples:
                               • Consumption from          • Cosine phi for
                                 previous period             energy/demand
                               • Demand from previous      • Usage hours
                                 periods                   • Control meters
                               • Demand compared with
                                 agreed demand

         Checks can be configured for individual customers and customer groups
                                                                         an
         Permitted deviations between measured values and target values c be
          configured using tables
         Return control/monitoring of implausible results
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                          19
7.20
   Monitoring Meter Readings



         Selection of meter reading orders
          via the following data objects:
                  Contract
                  Installation
                  Device
                  Portion
                  MR unit
                  Business partner
         Display (single or all):
                  Billing order
                  Meter reading orders
                  Meter reading results

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   20
7.21
   Meter Reading: Special Functions:



         Meter reading organization:
                  Scheduling
                  Street route
         Meter reading procedure
                  Processing the meter reading
                  Checking of meter reading results
                  Extrapolation of meter reading results
         Special functions
                  Meter reading by customer via the Internet
                  Reversal function




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110              21
7.22
   Meter Reading by Customers over the Internet


                                          l
                                       ai
                                   E-m



                                Meter reading
                                Meter reading
                                  request
                                   request

                                                         Internet
                                                         Internet            IS-
                                                                             IS-U/
                                                                             IS-U/
                                                       Transaction
                                                       Transaction
                                                          server             CCS
                                                                              CCS
                                                          server

         Customer
         Customer
                   Read meter


                                Entry of meter
                                Entry of meter
                                     data
                                     data

        Int rne cu ome
          ern t stomr
       Inte etcust er              Inte et
                                    Inerne
                                      t rn t                   En rgy sup lier
                                                                 e y plie
                                                               Energ supp r


         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                 22
7.23
   Meter Reading by Customer over WAP Telephone



                                                                                     IS-
                                                                                     IS-U/
                                                                                     IS-U/
                                                                                     CCS




                                               W
                                                                                      CCS


                                Tr



                                               AP
                                   an
                                     sf
                                        er
                                           m
                                          et
                                             er
                                                r
                                               ea
                                                                       Internet
                                                                       Internet

                                                 di
                                                                     Transaction
                                                   ng
                                                                     Transaction

                                                      s
                                                                        server
                                                                        server
        Customer
        Customer
                   Read meter




                                               W less Ap licat
                                                irele     plicaion
                                               Wire ss App tion
        Inerne cust er
          t rnet stom r
       Inte tcu ome                                 Protocol
                                                        ocol
                                                     Prot                 Energ supp r
                                                                          Ene y sup lier
                                                                             rgy plie


        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                             23
7.24
     Reversing Meter Reading Orders: Process




                   Incorrect
                     mass
                   selection        Reverse
                                                        Correct          Restart
                                  meter reading                           order
                                                       selection         creation
                                     order
                   Incorrect
                     single
                   selection              Meter reading                           New meter
                                          order deleted                          reading order




          © SAP AG 1999




   Meter reading orders can be reversed.
   If meter reading results are already available when the reversal is performed, these can be deleted or
    retained and re-used in a new meter reading order.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   24
7.25
   Meter Reading: Unit Summary



                        Scheduled meter readings are controlled via meter reading
                         units
                        In meter reading preparation, documents are created for:

                            Meter reading by the company via meter reading lists

                            Meter reading by the company via MDE

                            Meter reading by customer via meter reading cards

                            Meter reading by customers via the Internet

                        Meter reading processing includes:

                            Automatic upload of data from external systems

                            Manual fast entry with and without correction

                            Manual single entry and meter reading estimation

                        Configurable validations reduce the potential for error


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                   25
7.26Meter Reading: Exercises

                     Unit: Meter Reading
                     Topic: Meter reading for individual customers

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Describe the organization and the process of meter reading
                        • Carry out single entry of meter reading results


                     With regard to periodic meter reading, the company does not carry out
                     meter reading at all installations. For some customers, carrying out the
                     meter reading themselves is an efficient use of resources.
                     The customer reports the meter readings either in writing or by phone. A
                     customer service representative records the meter readings by customer
                     and enters these manually in the system.

   1-1       Which meter reading unit(s) is/are contained in the portion T-A-00?

   1-2       Which objects can the portions be directly or indirectly allocated to?

   1-3       Business partner TB090110## would like an interim billing for all his/her contracts.
             Carry out the meter reading for all devices allocated to this business partner using the
             Customer Interaction Center.

   1-4       True or false?
             1-4-1 Meter reading orders control the meter reading, billing, and invoicing
                   processes.
             1-4-2 Meter reading orders can be output on the printer or via IDoc.
             1-4-3 Meter reading results can be entered manually or automatically and are subject
                   to the same validations.
             1-4-4 If meter reading results are not available, the meter reading unit cannot be
                   billed.
             1-4-5 Validations are always carried out.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                 26
7.27Meter Reading: Solutions

                      Exercises: Meter reading
                      Topic: Meter reading processing


   1-1       Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:
             Utilities Industry → Scheduling → Schedule Master → Portion → Display.
             •   Enter portion T-A-00.
             •   Choose Save Enter.
             •   The planned billing date is stored in the Sched BD field. This is valid for all meter
                 reading units assigned to this portion.
             •   You can view the list of the meter reading units assigned by choosing the Where-
                 used list pushbutton or CTRL+F4.
             •   By expanding the sub-tree Portion in MR units, you can view all the meter reading
                 units that belong to this portion.
   1-2
             The following relationships can exist:
             -   The portion is entered directly in the meter reading unit.
             -   The portion can be specified as an alternative portion directly in the contract.
             -   The portion is indirectly referenced via the meter reading unit in the installation.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                 27
   1-3       Proceed as follows:
                    •   Call the CIC and select the data for your business partner TB090110##.
                        Choose Enter until the data is displayed in the navigation area.
                        Carry out this step for each utility contract
                •   To enter the meter readings for each contract, proceed as follows:
                    -   Select a contract.
                    -   Choose the action Enter customer meter reading.
                    -   Confirm the entry of:
                    -                           Meter reading reason 02 Interim reading with
                    billing
                    -                           Meter reading type    02 Meter reading by
                    customer.
                    -   Choose F8 to continue or
                    - Enter the meter readings, even if the values are implausible (i.e. very high
                    or very low).
                    -   To correct meter readings, proceed as follows:
                   Select a register line
                   Choose the Correct button.
                   From the MR data and Consump.data fields, you can read the expected values.
                   The reading can be corrected in the Current MR field.
                   To release a meter reading, choose Release.
                   You return to the screen where you can enter meter readings.
                    -   Save the meter readings by choosing Save:
                    -   Complete the customer contact and save it using:
                    -   You return to the CIC.
                    -   Repeat the above steps for the other utility contracts.

   1-4
             1-4-1 False. The meter reading order is an organizational aid for preparing for meter
                   readings, collecting data and creating the meter reading documents.
             1-4-2 True.
             1-4-3 True.
             1-4-4 False. Missing meter reading results can be estimated by mass runs.
             1-4-5 True. There are fixed validations which are always checked, such as
                   implausible previous meter reading results and deviations where the installation

(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              28
             is inactive or disconnected, or where devices have not been installed. All other
             independent and dependent validations can be classified into validation groups
             in Customizing. The validations can then be carried out automatically.




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                                             29
8
    Energy Data Management



        Contents:

         Profile header
         Profile allocation for register
         Point of delivery
         Profile values
         Formula profiles
         Synthetic profiles




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110   1
8.2
   Profile Management: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the components that make up profiles
                        Explain the connection of profiles to the master data




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                2
8.3
   Profile Management: Business Scenario



                        Values determined by automated meter reading for
                         an interval meter should be copied to the system




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                             3
8.4
   Profile Header



         Profile Type
          Historical profile, schedule profile, formula profile, forecast
          profile, synthetic profile, day profile
         Consistency Checking Group
          Determines which checks to carry out when importing profile
          values
         Replacement Value Group
          Determines the calculation of plausible values that are used
          instead of missing or implausible actual values
         Validity Period
         Profile Value Category
          Amount, factor, quantity, demand, price, other
         Interval Lengths
          5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                              IUT110                              4
8.5
   Profile Allocation for Register

             Business   Regional
              partner   structure

                                      Profiles can be allocated to
             Contract                  (logical) registers of interval
             account                   meters
                                      This allocation is historical and
             Contract
                        Connection     role-based
                          object
                                      The role determines the profile's
                                       task for this register
         Installation    Premise
                                      Examples of roles are
                                       measurement and forecast

              Device



                         Measured
             Register
                          profile

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                               5
8.6
   Point of Delivery

                        Business
                         partner
                                        Point to which a utility service is supplied
                                         or to which a utility service can be
                         Contract
                         account
                                         determined for a customer
                                        A point of delivery has one external
                                         identification number at any time (point
                         Contract        of delivery description according to
                                         metering code, for example)
                                        The point of delivery is used for
   Point of Delivery    Installation
                                         communication in automatic data
                                         exchange
                                        The point of delivery is used to exchange
                          Device
                                         meter reading results

                                       Measured
                         Register
                                        profile

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                     6
8.7
   Importing Profile Values

                                            For example:
                                            Siemens metering
                                            Fröschl                    IS-U/EDM
                                            Görlitz
                        Download
             Interval               AMR        Conversion
               meter               system
                         signal


                                                                        Profile




                                                                                  Interface
                                                            Point of
                                                            delivery

                                                                         Meter
         Other                                 EDI                      reading
        market                                 sub-                     results
      participants                             system

                                            For example:
                        EDI
                                            MSCONS




         ©SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                          7
8.8
   Profile Values



         A profile value is saved for every interval
         At least one status is saved for every profile value
         Multiple versions can be managed for every profile
         Profile values can be displayed in table or in graphical form
         Profile values can be changed individually or for certain
          periods of time
         Profile values can be imported using BAPI orIDoc
         An OLE (Excel) interface exists
         Profile values can be displayed on the web




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                               8
8.9
    Formula Profile




                                      1/4h demand(kW )
                                     100

                                     90

                                     80

                                     70

                                     60

                                     50

                                     40

                                     30

                                     20




                                       0




                                                                                                                              12:00
                                                                                                    12:00
                                                                      12:00
                                                         00:00




                                                                                                            00:00




                                                                                                                                                            12:00
                                                                                                                                       00:00
                                                                                  00:00
                                      01.17.1995                 01.18.1995                    01.19.1995                01.20.1995            01.21.1995




                               EDM


                          RP

                                                                                          LT
                                                                                          total load

                          UI

                                                                                          NL
                                                                                                                    request
                                                                                          net losses

                                                                              +                                     request


                                                                              +           SL                        request
                                                                                          street lights

                          UI
                                                                                                                                               rest load
                                                                                                                                               RL = LT - NL - SL - MC

                                                                     +                                              request


                          UI                                                                                                          scheduling
                                                                     +

                                                                      +                   MC
                                                                                          measured customers
                          UI
                                                                     +                                                                                      elementary load profile


                                                                                  automatic                                                                 aggregated load profile
                          UI

                                                                                                                                                            formula based profile



         © SAP AG 1999




 Formula profiles are used to calculate profile values on the basis of a functional connectivity
 You should use formula profiles if the relationship of input parameters to output parameters rarely
  changes (for the grid energy-feeding curve, for example)
 Formula profiles allow automatic calculation depending on the input parameters
 The calculation is scalable
 User-defined formulas can be supplemented




(C) SAP AG                                                                                           IUT110                                                                           9
8.10
    Synthetic Profiles

       Residential                Summer                 Workday
        customer                                                                00:00    24:00



                                                         Weekend                00:00    24:00




                                  Winter                 Workday
                                                                                00:00    24:00




                                                         Weekend
                                                                                00:00    24:00




                         Winter                                                Summer

        Weekend                Workday                    Workday              Weekend                Workday




         Su 03.28   Mo 03.29    Tu 03.30   We 03.31   Th 04.01   Fr 04.02   Sa 04.03    Su 04.04   Mo 04.05   Tu 04.06
         © SAP AG 1999




 Profile containing values that are generated on the basis of predefined periods (defined by day and
  season blocks) and the corresponding day or annual profiles
 Synthetic profiles are used for classifying customers or customer groups




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                         10
8.11
   Profile Management: Summary



                       You are now able to:

                        Describe the components that make up profiles
                        Explain the connection of profiles to the master data




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                 11
9
    Billing and Invoicing



        Contents:

         Billing
                  Overview
                  Basic components of billing
                  Special functions
         Invoicing
                  Overview
                  Invoicing functions
                                                                         -
                   Creation of contract accounts receivable and payable (FI CA)
                   and print documents




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                 1
9.2
   Billing and Invoicing: Course Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the billing process
                              Billing procedure, simulation
                              Credit memo, manual backbilling
                              Outsorting, billing reversal
                        Explain the invoicing process
                              Invoicing tasks and procedure
                              Special features of invoicing
                              Use of invoicing documents




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                          2
9.3
   Billing

        Contents

         Overview:
                  Billing procedures and special functions
                  Billing and simulation procedures
                  Design of billing rules
         Basic components of billing:
                  Scheduled dates and periods
                  Billing procedures
                  Billing and simulation
                  Document display
         Special billing functions:
                  Credit memo, manual backbilling
                  Outsorting, reversal

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110           3
9.4
   Billing: Introduction



                           Contract billing of the supply and services
                            provided is the most important function of a utility
                            company.
      SAP Utilities
                           Integrated processing of both residential and non -
                            residential customers requires several billing rules.

                           Increased competition requires the billing process
                            to be flexible and efficient.

                           Different types of simulation enable the correct
                            billing to be performed.




          © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                4
9.5
   Billing: Business Scenario



                        Move-out processing in the customer center
                              Move-out date and meter readings reported by
                               telephone

                              Implausible meter reading requires meter reading by
                               the company

                        Meter reading processing
                              Create meter reading order

                              Enter or estimate meter reading results

                        Start of billing and invoicing
                              Final billing, followed by invoicing



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                 5
9.6
   IS-U/CCS: Billing



                  Business                                                            Divisions
                   partner
                                 Residential                                           Water/             District
                                 customer                             Electricity      Waste water        heating
             Non-residential
             customer

                                                                                                     Cable
                                                     Consumption             Gas                   television
                                                                                    Charges        Multimedia
                                                       services
              Energy                                                                 Taxes
                                                      Flat rates                     Duties
              suppliers



                                   Billing rules, variants

               .. .. ..      Price
                             Price     Discounts,
                                        Discounts,   General
                                                     General     Proration
                                                                 Proration         Franchise
                                                                                   Franchise   .. .. ..
                          adjustment
                          adjustment   surcharges
                                       surcharges    duties
                                                      duties                          fees
                                                                                       fees



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                              IUT110                                                       6
9.7
   Billing Procedures: Overview


       Billing procedures:                    Special functions
                                               Interim billing
        Month-based                           Outsorting for bill verification
              Key date                        Simulation
              Period                          Manual backbilling
        For exact number of days              Manual credit memo
        Season-based                          Reversal
        Comparative (best rate)               Unbilled revenue reporting

        For employees
        Floating (backbilling, period-
         end billing)



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                   7
9.8
   Definition of Billing




             Meter reading



                                        Billing


                                                                Invoicing

             Billing order processing that involves valuation
             of consumption and demand for each contract,
             and creation of billing documents for invoicing.



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                            8
9.9
   Billing Tasks




                                               Determination and
                 Determination of
                                               conversion of
                 billing periods
                                               quantities




             Determination of
                                                     Valuation of
             change date and         Billing         quantities with
             proration to that
                                                     prices
             date



                 Determination of:             Creation of billing
                 • Rate data                   documents for
                 • Price data                  invoicing




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                            9
9.10
    Billing Periods



           Length of period for periodic billing
                    x days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months
           Length of period for period-end billing
                                                                          MO    TU   WE TH     FR   SA SU

                    x + x days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months               1
                                                                           8
                                                                                2
                                                                                9
                                                                                     3
                                                                                     10
                                                                                          4
                                                                                          11
                                                                                               5
                                                                                               12
                                                                                                    6
                                                                                                    13
                                                                                                         7
                                                                                                         14
                                                                           15   16   17   18   19   20   21
           Billing for an exact number of days                            21
                                                                           28
                                                                                22
                                                                                29
                                                                                     23
                                                                                     30
                                                                                          24
                                                                                          31
                                                                                               25   26   27


                    based on the date of the meter reading
           Month-based billing
                    dependent on key date
           Month-based billing
                    dependent on intervals



         © SAP AG 1999




  The billing period for which the utility bills the customer can be determined in a number of ways. These
  are:
 For an exact number of days
  Determines the exact length of the billing period in days, for example the period between the last billed
  meter reading and the current day of meter reading.
 Month-based
  Bills a specific number of complete months. If the case of a move-in or move-out, the month-based
  procedure can be billed based on the number of days.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                      10
9.11
   Forms of Billing



         Periodic billing
             Recurring periodic billing
         Floating backbilling
             Special form of monthly periodic billing in which
             backbilling is performed for previous months
             using a current value.
             Example: monthly comparison of n peak averages
         Period-end billing
             After completion of the billing cycle
             Example: 13th billing, backbilling for a year
         Interim billing
             Unscheduled billing at any time
             Example: initiated by customer request
         Final billing
             Examples: customer move-out or termination of contract; service territory
             transfer



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                     11
9.12
   Special Forms of Billing



         Best-rate billing
             The most favorable rate is chosen for the
             customer on the basis of several billing rules.
         Quantity-based rate for basic price
             The annual quantity consumed is used to determine
             the billing rule that applies.
         Demand-based rate determination
             The measured demand is used to determine the billing rule that
             applies.
         Season-based billing
                                                                            les
             Examples: Different prices for each season, different billing ru
             for each season.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                  12
9.13
    Generation of Schedule Records


                                                                                                                             End of
                                 Scheduled billing date                                                                      scheduled
        Portion 1                                                                                                            billing
         7.27.          7.28.       7.29.              7.30.          7.31.       8.1.           8.2.    8.3.                period


                         Meter reading period for MR unit 1

                                                                                   Billing period                                End of
                                                                                                                                 MR
             Scheduled                                       Meter reading period for MR unit 2                                  period
                MR                                                                 for all MR units
               date
                                     Meter reading period for MR unit 3




       2001                                                                     2002
       Portion 1                                                               Portion 1
       7.27. 7.28. 7.29. 7.30. 7.31.    8.1.          8.2.     8.3.            7.27. 7.28. 7.29. 7.30. 7.31.    8.1.      8.2.    8.3.
                 Meter reading                                                           Meter reading
                                                                                         Meter reading
                                            Billing
                                            Billing                                                             Billing




         © SAP AG 1999




 End of the billing period: Portions should be billed for the first time on this date. The length of the
  scheduled billing period (period length) in conjunction with this date determine the date of the next
  billing.
 Scheduled billing date:
   Date on which billing of contracts that belong to a particular portion should begin.
   This date is calculated as follows during generation of the schedule records: Date of the end of the
     billing period of the schedule record, minus the number of days between the end of the billing period
     and the scheduled billing date of the schedule master record.
   The SAP calendar is used for this.
 End of the meter reading period: Used as the baseline date for determining the schedules of the
  following meter reading periods. This date may not be later than the end of the billing period for the
  allocated portion.
 Scheduled meter reading date: Date on which all extrapolations and estimations are performed.




(C) SAP AG                                                            IUT110                                                              13
9.14
   Billing Process: Overview




           MR                 MR                                                        Bill
                                                  Billing         Invoicing
     order creation          entry                                                    printout




             Billing order           Billing order           Billing          Bill printout
                                                            document

                                      Plausible
                  MR
                                         MR
                 order
                                       results
                                                               MR
                                     Implausible            correction
                                         MR
                                       results



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                             14
9.15
   Universal Billing Engine


       Data relating to
                                                      Rate data                    Procedure data
       customer and
        installation                                                                     Schema 1
                                                     Prices and                Rate       Var.pr. Values      E
             Contract                                rate facts                Rate 1                         X
                                                                               1          VarProg. A     x1   E
                                                                               2          VarProg. B     x2
                                                                                  .           .         .     C
                                                                               Rate 2
                                                                                                              U
                                                                               1          VarProg. A     x3
                            Ra                        Rate 1                   2          VarProg. C     x4   T
         Installation      ca te        Rate                                   3          VarProg. D     x5   I
                             te                                                     .         .         .
                                go      deter-                                                                O
                                  ry                                                .         .         .
                                                                                    .         .         .     N
                                       mination                                     .         .         .
         Inst. structure          pe                       Rate n               Rate n
        Rate cat. facts/        ty                                             1          VarProg. A   xxx
                           a te
       Installation facts R




                                                         cut
                                                     Exe ion         a a ion
                                                                    V lid t
                Dtaa                      un
                                        Qua it
                                        Qaty              rian
                                                     of va nt t                         Ge ra ion
                                                                                           ne t
                 ntry
                et ry                      ve
                                       con rsion                         ee
                                                                    of m t r
                                                     p ra s
                                                      rog m                                  illin
                                                                                         of b g
                 ad
                  n                        ad
                                            n                          a ing
                                                                     re d
                n lysis
               ana
                 a                                  a      in o
                                                     ccord gt                              e e s
                                                                                        lin it m
                                        p t
                                         rora ion                       sult
                                                                     re s
                                                          e a
                                                      sch m
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                       15
9.16
     General Billing Functions




                                         Decision variants


                    Energy price                                    Usage hours




                Demand price                    Billing                Best-rate billing




                                                                   Block and scale
                    Service price
                                                                   prices
                                          Season-based
                                          values and variants


          © SAP AG 1999




   Energy price
    Measured or calculated consumption is valuated using energy charges. For example:
     Adjustment of calculated consumption over the course of the billing period
     Comparison with maximum/minimum purchase quantities and further processing of difference
       quantities
     Breakdown/valuation of energy quantities using different percentage rates or time criteria
   Demand price
    Measured or calculated demand is valuated using demand prices. The number of the measured demand
    values used for calculating the demand to be billed is variable. For example:
     Comparison with minimum demand, maximum demand, or other demand established in the contract,
       and further processing of the difference demand (such as excess demand)
     Breakdown and valuation of demand using different percentage rates
   Service price
    Any number of demand replacement values can be valuated with time-based prices for the supplying of
    energy. The demand replacement values can also be levied as a flat rate.
   Block and scale prices
   Season-based values and variants
   Decision variants


(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                               16
9.17
   Example: Billing Rule for Electricity


                           Variant pool
                           Variant pool
    QUANTITY
    QUANTITY
                   *
                   FACTOR
                   FACTOR
    Calculates x% of a quantity
    Calculates x% of a quantity
                                          QUANTITY
                                          QUANTITY


    .. .. ..                                                               Variant pool
                                                                           Variant pool

    .. .. ..                                                   ACT_KWH
                                                               ACT_KWH
                                                                        * 0.5
                                                                          0.5      ACT_50%
                                                                                   ACT_50%


                                                               REACT_KWH - ACT_50%
    NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS
    NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS              DEMAND
                                        DEMAND
    Calculates N peak averages
    Calculates N peak averages                                 REACT_KWH ACT_50%       BILL_REACT
                                                                                        BILL_REACT
    DEMAND
    DEMAND
                   *
                 PRICE
                 PRICE       BILLING LINE ITEMS
                              BILLING LINE ITEMS
    Valuates demand with a price
    Valuates demand with a price
                                                                          *
                                                               BILL_REACT UNI 0.06
                                                               BILL_REACT UNI 0.06   BILLING LINE
                                                                                      BILLING LINE
                                                                                     ITEMS
                                                                                      ITEMS

    .. .. ..
    QUANTITY
    QUANTITY       -       QUANTITY
                           QUANTITY
    Difference of two quantities
    Difference of two quantities
                                          QUANTITY
                                          QUANTITY

                                                              Contract text:
                                                              Contract text:
    .. .. ..
                                                              The reactive energy that exceeds 50%
                                                              The reactive energy that exceeds 50%
    .. .. ..                                                  of the active energy is valuated using a
                                                              of the active energy is valuated using a
                                                              separate price.
                                                              separate price.
    QTY
    QTY
               *
              PRICE
               PRICE           BILLING LINE ITEMS
                               BILLING LINE ITEMS
    Valuates energy with a price
    Valuates energy with a price

           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                              17
9.18
   Special Billing Functions




                                               Determination of
                 Billability check             taxes, duties, and
                                               charges



             Consideration of                     Energy feeding
             register                Billing      from small power
             relationships                        producers



                 Manual credit                 Billing of company
                 memos and                     and plant
                 backbilling                   consumption




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                          18
9.19
   Billing and Simulation

                                                                                           Billingdate
                                                                                            re ached
                                                                                                      Choose   Enter selection
                                                                                                                   crit ia
                                                                                                                      er
                                                                                                                                    Choose billing
                                                                                                                                        type


                                                                                                    billing type
                                                                                                                 Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                         Sim t n
                                                                                                                 chosen                                   chosen



                                                                                                                  Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                                                        St rtsim tion
                                                                                                                 billing


                                                                                                              Check billing                                Check
                                                                                                               docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                         sim lat n
                                                                                                                                                         docum ents


                                                    Billing types                        Billingdocum nt
                                                                                             im lausible
                                                                                               p
                                                                                                       e s         g
                                                                                                             Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                                         mn
                                                                                                                   correct
                                                                                                                                 Billing docum
                                                                                                                                       incorrect
                                                                                                                                                 ents
                                                                                                                                                           rt
                                                                                                                                                        Sta invoicing
                                                                                                                                                          sim ulation




                                                                                              ut
                                                                                            O sort            a
                                                                                                             St rt invoicing       eve
                                                                                                                                  R rsebilling
                                                                                           docum ents




    Description:                                                             Description:
                                                         IS-
                                                         IS-U
       Creation of billing documents used                                      Creation of simulation
       only for further processing in                                          documents that are only used for
       invoicing                                                               further processing in invoicing
                                                                               simulation
                                              Billing           Simulation
    Processing steps:                                                        Processing steps:
          The billing order is deleted and                                       Billing order is retained and
           cannot be billed again                                                  and can still be used for
          Meter reading results cannot be                                         simulation
           changed again                                                          Meter reading results can still
          Billing document is created                                             be changed
                                                                                  Simulation document is
                                                                                   created
           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                              IUT110                                                                                                          19
9.20
   Simulation Types

                                                                                              Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                               re ached                  er
                                                                                                                      crit ia              type


                                                                                                                                        Choose
                                                                                                                    Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                            Sim t n
                                                                                                                    chosen
                                                                                                                                       simulation            chosen



                                                                                                                     Sta rt
                                                                                                                    billing               type              a      ula
                                                                                                                                                           St rtsim tion



                                                                                                                 Check billing                                Check
                                                                                                                  docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                            sim lat n
                                                                                                                                                            docum ents


                                                  Simulation                                Billingdocum nt
                                                                                                im lausible
                                                                                                  p
                                                                                                          e s         g
                                                                                                                Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                                            mn
                                                                                                                      correct
                                                                                                                                    Billing docum
                                                                                                                                          incorrect
                                                                                                                                                    ents
                                                                                                                                                              rt
                                                                                                                                                           Sta invoicing
                                                                                                                                                             sim ulation




                                                    types                                        ut
                                                                                               O sort
                                                                                              docum ents
                                                                                                                St rt invoicin
                                                                                                                 a            g       eve
                                                                                                                                     R rsebilling




   Description:                                                                Description:
                                                           IS-
                                                           IS-U
       Billing can be simulated without a                                        Billing is simulated on the basis
       billing order for any group and for                                       of a billing order that can be
       any period of time.                                                       processed.
                                                                    Billing
                                             Simulation           simulation
   Processing steps:                                                           Processing steps:
          Simulation period can be                                                 Period is determined by the
           freely defined                                                            billing order
          Extrapolation that takes                                                 Meter reading results relevant
           account of meter reading                                                  to billing are required
           results
                                                                                    Valuation of billing
          Period can already have been
           billed                                                                   Billability check
           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                                                                           20
9.21
   Document Types

                                                                                   Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                    re ached                  er
                                                                                                           crit ia              type




                                                                                                         Billing
                                                                                                         chosen
                                                                                                                            Check                   ulaio
                                                                                                                                                 Sim t n
                                                                                                                                                  chosen



                                                                                                          Sta rt
                                                                                                                          documents              a      ula
                                                                                                                                                St rtsim tion
                                                                                                         billing


                                                                                                      Check billing                                Check
                                                                                                       docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                 sim lat n



     Simulation
                                                                                                                                                 docum ents

                                                                                                                                                   rt
                                                                                                                                                Sta invoicing
                                                                                               e s
                                                                                 Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                           g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                                       p
                                                                                     im lausible           correct             incorrect



                                                                                      ut
                                                                                    O sort            a
                                                                                                     St rt invoicing       eve
                                                                                                                          R rsebilling
                                                                                   docum ents




                                                                       Billing
                          Description:
                               Simulation produces a simulation
                                document
             Simulation
             document          Billing produces a billing document
                                                                 Billing
                                                                 document
                          Purpose
                               Documents the procedure
                               Saves and validates the results
                               Used for further processing of
                                billing line items



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                             IUT110                                                                                                   21
9.22
   Document Information

                                                                     Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                      re ached                  er
                                                                                             crit ia              type




                                                                                           Billing
                                                                                           chosen
                                                                                                              Check                   ulaio
                                                                                                                                   Sim t n
                                                                                                                                    chosen



                                    Billing                                                 Sta rt
                                                                                                            documents              a      ula
                                                                                                                                  St rtsim tion
                                                                                           billing


                                  line items                                            Check billing
                                                                                         docum ents
                                                                                                                                     Check
                                                                                                                                      u io
                                                                                                                                   sim lat n
                                                                                                                                   docum ents

                                                                                                                                     rt
                                                                                                                                  Sta invoicing
                                                                                 e s
                                                                   Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                             g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                         p
                                                                       im lausible           correct             incorrect




             Internal billing                                           ut
                                                                      O sort            a
                                                                                       St rt invoicing       eve
                                                                                                            R rsebilling


                                                     Rate data
                                                                     docum ents


                  data


                                Documents
                                 from
         Account data                                   Price data
                                • Simulation
                                • Billing


                 Print data                          Device data


                                 Meter reading
                                     data

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                                                                                22
9.23
   Further Processing of Documents

                                                               Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                re ached                  er
                                                                                       crit ia              type




                                                                                     Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                             Sim t n
                                                                                     chosen                                   chosen



                                                                                      Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                            St rtsim tion
                                                                                     billing




                                                                                                    Process
                                                                                  Check billing                                Check
                                                                                   docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                             sim lat n



          Invoicing
                                                                                                                             docum ents


                                                                                                   documents
                                                Invoicing
                                                                                                                               rt
                                                                                                                            Sta invoicing
                                                                           e s
                                                             Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                       g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                   p
                                                                 im lausible           correct             incorrect



         simulation                                             O sort
                                                                  ut
                                                               docum ents
                                                                                  a
                                                                                 St rt invoicing
                                                                                                     further
                                                                                                       eve
                                                                                                      R rsebilling




                        Documents
                         from
                        • Simulation
                        • Billing


              Billing                           Outsorting
             reversal




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                                                                                               23
9.24
   Outsorting Procedure

                                                                                       Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                        re ached                  er
                                                                                                               crit ia              type




                                                                                                             Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                     Sim t n
                                                                                                             chosen                                   chosen



                                                                                                              Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                                                    St rtsim tion
                                                                                                             billing


                                                                                                          Check billing                                Check
                                                                                                           docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                     sim lat n


                                                Outsort
                                                                                                                                                     docum ents

                                                                                                                                                       rt
                                                                                                                                                    Sta invoicing
                                                                                                   e s
                                                                                     Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                               g     mn      Billing docum   ents

                                                                                    Outsort
                                                                                                                                                      sim ulation
                                                                                           p
                                                                                         im lausible


                                               documents
                                                                                                               correct             incorrect




                                                                                   documents
                                                                                          ut
                                                                                        O sort
                                                                                       docum ents
                                                                                                         St rt invoicin
                                                                                                          a            g       eve
                                                                                                                              R rsebilling




     Description:                                                       Description:
       Billing documents which have                   IS-
                                                      IS-U                Billing documents for a contract
       failed validation are outsorted                                    for which the outsorting indicator
       automatically.                                                     is set are not automatically
                                                                          processed further.
     Possible validations:
                                          Automatic            Manual   Purpose
          Percentage or absolute
           amount that the billing                                           Check special contract billing
           document exceeds or falls                                          documents
           below the following:                                              Check new rates
               Amount limit                                                 Check consumption values in
               Bill sum total                                                complex installations
               Budget billing                                               Check proration for different
                                                                              time slices
          Bills with a balance of zero
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                                                                        24
9.25
   Outsorting Process

                                                                                  Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                   re ached                  er
                                                                                                          crit ia              type




                                                                                                        Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                Sim t n
                                                                                                        chosen                                   chosen




                                                             Bill
                                                                                                         Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                                               St rtsim tion
                                                                                                        billing


             Billing                  Invoicing                                                      Check billing                                Check


                                                           printout
                                                                                                      docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                sim lat n
                                                                                                                                                docum ents

                                                                                                                                                  rt
                                                                                                                                               Sta invoicing
                                                                                              e s
                                                                                Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                          g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                                      p
                                                                                    im lausible                               incorrect

                                                                             Outsort
                                                                                                          correct




                                                                            documents
                                                                                     ut
                                                                                   O sort            a
                                                                                                    St rt invoicing       eve
                                                                                                                         R rsebilling
                                                                                  docum ents




                         Check
                       documents
                                                   Outsorting reasons
                                                           Failed validation
    Exception           Outsort                            Indicator set in the contract
       list            documents
                                                   Further processing
                                                           Reversal
                                                           Release
         Reverse                    Release
        documents                  documents



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                                                                       25
9.26
   Billing Reversal

                                                                                             Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                              re ached                  er
                                                                                                                     crit ia              type




                                                                                                                   Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                           Sim t n
                                                                                                                   chosen                                   chosen



                                                                                                                    Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                                                          St rtsim tion
                                                                                                                   billing


                                                                                                                Check billing                                Check
                                                                                                                 docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                           sim lat n


                                                 Reverse billing                                                                                           docum ents



                                                                                                                                  Reverse
                                                                                                                                                             rt
                                                                                                                                                          Sta invoicing
                                                                                                         e s
                                                                                           Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                                     g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                                                 p
                                                                                               im lausible           correct             incorrect



                                                                                              O sort
                                                                                                ut             St rt invoicin
                                                                                                                a            g
                                                                                                                                 documents
                                                                                                                                     eve
                                                                                                                                    R rsebilling
                                                                                             docum ents




    Description:                                                             Description:
                                                         IS-
                                                         IS-U
       Only one billing document is                                            More than one document is
       reversed. This can occur with or                                        reversed. Selection takes place
       without a subsequent correction                                         using document intervals or lists
       bill.                                                                   of individual documents.
                                            Individual              Mass
                                             reversal             reversal
    Possible reasons:                                                        Possible reasons:
          Incorrect conditions for                                               Incorrect settlement group
           nonresidential contract
                                                                                  Incorrect rates and prices
          Incorrect meter reading result
                                                                                  Incorrect sales tax
          Technical fault
                                                                                  ...
          ...


           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                               IUT110                                                                                                           26
9.27
   Billing Reversal Process

                                                                                       Billingdate         Enter selection      Choose billing
                                                                                        re ached                  er
                                                                                                               crit ia              type



       Document                                                                                              Billing                                    ulaio
                                                                                                                                                     Sim t n


       outsorted
                                                                                                             chosen                                   chosen



                                                                                                              Sta rt                                 a      ula
                                                                                                                                                    St rtsim tion


                               Reverse
                                                                                                             billing


                                            Correct data           Restart                                Check billing                                Check

                                billing                            billing
                                                                                                           docum ents                                   u io
                                                                                                                                                     sim lat n
                                                                                                                                                     docum ents



                                                                                                                            Reverse
                                                                                                                                                       rt
                                                                                                                                                    Sta invoicing
                                                                                                   e s
                                                                                     Billingdocum nt     Billin docu e ts
                                                                                                               g     mn      Billing docum   ents     sim ulation
                                                                                           p
                                                                                         im lausible           correct             incorrect



        Document                                                                        O sort
                                                                                          ut              a
                                                                                                         St rt invoicing
                                                                                                                           documents
                                                                                                                               eve
                                                                                                                              R rsebilling
                                                                                       docum ents

       implausible
                                          Billing order




           Incorrect     2.16.00           Reversed      2.23.00             Corrected     2.24.00
           billing document                billing document                  billing document
             Jane Smith                      Jane Smith                       Jane Smith

             Electricity. . . . . 900        Electricity . . . . 900          Electricity . . . . 600
             Gas . . . . . . 1.000           Gas . . . . . 1.000              Gas . . . . . 1.000
             Water . . . . . . 700           Water . . . . . . 700            Water . . . . . . 700
             Total . . . . .    2.600        Total . . . . . 2.600            Total . . . . .                          2.300



                                           Reversal indicator set
         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                                                                        27
9.28
   Billing: Unit Summary



                   Billing processes billing orders,valuates consumption
                       and demand, and creates billing documents for invoicing.
                   There are two types of billing:
                         Simulation, which creates simulation documents

                         Billing, which creates billing documents

                   Outsorted billing documents require additional
                       processing - Documents must be either released or
                       reversed. Reasons for outsorting:
                         Failed validation

                         Indicator set in the contract

                   Individual or mass reversals enable quick correction and
                       subsequent billing.


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                              28
9.29
     Invoicing: Introduction



                           Invoicing links contract billing to contract accounts
                            receivable and payable, and prepares bill printout.

      SAP Utilities        The bill sum total is determined after settlement of
                            the billing documents against the budget billings
                            already paid, and against the taxes, charges, and
                            duties that are due.

                           Flexible settlement options, such as payments to
                            open items reduce the amount of processing
                            required.




          © SAP AG 1999




   The bill sum total is calculated as follows:
    Bill sum total =       Total receivables from billing
     - paid budget billings
     - other credits (credit memo, payment on account)
     + other receivables (backbilling, dunning charge)




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                          29
9.30
   Invoicing: Business Scenario



                        Move-out processing in the customer center:
                              Move-out date and meter readings reported by
                               telephone.

                              Implausible meter reading requires meter reading by the
                               company.

                        Meter reading processing:
                              Create meter reading order

                              Entry or estimation of meter reading results

                        Start of billing and invoicing:
                              Final billing, followed by invoicing



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                     30
9.31
   Definition of Invoicing




             Meter reading



                                        Billing


                                                                Invoicing

                 The process that links the billing documents
                 to contract accounts receivable and
                 payable, and provides the basis for bill
                 creation.


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                            31
9.32
   Invoicing: Overview


   Billing:                                                                Contract accounts receivable
       Provides the processes relevant                                     and payable:
       to payment and manages the                                            Contract Accounts Receivable and
       individual accounts.                                                  Payable makes available items
                                                                             relevant for payment and manages
                                                                             the individual accounts.
   Invoice-relevant transactions                                           Invoice-relevant transactions
                                         IS-U
                                         IS-                       FI-
                                                                   FI-CA         Open items
          Billing documents                                                 
          Credit memos                                                         Paid budget billings
          Backbillings                                                         Manual postings
                                                                                Dunning charges
                                                                                Payments on account


                                            Invoicing
                                               Bill printout
                                               Budget billing plan
                                               Due date determination
                                               Settlement
                                               Use of credits


           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                     32
9.33
    Tasks of Invoicing




                                           Settlement against
                                           first budget billing
                                                                         Creation of
                         Joint invoicing                                budget billing
                                                                            plan




                Cross-company                                                Due date
                code invoicing
                                               Invoicing                   determination




                            Account                                   Credit settlement
                          determination
                                              Budget billing
                                               settlement


         © SAP AG 1999




 Invoicing is the process that ingrates contract billing with the Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
  (FI-CA) component. It also forms the basis for bill creation.
 Invoicing is used for the following:
   Grouping together billing documents of contracts from the same contract account into one joint bill.
   Posting documents to FI-CA (sub-ledger accounting)
   Supplying bill printout documents for bill creation
   Processing budget billing plans




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                 33
9.34
   Invoicing Units
                                                                          at
                                                                        D e for              te lection
                                                                                           En r se                       Cho ose
                                                                       inv oicing                eria
                                                                                              crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                                         oicin ty
                                                                        reache  d


                                                                                                                                       Invoicing
                                                                                        Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                                      sim laion
                                                                                                                                        chosen

                                                                                       Start
                                                                                         St inv
                                                                                          art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                                     Sta inv
                                                                                                                                          u t
                                                                                                                                       sim laion

                                                                                     invoicing
         Creation of invoicing units                                          Check the FI
                                                                                 docum nt
                                                                                        e
                                                                                          -CA
                                                                                                         Check bill
                                                                                                          printout
                                                                                                         docum  ent
                                                                                                                                        Check
                                                                                                                                         ulat
                                                                                                                                      sim ion
                                                                                                                                            e
                                                                                                                                      docum nts


                                                                       Invoicing            Invoicing                  Invoicing         ulat
                                                                                                                                     Sim e bill
                                                                      do     en
                                                                         cum ts            do cum ts
                                                                                                   en                      mn
                                                                                                                      docu e ts        p ou
                                                                                                                                        rint t


             Summary of the billing documents in a                    im usible


                                                                       Ou
                                                                         pla


                                                                          tsort
                                                                                             co rrect


                                                                                            Start bill
                                                                                                                       incorrect


                                                                                                                      Invoicing


             contract account can be controlled at contract level.        m nts
                                                                      docu e                printout                  Rev ersal




                  Mandatory
                   Contracts for which the documents must be invoiced together
                  Optional
                   Contracts for which the documents can be invoiced together
                  Exclusive
                   Contracts for which the documents must be invoiced separately




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                                                                                 34
9.35
   Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 1



       Contract account          Billing       Invoicing
             Contract 1
             Contract 1        Document 1
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
                               Document 1
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice   Mandatory
                                Mandatory
             Contract 2
             Contract 2
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice


             Contract 3
             Contract 3
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
                               Document 3
                               Document 3
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice   Mandatory
                                Mandatory
             Contract
             Contract                                         ll
               Optional
                               Document
                               Document         Document
                                                Document    Bi
                Optional
             Joint invoice
              Joint invoice     Optional
                                Optional         Optional
                                                 Optional

             Contract
             Contract          Document
                               Document         Document
                                                Document
          Exclusive invoice
          Exclusive invoice    Exclusive
                               Exclusive        Exclusive
                                                Exclusive     ll
                                                            Bi




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                       35
9.36
   Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 2



       Contract account         Billing       Invoicing
             Contract 1
             Contract 1        Document 1
                               Document 1
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice
                               Mandatory
                                Mandatory

             Contract 2
             Contract 2        Document 2
                               Document 2
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
                               Mandatory       Document
                                               Document       ll
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice    Mandatory                  Bi

             Contract 3
             Contract 3        Document 3
               Mandatory
                Mandatory
                               Document 3
              Joint invoice
               Joint invoice   Mandatory
                                Mandatory

             Contract
             Contract          Document
                               Document
               Optional
                Optional
             Joint invoice
              Joint invoice
                                Optional
                                Optional


             Contract          Document
                               Document        Document
                                               Document
             Contract                                         ll
          Exclusive invoice
          Exclusive invoice    Exclusive
                               Exclusive       Exclusive
                                               Exclusive   Bi




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                        36
9.37
   Invoicing Options
                                                            at
                                                          D e for              te lection
                                                                             En r se                       Cho ose
                                                         inv oicing                eria
                                                                                crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                           oicin ty
                                                          reache  d


                                                                                                                         Invoicing
                                                                          Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                        sim laion
                                                                                                                          chosen

                                                                         Start
                                                                           St inv
                                                                            art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                       Sta inv
                                                                                                                            u t
                                                                                                                         sim laion

                                                                       invoicing
         SAP billing documents                                  Check the FI
                                                                   docum nt
                                                                          e
                                                                            -CA
                                                                                           Check bill
                                                                                            printout
                                                                                           docum  ent
                                                                                                                          Check
                                                                                                                           ulat
                                                                                                                        sim ion
                                                                                                                              e
                                                                                                                        docum nts


                                                         Invoicing            Invoicing                  Invoicing         ulat
                                                                                                                       Sim e bill
                                                                                                                          rint t
                                                                                                                         p ou


                   IS-U billing documents
                                                        do     en
                                                           cum ts            do      en
                                                                                cum ts                       mn
                                                                                                        docu e ts
                                                           pla
                                                        im usible              co rrect                  incorrect
                                                                             Start bill
                                                         Ou tsort                                       Invoicing
                                                            m nts
                                                        docu e                printout                  Rev ersal




                  SD billing documents
                  PM / SM billing documents
         External billing documents via the standard
          IDoc interface
                  Heating costs billing
                  Telecommunications
         Company code allocation
                  Invoicing within a company code
                  Cross-company code invoicing


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                                                                    37
9.38
   Source of Billing Documents


   SAP systems:                                                                     External systems:
     Central invoicing of all                                                         Using standard billing
     processes from consumption                                                       documents, billing results from
     billing, sales and distribution                                                  external systems can be invoiced
     and service management                                                           and monitored together with
     simplify the transactions.                                                       consumption billing results.

   Invoice-relevant transactions                                                    Invoice-relevant transactions
                                                                        External
                                       SD                                                Telecommunications
        IS-U consumption billing
                                               IS-
                                               IS-U                                      Heating costs billing
        SD Sales and Distribution
        CS Customer Service                                                             Other unbundling services
                                                           CS




                                            Bill
                                              Jane Smith

                                                   ....
                                                                            600
                                                               . . . . . .
                                                   Electricity                500
                                                                ce . . . . 1.
                                                    Maintenan
                                                                . .  . . . . 700
                                                    Te l. com.
                                                                            0
                                                    Total .   . . . . 2.80
         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                         38
9.39
   Invoicing Various Services


     Disposal service #1      Supply service #2       Energy feeding #3      Other services #4
       Waste water UNI 50
       Waste water UNI 50     Electricity
                              Electricity   UNI 15 Electricity
                                            UNI 15 Electricity               Cable TV
                                                                             Cable TV    UNI 30
                                                                                         UNI 30
       Garbage
       Garbage     UNI 40
                   UNI 40     Water
                              Water         UNI 60 connection UNI 85
                                            UNI 60 connection UNI 85
                              Gas
                              Gas           UNI 80
                                            UNI 80

       Sale              #5         a a s 41
                                 Tot l ch rge # 7 1                           e l illin
                                                                           Ext rna b g
       Radiator UNI 35           Billin 1 7
                                       g(# -# )          U I5 0
                                                          N 1               ocu e
                                                                           d m nt #   7
       Radiator UNI 35                                                    Se          N 0
                                                                            rvicexy U I 7
                                       g t illin s id 1 3 N 3
                                 -Bud e b g pa (# -# )U I 3 0
                                        m ota
                                 Bill su t l            N 8
                                                       U I1 0
     Maintenance fee #6
                                  u       1 5 00
                                 d eon 0 /1 /2 0
       Gas heating UNI 45
       Gas heating UNI 45                                                          Billing
                                                                                  summary
                                                                      IS-U
                                  Account: A. Smith                    - One division for several
                                                                      contracts ("unbundling" electricity
                                  Billing #4711           UNI 180
                                                                      rate)
                                  Single items per                     - various divisions (electricity,
        Simplified                receivable:                         gas, water)
         example                  Billing #1 ...                      SAP applications
        without tax                 Billing #2 ...                     SD/CS and IS-U invoices
                                    ................                  Also billing from external systems

         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                39
9.40
     Cross-company code invoicing


                         Total Charges #4711                        Account Smith (xy)
                                                                                  (xy)     General ledger 01
                                                                    Re. #4711 380 UNI      Dep. of works xy
                         Dep. of works xy:
       Contracts         Consumption bill. #1                       Line items for each    Req. electricity
                         Electricity        1000 UNI                requirement:           Req. gas
       for ”xy"
       CoCd. 01          Gas                1500 UNI                                       Req. water
                         Water                600 UNI               Billing #1 (xy) ...
                                                                    Billing #2 (zz) ...
                         Cross-company code billing for             Billing #3 (rs) ...
       Contracts         local authority zz:
       for "zz"          Other services #2
       CoCd. 02          Waste water         500 UNI                               FI-CA
                         Waste disposal      200 UNI

                                                                    General ledger 02      General ledger 03
                         Cross-company code billing                                        (not relevant for fin.
       Contracts         for TV company rs:                         Local authority zz     statements)
       for "zz"          Other Services #3                                                 TV company "rs"
       CoCd. 03
                         Cable TV           180 UNI
                                                                    Waste water req.       Cable TV req.
                                                                    Waste disposal req.
                         Total charges #4711:
                                                                    Cross-company            Third party billing
                                 (#1-
                         Billing (#1-#3)       3980 UNI
                                                                    code billing
                                       (#1- #3)-
                         - amount paid (#1-#3)-3600 UNI
       IS-
       IS-U              amount outstanding: 380 UNI                                                            FI
                         due on                  1/15/96

         © SAP AG 1999




   Dies ist das Beispiel einer Fakturierung für verschiedene Buchungskreise.
   Die Stadtwerke xy versorgen ihre Kunden mit Strom, Gas und Wasser.
   Sie rechnen aber auch im Auftrag der Kommune zz Abwasser und Müllabfuhr ab.
   Für die Kabelfernsehgesellschaft rs rechnen sie die Gebühren für Kabel-TV ab.
   All dies geschieht im selben SAP-System, obwohl es sich um verschiedene Unternehmen handelt.




(C) SAP AG                                                 IUT110                                                    40
9.41
     Bill Due Date
                                                                           rm
                                                                         Te infür               le
                                                                                              Se ktions  -              Artder
                                                                             kt
                                                                          Fa ura                 rit rie
                                                                                               k e n                       ura
                                                                                                                        Fakt
                                                                          erreicht             einge  ben               wählen


                                                                                                                                      ura
                                                                                                                                  Fakt -
                                                                                                kt
                                                                                              Fa ura                                u t
                                                                                                                                 sim laion
                                                                                               ew lt
                                                                                              g äh                                   ä
                                                                                                                                  gewhlt

                                                                                         Start
                                                                                           St inv
                                                                                            art oicing                                 ura
                                                                                                                                  Fakt -
                                                                                                                                     u t
                                                                                                                                 sim laion

                                                                                       invoicing                                   starten


           The bill due date is determined from the                             Check the FI
                                                                                   docum nt
                                                                                          e
                                                                                            -CA
                                                                                                         Check bill
                                                                                                          printout
                                                                                                         docum  ent
                                                                                                                                 Sim ions
                                                                                                                                    ulat -
                                                                                                                                    ele
                                                                                                                                   b ge
                                                                                                                                   prüfen



            following attributes:                                         Fakt -

                                                                         unpla
                                                                              ura
                                                                           belege
                                                                              usibel
                                                                                              Fakt -
                                                                                               belege
                                                                                               k rrekt
                                                                                                o
                                                                                                   ura                 Fakt -
                                                                                                                           ura
                                                                                                                        belege
                                                                                                                           rha
                                                                                                                      fehle ft
                                                                                                                                 Rechnun
                                                                                                                                   druck
                                                                                                                                     u ren
                                                                                                                                 sim lie
                                                                                                                                         gs-




                                                                                            Rechnungs-


                     Terms of payment
                                                                            ele
                                                                           B ge                                        Faktura
                                                                         aussteuern            druck                     rnie
                                                                                                                      sto ren
                                                                                                rte
                                                                                              sta n




                     These determine the source of the baseline date
                    Baseline date:
                     Posting date, document date, or system date
           Terms of payment
                    Allocated to the contract account centrally
                    Can be differentiated for incoming and outgoing payment
                    If a bill falls due on a holiday, the bill due date can be
                     corrected to fall on a working day.
                    Can be specified for each company inCustomizing

                Baseline date + terms of payment = bill due date


         © SAP AG 1999




   Das Rechnungsfälligkeitsdatum kann auch mit dem ersten Abschlag zusammengelegt werden.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                                                         41
9.42
   Document Flow in Invoicing
                                                              rm
                                                            Te infür               le
                                                                                 Se ktions  -              Artder
                                                                kt
                                                             Fa ura                 rit rie
                                                                                  k e n                       ura
                                                                                                           Fakt
                                                             erreicht             einge  ben               wählen


                                                                                                                         ura
                                                                                                                     Fakt -
                                                                                   kt
                                                                                 Fa ura                                u t
                                                                                                                    sim laion
                                                                                  ew lt
                                                                                 g äh                                   ä
                                                                                                                     gewhlt

                                                                            Start
                                                                              St inv
                                                                               art oicing                                 ura
                                                                                                                     Fakt -
                                                                                                                        u t
                                                                                                                    sim laion

                                                                          invoicing
                                                                    Check the FI
                                                                               -CA
                                                                                            Check bill
                                                                                                                      starten

                                                                                                                       ulat -
                                                                                                                    Sim ions
                                                                                             printout                  ele
                                                                                                                      b ge
                                                                             e
                                                                      docum nt
                                                                                            docum  ent                prüfen


                                                             Fakt -
                                                                 ura                  ura
                                                                                 Fakt -                       ura
                                                                                                          Fakt -    Rechnun gs-
                                                              belege              belege                   belege     druck
                                                            unplausibel           k rrekt
                                                                                   o                     fehle ft
                                                                                                              rha       u ren
                                                                                                                    sim lie




               Billing           Credit memos/                 ele
                                                              B ge             Rechnungs-                 Faktura
                                                            aussteuern            druck                     rnie
                                                                                                         sto ren
                                                                                    rte
                                                                                 sta n



             documents            backbillings


                                                      Print
                                                   documents
                           Start
                         invoicing

                                                  Posting docs.                      FI-CA




       Budget billing plans     FI-CA documents




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                              IUT110                                                                                    42
9.43
   Settlement: Overview
                                                                     at
                                                                   D e for              te lection
                                                                                      En r se                       Cho ose
                                                                  inv oicing                eria
                                                                                         crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                                    oicin ty
                                                                   reache  d


                                                                                                                                  Invoicing
                                                                                   Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                                 sim laion
                                                                                                                                   chosen

                                                                                  Start
                                                                                    St inv
                                                                                     art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                                Sta inv
                                                                                                                                     u t
                                                                                                                                  sim laion

                                                                                invoicing
        In IS-U clearing processing, settlement                          Check the FI
                                                                            docum nt
                                                                                   e
                                                                                     -CA
                                                                                                    Check bill
                                                                                                     printout
                                                                                                    docum  ent
                                                                                                                                   Check
                                                                                                                                    ulat
                                                                                                                                 sim ion
                                                                                                                                       e
                                                                                                                                 docum nts



         comprises the following activities:                      Inv
                                                                 do
                                                                     oicing
                                                                    cum ts
                                                                        en
                                                                    pla
                                                                 im usible
                                                                                       Inv
                                                                                      do
                                                                                          oicing
                                                                                         cum ts
                                                                                              en
                                                                                        co rrect
                                                                                                                  Invoicin
                                                                                                                 docu e ts
                                                                                                                      mn
                                                                                                                  incorre
                                                                                                                          g

                                                                                                                         ct
                                                                                                                                    ulat
                                                                                                                                Sim e bill
                                                                                                                                   rint t
                                                                                                                                  p ou




                                                                  Ou tsort             Start bill                Invoicing


                 Automatic determination of the purpose of           m nts
                                                                 docu e                printout                  Rev ersal

             
                 a payment amount when a payment transaction
                 is entered.
                Automatic allocation of posted open items to each
                 other in account maintenance.

        The selected items are cleared or partially
         cleared on the basis of these allocations.

        Settlement control is flexible and enables you to
         model your own clearing strategy in Customizing.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                                                                              43
9.44
   Bill Printout Procedure
                                                                                                                                at
                                                                                                                              D e for              te lection
                                                                                                                                                 En r se                       Cho ose
                                                                                                                             inv oicing                eria
                                                                                                                                                    crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                                                                                               oicin ty
                                                                                                                              reache  d


                                                                                                                                                                                             Invoicing
                                                                                                                                              Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                                                                                            sim laion
                                                                                                                                                                                              chosen


                                                                                                                                               St inv
                                                                                                                                                art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                                                                                           Sta inv
                                                                                                                                                                                                u t
                                                                                                                                                                                             sim laion


         Print                                                                                                                                  -CA
                                                                                                                                     Check the FI
                                                                                                                                                               Check bill
                                                                                                                                                                printout
                                                                                                                                                                                              Check
                                                                                                                                                                                               ulat
                                                                                                                                                                                            sim ion

       document
                                                                                                                                              e
                                                                                                                                       docum nt

                        Select print       Choose                       Start
                                                                                                                                                               docum  ent                         e
                                                                                                                                                                                            docum nts


                                                                                                                             Invoicing            Invoicing                  Invoicing         ulat
                                                                                                                                                                                           Sim e bill

       ready for         document         output type                  output                                               do cum ts
                                                                                                                            im usible
                                                                                                                               pla
                                                                                                                                   en
                                                                                                                                          Start bill
                                                                                                                                                 do      en
                                                                                                                                                    cum ts
                                                                                                                                                   co rrect
                                                                                                                                                                                 mn
                                                                                                                                                                            docu e ts
                                                                                                                                                                             incorrect
                                                                                                                                                                                             p ou
                                                                                                                                                                                              rint t




        output                                                                                                               Ou tsort
                                                                                                                            docu e
                                                                                                                                m nts     printoutStart bill
                                                                                                                                                  printout
                                                                                                                                                                            Invoicing
                                                                                                                                                                            Rev ersal




                                 SAP spool
                                                                             Output



            Print
         documents               Raw data
                                 interface
                                                                                               Dear Mad
                                                                                     Dear                 am/S ir:
                                                                            Dear Mad Madam/Sir:
                                                                                    In refe In refe renc e
                                                                                        am/Sir:
                                                                           In referenc renc e..to your to your lette r of
                                                                                              9/27.
                                                                                    9/27. .. to you
                                                                                          e                  lette
                                                                           9/27 ...                 r letter of r of




                                                                                       Mail processing

                                                           Bill date




                                       Archive
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                                                                                                                  44
9.45
   Invoicing Reversal
                                                                                                at
                                                                                              D e for              te lection
                                                                                                                 En r se                       Cho ose
                                                                                             inv oicing                eria
                                                                                                                    crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                                                               oicin ty
                                                                                              reache  d


                                                                                                                                                             Invoicing
                                                                                                              Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                                                            sim laion
                                                                                                                                                              chosen


                                              Invoicing Reversal                                               St inv
                                                                                                                art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                                                           Sta inv
                                                                                                                                                                u t
                                                                                                                                                             sim laion



                                                    Mass reversal                                   Check the FI
                                                                                                              e
                                                                                                       docum nt
                                                                                                                -CA
                                                                                                                               Check bill
                                                                                                                                printout
                                                                                                                                                              Check
                                                                                                                                                               ulat
                                                                                                                                                            sim ion
                                                                                                                               docum  ent                         e
                                                                                                                                                            docum nts


                                                or                                           Inv
                                                                                            do
                                                                                                oicing
                                                                                               cum ts
                                                                                                   en
                                                                                                                  Inv
                                                                                                                 do
                                                                                                                     oicing
                                                                                                                         en
                                                                                                                    cum ts
                                                                                                                                             Invoicin
                                                                                                                                            docu e ts
                                                                                                                                                 mn
                                                                                                                                                     g         ulat
                                                                                                                                                           Sim e bill
                                                                                                                                                             p ou
                                                                                                                                                              rint t
                                                                                               pla
                                                                                            im usible              co rrect                  incorrect

                                                    Single reversal                         Ou tsort             Start bill
                                                                                                                  printout
                                                                                                                               Invoicing    Invoicing
                                                                                                m nts
                                                                                            docu e                                          Rev ersal

                                                                                                                               Reversal




    Bill reversal:                                                              Full reversal:
   Bill printout and FI-CA documents for                   IS-
                                                           IS-U
                                                                                  In addition to the bill, billing
   bills or partial bills are reversed by                                         documents are also reversed by
   selecting using a reconciliation key                                           selecting using a document
   or document number.                                                            number. Full reversal does not
                                                                                  include reversal of partial billing
                                            Bill                     Full
                                            reversal                 reversal     documents.
   Transactions                                                                  Transactions
          Reversal of FI-CA document                                                 Reversal of FI-CA document
          Reversal of bill printout                                                  Reversal of bill printout
           document                                                                    document
          Possible reasons:                                                          Reversal of billing document
              Incorrect layout                                                       Possible reasons:
              Printing problems
                                                                                          Incorrect billing
           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                                                                          45
9.46
   Procedure for Bill Reversal
                                                                                         at
                                                                                       D e for              te lection
                                                                                                          En r se                       Cho ose
                                                                                      inv oicing                eria
                                                                                                             crit                    inv     g pe
                                                                                                                                        oicin ty
                                                                                       reache  d


                                                                                                                                                      Invoicing
                                                                                                       Invoicing chosen                                  u t
                                                                                                                                                     sim laion
                                                                                                                                                       chosen


                                                                                                        St inv
                                                                                                         art oicing                                    rt oicing
                                                                                                                                                    Sta inv

       Document                                                                                                                                          u t
                                                                                                                                                      sim laion




       outsorted
                                                                                                                        Check bill                     Check
                                                                                                         -CA
                                                                                              Check the FI
                                                                                                                         printout                       ulat
                                                                                                                                                     sim ion
                                                                                                       e
                                                                                                docum nt
                                                                                                                        docum  ent                         e
                                                                                                                                                     docum nts

                                                                                                                                                        ulat
                                                                                                                                                    Sim e bill

                                                                   Restart
                                                                                      Invoicing            Invoicing                  Invoicing

                             Reverse                                                 do
                                                                                        pla
                                                                                            en
                                                                                        cum ts
                                                                                     im usible
                                                                                                          do cum ts
                                                                                                            co
                                                                                                                  en
                                                                                                               rrect
                                                                                                                                     docu e ts
                                                                                                                                          mn
                                                                                                                                      incorrect
                                                                                                                                                      p ou
                                                                                                                                                       rint t



                                          Correct data            invoicing                                       Reverse
                             invoice                                                  Ou tsort
                                                                                         m nts
                                                                                     docu e
                                                                                                           Start bill
                                                                                                           printout
                                                                                                                                     Invoicing
                                                                                                                                     Rev ersal

                                                                                                                 documents
      Document
     implausible
                                         Billing
                                        document




       Bill                            Reversed bill                      New bill
         Jane Smith                      Jane Smith                            Jane Smith
          ....                            ....                                  ....
                          . 900                             . 900
        Electricity . . .. 1.000        Electricity . . . . 1.000                                 900
                                                                              Electricity. . .. . 1.000
        Ga  s . . . . . 700             Gas . . . . . . 700                   Gas    . . . .
                                        W ater . . . .                                             700
        W ater . . . . .                                                      W ater . . . . .
                             2.900                           2.900                                 2.500
           Bud. billings                   Bud. billings                         Bud. billings
                         o . . 300                            . 300                               . 100
           Credit mem                      Credit memo .                         Receivable .

        © SAP AG 1999                   Reversal indicator set




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                                                                          46
9.47
   Procedure for Full Reversal


       Document
       outsorted
                                  Reverse           Reverse                                                                      Restart
                                                                            Correct data       Restart billing                  invoicing
                                  invoice            billing

      Document
     implausible
                                                            Billing order




                   16.2.98                        Reversed       23.2.98                        Corrected      24.2.98
    Incorrect
    billing document                              billing document                              billing document

       Jane Smith                                  Jane Smith                                    Jane Smith

       Electricity . . Bill . 900
                       . .                                         . ersed
                                                   Electricity . . Rev. 900 bill                 Electricity . .   . . . 600
                                                                                                                   New bill
       Gas . . . . . . Jane Smith
                            1.000                    Gas . . . . . 1.000 ith                       Gas . . .       . . 1.000 ith
                                                                                                                          e Sm
       Water . . . . . . ....700
                                                                         e Sm
                                                     Water . . . . -Jan700                       Water . . .       . .Jan700
                                                                                                                       .
                                                                                                                       ....
                                                                      ....
                                     . . . .900                                                                                           900
       Total . . . . . Electricity . . . 1.000
                             2.600                 Total . . . .    - 2.600          . 900
                                                                   Electricity . .. . 1.000
                                                                                                 Total . . . . .    Electricity . .. .. 1.000
                                                                                                                     2.300
                           Gas . . .                                                                                Gas . . .
                                                                   Gas . . . . . .      700                                      .    . 700
                                        . 700                          ter . . .                                   Water . . .
                        Water . . . . .                            Wa
                                                                                                                                         2.500
                                         2.900                        Bud. billings. 2.900                          Bud. billings
                        Bud. billings
                                                                                       . 300                                . . . . . 100
                         Credit memo . 300                            Credit memo .                                  Total



           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                         IUT110                                                                        47
9.48
   Invoicing: Unit Summary



                        The invoicing procedure includes:
                             Invoicing and printing of the bill
                             Requests for budget billings or creation of partial bills
                             Different reversal procedures
                             Flexible settlement control
                        Budget billing procedure
                             Budget billing: statistical posting or debit entry
                             Payment plan: fixed amounts or variable amounts
                        Output
                             Printout on R/3 printer using spool
                             Raw data interface for external mail processing
                             Archiving
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                       48
9.49Billing and Invoicing Exercises

                     Unit: Billing and invoicing
                     Topic: Billing a business partner

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Describe the billing process and tasks.
                        • Use the billing and simulation functions.


                     Various business processes require the billing of an individual customer.
                     This may be necessary due to the move-out of a customer, by the express
                     wish of a customer or to advise a customer, for example.
                     Carrying out a simulation for any billing period, or for an actual billing
                     period, allows you to provide specific information, without altering data.

   1-1       Business partner TB100120## with contract account TB100120## comes in to the
             customer center to report his/her move-out. You process the move-out and create the
             final billing. Check the move-out date and the bill sum total in the customer overview.
             1-1-1 Call up the move-out process How would you proceed?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-1-2 Create move-out: Initial screen
             Enter the last day of the previous month as the move-out date and choose the call.
                     How would you proceed?
                     ___________________________________________________

                    ___________________________________________________

                    ___________________________________________________

                    ___________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             49
             1-1-3 Execute move-out processing: Enter meter readings
                •      Meter reading by customer.
                •      Enter a plausible meter reading for each device and each register. Use the
                       correction and estimation functionality

                       How would you proceed?
                       ___________________________________________________

                       ___________________________________________________

                       ___________________________________________________

                       What values would you enter?

                       Electricity register 1
                       _____________________________________________

                       Gas register 1
                       _____________________________________________

                       Water register 1 _____________________________________________

                •      Request a final bill and display this on the screen. Use printer LT0Q.

                       How would you proceed?
                       ___________________________________________________

                       ___________________________________________________

                •      Exit move-out processing

                       How would you proceed?
                       ___________________________________________________

                       ___________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                               50
             1-1-4 Check the move-out in the customer overview.
                •       What was the bill sum total?
                        _______________________________________________________
                •       Where can you read the move-out date? On which date did the move-out
                        take place?
                        ___________________________________________________
                •       End the contact.

   1-2       Business partner TB100110## comes into the customer center and would like an
             interim billing. From the CIC, enter the meter readings supplied by the customer.
             Display the individual simulation of the billing. First, check the meter reading results
             and then request the actual billing.
             1-2-1 Enter the meter readings for business partner TB100110## using the CIC.

                    How would you proceed?
                    Which meter readings have you entered?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                 51
             1-2-2 Carry out the individual simulation and display the bill for business partner
                   TB100110##.


                                 •   For the bill simulation, go to the SAP Easy
                                     Access menu and choose Utilities Industry 
                                     Billing  Billing Execution  Individual
                                     Processing  Individual Simulation  Billing.
                                 •   The most useful means of selection is via the
                                     contract account.
                                 •   Choose the Display bill level of processing.



             How would you proceed?
                  ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-2-3 Process and display the individual bill for business partner TB100110##.

                                 •   For the individual bill, go to the SAP Easy
                                     Access menu and choose Utilities Industry 
                                     Billing  Billing Execution  Individual
                                     Processing  Individual Bill.
                          •   The most useful means of selection is via the contract
                              account.
                          •   Choose the Bill level of processing.


             How would you proceed?
                  ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________


   1-3       Display the billing document for the water contract of business partner TB100110##
             and answer the following questions.
             1-3-1 Display the billing document.

                    How would you proceed?
(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             52
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-3-2 What was the scheduled billing period?
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-3-3 How many line items does the billing document contain?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-3-4 Which line categories are available and what do they mean?

      Line category                      Meaning




             1-3-5 What was the total billing quantity determined?
                   ______________________________________________________


   1-4       True or false?
             1-4-1 Billing is only carried out after meter reading and before invoicing.
                   ______________________________________________________
             1-4-2 Billing simulation must be carried out before billing.
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-4-3 After billing, the billable orders are produced.
                   _____________________________________________________

             1-4-4 The billing documents are processed further during invoicing.
                   _____________________________________________________

             1-4-5 Individual billing items can be entered manually as backbilling or as a credit
                   memo.
                   ______________________________________________________

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              53
                                                                                      Exercises

                     Unit: Billing and invoicing
                     Topic: Invoicing a business partner

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Describe the invoicing process and tasks.
                        • Use the invoicing and simulation functions.
                        • Explain the budget billing procedure.
                        • Provide information on the budget billing plan.


                     The billing results are compared with the transactions in open item
                     accounting. The bill sum total is determined in this way.
                     After calculating the budget billing plan for the next period, the bill can
                     be printed with details of the bill due date and the new budget billing
                     amount due date.

   2-1       Execute the invoicing simulation for business partner TB100110##. Carry out the
             following steps:
             2-1-1 Simulate invoicing

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-1-2 Check the log

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             54
             2-1-3 Display the document

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-1-4 Simulate the bill?

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________


   2-2       Process the actual invoice for business partner TB100110##.
             2-2-1 Invoice the business partner

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-2-2 Check the log
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-2-3 Display bill from customer overview

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________


   2-3       Provide information on the print document.
             2-3-1 From the customer overview, display the print document for business partner
                   TB100110##.
                   How would you proceed?
                   __________________________________________________________

                    __________________________________________________________

             2-3-2 How many line items does the print document contain?
                   How would you proceed?
(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                            55
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-3-3 What is the bill sum total?

                    How would you proceed?
                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-3-4 Which rate was used in the calculation?
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-3-5 Enter the bill due date.
                   ______________________________________________________


   2-4       True or false?
             2-4-1 Invoicing is only carried out after billing.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-2 Only one invoice is ever generated for all contracts of the contract account.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-3 The invoice takes into account billing documents from other company codes.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-4 The bill due date is always derived from the posting date and the terms of
                   payment.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-5 The invoice generates the print documents.
                   ______________________________________________________


(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                            56
                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-6 The invoice can be reversed separately or reversed along with the settlement.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             2-4-7 The billing document only takes into account statistically posted documents
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                              57
9.50Billing and invoicing Solutions

                     Unit: Billing and invoicing
                     Topic: Billing a business partner


   1-1       From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
             Choose Utilities industry → Customer service → Front Office/Customer Interaction
             Center → Customer Interaction Center.
             Identify the business partner by entering the number TB100120## in the Business
             partner field and choose Enter twice. The business partner is stored on the clipboard.
             1-1-1 Choose the Move-out partner call that is found under the Move I/O call group.
             1-1-2 Enter the move-out date. You are now in the move-out processing screen.
             1-1-3 Choose the MR data tab and enter plausible meter readings. Pay attention to the
                   column meter reading status (RS). This must have a value of 1. If the value is
                   different, you have entered an implausible meter reading result and can use the
                   Correct button to enter a plausible result.
                   Choose the Final bill button. You must enter a reconciliation key. Enter
                   IUT110-01 and save the data.
                   Confirm the data for printing.
                   Save the move-out.
             1-1-4 You return to the CIC. Refresh your data in the navigation area. Go to Info and
                   choose Customer overview. Check that the tabs for the contracts have been
                   deactivated. In the MvOut date field, you can see the date on which the
                   customer moved out. Double-click on the invoice sum total to display the print
                   document.
                   Choose the End contact button.

   1-2       From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
             Choose Utilities industry → Customer service → Front Office/Customer Interaction
             Center → Customer Interaction Center.
             Identify the customer.
             1-2-1 Choose the action Enter customer meter reading. Enter the meter reading
                   results for each contract individually and save the entries. (You will have to
                   carry out this process three times).
             1-2-2 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
                    Utilities industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Individual Processing →
                    Individual Simulation → Billing
             1-2-3 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              58
                    Utilities Industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Individual Processing →
                    Individual Bill.

   1-3       Choose Utilities Industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Display Document.
             1-3-1 Choose F4 for help in the Document no. field. Enter your business partner
                   number. You will receive a list of all the billing documents of the customer to
                   choose from.
             1-3-2 The header data of the billing document provides the most important data for
                   billing.
             1-3-3 The Table overview button provides an overview of the billing lines.
             1-3-4 000001          Energy price
                    000004         Rental price
                    IQUANT         Quantities (meter readings)
             1-3-5 The billing quantity is visible in the table overview or in the individual
                   documents.

   1-4
             1-4-1 True, since billing processes the meter reading results and provides prices of
                   valuated quantities for invoicing.
             1-4-2 False. The billing simulation is only a demonstration of how the real billing
                   would be carried out. The billing simulation produces simulation documents
                   that can be used only for invoice simulation purposes.
             1-4-3 False. The billing order results from the creation of the meter reading order.
                   “Billable” status is granted when a billing-relevant meter reading becomes
                   available. Invoice orders are the result of billing.
             1-4-5 True. Contrary to the billing documents, the billing simulation documents can
                   only be processed further by invoicing simulation.
             1-4-6 True.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                             59
                                                                                    Solutions

                     Unit: Billing and invoicing
                     Topic: Invoicing a business partner


   2-1       From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
             Utilities industry → Invoicing → Invoice Processing → Individual Processing →
             Create Bill.
             2-1-1 Activate the indicator for simulation runs and identify your business partner.
                   Enter a reconciliation key (IUT110-##).
             2-1-2 Begin the simulation with all the billing documents.
             2-1-3 After the simulation you can check the log. Choose the Display Document
                   button or go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:
                    Utilities industry → Invoicing → Invoice Processing → Display Print
                    Document.
             2-1-4 Choose the Simulate bill button .

   2-2       Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:
             Utilities Industry → Invoicing → Invoice Processing → Individual Processing →
             Create Bill.
             2-2-1 Identify the business partner. Enter a reconciliation key.
             2-2-2 Once the invoicing has been completed successfully, you can display the log.
             2-2-3 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
                    Choose Utilities industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer
                    Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center.
                    Identify the business partner by entering their number in the Business partner
                    field. Choose Customer overview from the Information call group. Do not
                    leave this display.

   2-3
             2-3-1 Double click on the total amount of the bill. You will automatically branch to
                   the print document display.
             2-3-2 The number of print document lines is displayed under Document overview.
             2-3-3 Go to Header data and view the bill amount.



(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               60
             2-3-4 Choose Document overview.
                    In the Rate field, you can read the various rates used in the calculation. Choose
                    Doc. lines.
                    If necessary, leaf through the various line items with different line categories
                    using F6 or F7 or
             2-3-5 Choose Header data.
                    The Net due date field contains the bill due date.

   2-4
             2-4-1 True. Invoicing processes the meter reading results and the open item
                   accounting data and, using this information, generates the bill and the new
                   budget billing plan.
             2-4-2 False. A contract account can be specified for each account, regardless of
                   whether they are to be billed together with other contracts or separately.
             2-4-3 True.
             2-4-4 False. The posting date, document date or system date may be used as the
                   baseline date for calculating when the bill falls due.
             2-4-5 True.
             2-4-6 True.
             2-4-7 False. Depending on the budget billing procedure, the bill sum total is
                   determined by calculating the statistically posted budget billings or including
                   the outstanding partial bills.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                 61
10
     Billing Master Data



         Contents:

          Billing master data
                    Overview of billing master data
                    Connection to business objects
          Rate structure
                    Rate type and rate category
                    Rates, operands, and schemas
                    Prices
          Rate determination
          Rate allocation



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110    1
10.2
   Billing Master Data: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Explain the function of rate master data:
                              Billing class
                              Operands and operand values
                              Rate type and rate category
                              Prices
                        Define the rate structure:
                              Components of the rate
                              Variant programs in the schema
                              Rate determination
                        Describe rate allocation


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                         2
10.3
   Billing Master Data: Overview


                                                                                  IS-U/CCS as an integrated
                                                                                      component of the
                                                      SD                SD              R/3 enterprise
                       FI                                                   Sales & information system
                                           Sales & Distribution          Distribution
              Financial                                             External
             Accounting
                            Contract
                                                              RateSales ture
                                                                   Struc
                                                                 Systems
                                                                                                 Customer
                                                                                            External
                                                   Billing/                                      information system
                                                  Invoicing   • Link to master data
                                                                                             Sales
                            A/R + A/P
       Plant                (FI-CA)   S TOM E                                               Systems
    Maintenance                        U                      • Rate type, rate categ.            IS-U
                                 C




                                                                                                  components
                                                  R



     & Service                           SAP
                                       Busin ss
                                                              •   Rate definition, prices
    Management                         Bu e
                                          sin
                                                   E



                                         art r
                                        p ne                  •   Operands, schemas
                                 CA
                                 CA




                                                  IC




                   Installation R                       Premise
       MM            services     E        V                        External                      components
             PM/                    & S ER                  •       determination
                                                         entry Rate Premise
             CS                                                      Entry
                                                                   Systems
                                        Device                                                     External systems
       SD                             Management
               CO
                            AM                          GIS,
                                             MM         CAD,
                                                        SCADA
                         Asset Management
                       & Materials Management
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                        IUT110                                              3
10.4
   Billing Master Data: Introduction



                         Billing master data enables you to specify contract
                          billing rules for both residential and non-residential
                          customers and provides the basis for a complete
     SAP Utilities        modeling of rates.
                         The flexible universal structuring of rates allows you
                          to implement new and creative sales and marketing
                          concepts.
                         An open architecture allows you to adapt and
                          succeed in a changing environment.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                 4
10.5
   Billing Master Data: Business Scenario



                        Sales and marketing requirements
                              Description of new products and market segments

                        Utilities industry
                              Specification, checking and release of new contracts

                        Customizing of billing master data
                              Creation of rate category and rate type

                              Definition of rates, prices, and discounts

                              Maintenance of agreed special conditions




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                   5
10.6
   Billing of Utility Services



         Billing of contracts for residential and non-residential
          customers
         Supports billing procedures for international utility
          management, such as periodic, interim and period     -end billing,
          floating backbilling, final billing, budget, average monthly and
          equalized billing, and so on.
         Open to new billing procedures
         Third party billing and cross-company code billing
         Special features: Examples include thermal gas billing, billing
          for external generators and installations without a meter.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                                   6
10.7
    Business Objects: Rate Allocation

                                  Business                                                    Regional
                                   partner                                                    structure


                 FI-CA            Contract
               document           A/R + A/P          Customer
                                                      contact

                 Billing
                document           Contract
                 (utility)          (utility)


                  Point of                                                                   Connection
                                  Installation         Premise
                  delivery                                                                     object


                Device                                  Device                               Equipment
               Category             Device
                                                       location                              Connection
     IS-U
     IS-U
     FI-
     FI-CA
     FI-CA
                                                                       Rate-relevant
    SD, CS, PM
    SD, CS, PM                    Register                              information
    Cross appl.
    Cross appl.
          appl.
         © SAP AG 1999




 The installation, the device, and the register contain information relevant to the rate.
 The installation contains:
       Billing class
       Rate category
 The device contains:
       Rate category
       Fact group
       Price class
 The register also contains:
       Rate category
       Fact group
       Price class




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                7
10.8
    Rate Allocation: Overview


        Contract
       per division
                                                           Installations are classified for billing
                                        Rate
                                                            via the billing class
                                        category
      Installation          Billing                        The rate category influences indirect
                            class                           rate determination
                                                           The rate type and the rate category
                                                            determine the rate used for billing.
                                            Price class
                                      Fact group           The fact group contains values
                            Rate type
                                                            relevant to billing.
          Device
                                                           The price class determines the rental
                                                            price in conjunction with the price
                                                            level.
                                            Price class
                                      Fact group
        Register            Rate type




         © SAP AG 1999




 Billing class
  Classification of installations, for example, for residential customers or non-residential customers.
 Rate category
  Classification of an installation for billing. The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate type to
  determine the rate. In the rate category, you establish the criteria for billing which govern the rates.
  These criteria can, for example, control the period-end billing or calculation of the budget billing.
 Rate type
  You can allocate a rate to registers, devices, a rate category, or an installation using a rate type.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                       8
10.9
     Billing Class I




         Classifies installations within a division, for example
          residential/nonresidential contract.
         Can be valid for several rate categories.
         Used for plausibility checks in scheduling and in the billing
          master data.
         Enables several franchise fee groups to be defined.
         Can be used as a statistical criteria.
         If you change the billing class, you must also change the rate
          category. You do not have to perform a final billing.




          © SAP AG 1999




   The billing class classifies installations for billing.
   The billing class is also used for the following purposes:
     For consistency verifications between the master data and billing master data. For example, you can
       verify that a residential customer's installation has not been allocated to a nonresidential contract.
     As a statistical criteria, for example in the sales statistics.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                     9
10.10
    Rate Category I

           Valid for one division only
           Belongs to a single billing class
           Contains one valid billing schema
           Controls billing - used to determine the rate in conjunction
            with the rate type
           Determines which outsorting checks occur during billing
           Controls floating backbilling and period-end billing for
            nonresidential customers
           Controls advance billing and dynamic period control




         © SAP AG 1999




 The billing class classifies installations for billing. The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate
  type to determine the rate. Examples of rates are:
   Household rate
   Commercial rate
   Commercial rate with demand measurement
   Industrial rate
   Minimal consumption rate
   Basic price rate 1
   Basic price rate 2
   Domestic water
   Reserve wasser
   Water for fire fighting
 Rate determination:
  rate type + rate category = rate




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                    10
10.11
    Rate Category II


                                                 Division

                                                                               Billing Schema
                Dynamic
              Period Control



                                                 Rate
             Billing Class                     Category                           Outsorting
                                                                                   Group
             Advance Billing



                              Notes                              Backbilling/
                                                              Period-End Billing


         © SAP AG 1999




 The rate category contains data that controls the processing of billing data. This includes:
   Billing Schema
   Control of period-end billing and accompanying backbilling
   Outsorting checks
 Any other billing-relevant data is also saved in the rate category. This includes any agreed
  quantities, demand, prices, or flat rates. In the case of flat rate services (such as cable services and street
  lights), no quantities are measured. You must therefore define replacement values that the system can
  use for evaluation (for example number of cable connections or number of street lights with a specific
  connection value).




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                    11
10.12
    Definition of Rate Type



           Used to classify
                     Registers
                     Devices
                     Flat rates
                     Reference values
               for billing
           Examples: peak and off-peak rates for active energy; peak rate
            for reactive energy; peak rate for active power; gas and water
            consumption; flat rate installations
           The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate type to
            determine the rate.



         © SAP AG 1999




 Generally, you enter the rate type in the register. Examples of rate categories are peak and off-peak rates
  for active energy, peak rates for reactive energy, peak rates for active power, as well as gas and water
  consumption.
 In exceptional cases you can allocate the rate type to the following objects:
   Device
       For devices without registers (such as ripple control receivers) you can use the rate type to find
       special rates. Using these, you can calculate a device-based settlement price.
   Facts
       Used to determine rates that cannot be derived from registers.
       Also used to determines rates for flat rate installations without installed devices.
   Reference values
       Used to model street lights, for example




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                  12
10.13
   Business Objects: Rate Structure



                                      The rate forms the basis for the billing
    Rate structure
                                       rule for a device, register, or reference
                           Rate        value (facts).
                                      Individual rate steps apply billing rules,
                                       control account determination and the
                        Rate steps
                                       creation of billing line items, and take
        Operand
                                       into account the franchise fee.
                                      Billing rules have been implemented in
                                       the variant programs.
        Operand           Variant
        category         programs     Operands are the input and output
                                       parameters of the variant programs.
    Technology




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                                      13
10.14
   Rate



          Billing rule for a device, register, or reference value (facts),
           that is, all billing-related steps performed during billing.
          These steps are represented by one or more variant
           programs for which the execution sequence is specified in
           the billing schema.
          The rate can be permissible for one of the following:
                   Register
                   Device
                   Reference value (facts)
          Rate steps affect account determination and the creation of
           billing line items.



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                          14
10.15
   Example: Billing Rule for Electricity


                           Variant pool
                           Variant pool
    QUANTITY
    QUANTITY
                   *
                   FACTOR
                   FACTOR
    Calculates x% of a quantity
    Calculates x% of a quantity
                                          QUANTITY
                                          QUANTITY


    .. .. ..                                                               Variant pool
                                                                           Variant pool

    .. .. ..                                                   ACT_KWH
                                                               ACT_KWH
                                                                        * 0.5
                                                                          0.5      ACT_50%
                                                                                   ACT_50%


                                                               REACT_KWH - ACT_50%
    NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS
    NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS              DEMAND
                                        DEMAND
    Calculates N peak averages
    Calculates N peak averages                                 REACT_KWH ACT_50%       BILL_REACT
                                                                                        BILL_REACT
    DEMAND
    DEMAND
                   *
                 PRICE
                 PRICE       BILLING LINE ITEMS
                              BILLING LINE ITEMS
    Valuates demand with a price
    Valuates demand with a price
                                                                          *
                                                               BILL_REACT UNI 0.06
                                                               BILL_REACT UNI 0.06   BILLING LINE
                                                                                      BILLING LINE
                                                                                     ITEMS
                                                                                      ITEMS

    .. .. ..
    QUANTITY
    QUANTITY       -       QUANTITY
                           QUANTITY
    Difference of two quantities
    Difference of two quantities
                                          QUANTITY
                                          QUANTITY

                                                              Contract text:
                                                              Contract text:
    .. .. ..
                                                              The reactive energy that exceeds 50%
                                                              The reactive energy that exceeds 50%
    .. .. ..                                                  of the active energy is valuated using a
                                                              of the active energy is valuated using a
                                                              separate price.
                                                              separate price.
    QTY
    QTY
               *
              PRICE
               PRICE           BILLING LINE ITEMS
                               BILLING LINE ITEMS
    Valuates energy with a price
    Valuates energy with a price

           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                              15
10.16
     Rate Structure




                                                    Rate




                     Rate step                                                 Fact group



          Elementary calculation and                                     Grouping of individual
          processing step                                                facts allocated to a rate

          © SAP AG 1999




 A rate is a billing rule for a register or a reference value, that is, all billing-related steps executed during
  billing.
 A rate step is represented by one or more variant programs. These are small, independent programs that
  perform elementary calculation steps.
 Several rate fact groups can be allocated to one rate. In this way, if the same rate is used, the operands
  can still be filled with different values.

 A rate step is determined by the variant that is being used.
 Variants are small, independent programs that perform elementary calculation steps.
 Many variants calculate values relevant to billing and therefore generate billing line items. Other
  variants convert values and make the results available to subsequent variants.
 Variants usually have input and output operands which represent the parameters included in the variant.
  These operands belong to a particular operand category.

    In the rate, a combination of variants is used to model the billing rules.
   Example of fact group:
    The rate fact group X contains the rate facts "minimum demand = 20 kW" and "discount rate = 10%".
    This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.



(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                     16
10.17
   Rate Data




                                             Billing class


                        Permissibility                          Register operand




                   Division                     Rate               Validation class




                                                                  Usage type

                                         Minimum time portion
                                              required for
                                             extrapolation


        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                               17
10.18
     Data for the Rate Step




                                                Variant program

                     Billing debit and                                     Fine-tuned control
                        credit sub-                                            of variants
                       transactions                                             (additional
                                                                               parameters)



                  Budget billing
                                                  Rate step                      Franchise fee
                 debit and credit
                                                                                    group
                sub-transactions




                   Indicator for optional                                     Statistical rate
                        billing step
                                                   Input and
                                               output operand(s)



          © SAP AG 1999




   Variants are modules in the rate or in the schema that contain a billing rule.
   A sub-transaction is a key that classifies the line item for account determination and/or the way
    application-specific programs are processed. Main transactions are broken down into sub-transactions.
   Indicator for optional billing step: schema steps can only be executed in billing if all input operands are
    provided with values for the entire period that the step covers. If this is not the case, the optional
    indicator is checked:
          If the indicator is not set, billing of the contract is terminated.
          If the indicator is set, the schema step is not executed. Processing then continues with the next
          schema step.
   Input and output operand: symbolic name defined by the company for the allocated values that are used
    as input and output parameters for variant programs.
   Statistical rate: you must specify a statistical rate for all rate steps that generate billing line items. During
    billing, the statistical rate is written to the billing line item. This rate key can be used for statistical
    analyses of billing documents.
   Franchise fee group: company's own grouping of business partners subject to the same franchise fee
    conditions such as major customers or household customers.
   Fine-tuned control of variants: some variant programs require additional input parameters to define the
    action of the variant programs. Example: according to settings, a variant that subtracts two values can
    also create negative differences or suppress them.


(C) SAP AG                                             IUT110                                                     18
(C) SAP AG   IUT110   19
10.19
     Structure of the Fact Group




               Fact group


                                                Operands


                                                                                  Operand
                                                                                   values




          © SAP AG 1999




   A fact group is the grouping of individual facts allocated to a rate.
   Facts are:
         Specific values, for example, 100 kW, or
         Keys, for example for prices that are allocated to operands and are valid for a particular period.
   Operands are allocated to the fact group.
   Operands manage the operand values.
   The operand values represent the historically managed characteristics of the operands.
   Example of a fact group:
    The rate fact group X contains the following rate facts:
         minimum demand = 20 kW
         discount rate = 10%
    This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                   20
10.20
     Operand Data



                                           Determination of the
                                             demand peaks

                          Operand
                          category                                      Weighting key




                     Division                 Operands                     Access control




                   Unit of measurement                               History management


                                              Rounding rules




          © SAP AG 1999




   The operand category classifies the operands for the variant programs.
   Rounding rules consist of:
     The place to which rounding is performed.
         If you specify a positive value, rounding is performed to that number of places after the decimal
         point.
         If you specify a negative value, rounding is performed to that number of places before the decimal
         point.
     The rounding type (the principle used to round):
      + for rounding up
      - for rounding down
      0 for rounding to the nearest whole number




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                 21
10.21
    Operand Categories/Examples




           Operand category           Description
           AMOUNT                     Amount
           DEMAND                     Services (general)
           FACTOR                     Number with decimal places
           QUANT                      Quantity (general)
           QPRICE                     Quantity-based price
           REFVALUE                   Reference value
           SEASON                     Season
           TPRICE                     Time-based price



        © SAP AG 1999




 Operands link values to be billed and variant programs.
 An operand is allocated to an operand category and a division. Operand categories determine the
  functions of the operands The variant program determines which operand categories can be used as input
  and output operands.
 The system contains 20 different operand categories.
 The operand categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                                22
10.22
     Rate Determination - Operands




        Operand                            Operands                      Operand values
        categories


        • Predefined                          • Determined                 • Provide operands
                                                individually                 with values
        • Control processing
          via variant programs                • Serve as the               • Define actual
                                                parameters for               values
                                                variant programs




          © SAP AG 1999




   In the following objects, you can allocate values to the operands:
     rate facts
     Rate category facts
     Installation facts
     Dynamic determination at billing runtime




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                      23
10.23
     Allocation of Operand Values




                                                   Installation                                Price A
                                                        facts                                   0.55
             Hierarchy



                                            Have               precedence over

                                                                                               Price B
                                                 Rate category                                  0.60
                                                     facts

                                             Have              precedence over

                                                                                               Price C
                                  Rate facts and rate fact group
                                                           group                                0.70




          © SAP AG 1999




   Operand values are usually stored in the rate facts and are, therefore, valid at rate level. You can also
    define specifications for all rates in the rate category facts and the installation facts. These specifications
    have preference over the rate facts.
   At rate level or rate-category-fact level, you can enter a replacement value instead of a fixed operand
    value (mandatory/optional entries are required at sub-ordinate levels). With these replacement values,
    flexible allocation of operand values is possible.
   You can also historically override operand values. In this way, a different price key can be allocated to a
    certain installation for only a certain period of time, for example, a month. In the other months, the
    values from the rate facts are used.
   If no operand value can be determined during billing, billing is aborted and the error is reported in the
    billing log. Exception: the rate step is marked in the rate as an optional rate step.
   You define general operand values that are valid for a larger group of customers in the rate and rate
    category facts, and you store individual values at the installation fact level (for example, installed
    demand, connection loads, ordered demand, number of persons, floor area).




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                    24
10.24
     Schema 1



                                            Valid for a particular division
                                            Valid for a specific billing class
                                            Contains one or more rates
                                            Establishes the sequence of the billing
                                             rate steps
                                            Indicator can be set for:
                                                    Billing line item relevant to posting
                                                    Billing line item relevant to statistics




          © SAP AG 1999




   A schema is a structure that defines the sequence in which variant programs of the rates to be billed are
    executed.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                 25
10.25
   Schema 2



                         Dependent on the rate category in the
                          installation
                         Influences sorting of the billing line
                          items on the bill form
                         Controls the grouping of billing line
                          items




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                    IUT110                               26
10.26
     Price Categories



         Quantity-based price
          for quantities and consumption
         Flat rate
          fixed amounts per unit of time
          (consumption flat rates and flat-rate amounts)
         Settlement price
          for the use of a measuring device over a certain
          period of time
         Time-based price
          for demand and connection values




          © SAP AG 1999




   The price categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed.
   The price categories are used internally to control data processing. Normally, you create the prices based
    on the rate. In this case, the correct rate is proposed by the system.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                  27
10.27
    Price Types



           Normal price
            Price that is not based on the quantity
           Block price
            One or more prices that are based on the
            quantity
           Scale price
            Price that is based on the quantity




         © SAP AG 1999




 The price type specifies how the particular price is to be used.
 In addition to standard single prices, you can also use scale and block prices.
 Certain sequential quantity ranges (for demand and/or energy) are defined by price scaling. If one
  quantity range is exceeded, the price for the next quantity range applies for the entire quantity. In this
  way, higher consumption can be cheaper than lower consumption.
 Certain sequential quantity areas (for demand and/or energy) are defined by price blocking for which
  certain prices apply, in other words different prices are used. This prevents higher consumption from
  being cheaper than lower consumption.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                     28
10.28
    Rate Determination




                                                                             Rate
                                                                             Rate
                     Rate type
                     Rate type                                             category
                                                                           category




       Allocates                            Household rate
                                              W ater, ...
       A particular rate category and         ....
       rate type for a particular period                       3.50
                                                1 m3 water . . 4,00
                                                 Monthly rent
       to a rate.                               ....




         © SAP AG 1999




 The rate is determined dynamically (at runtime) from the rate type of the register and the rate category of
  the installation.
 Rate determination is managed historically.
 This has the advantage that rate changes can be performed easily. You are then not required to change
  the rate types and rate categories in the master data. Instead, a new rate is determined starting at a new
  from-date.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                 29
10.29
   Rate Structure


      Data relating to
                                                                Rate data                    Procedure data
      customer and
       installation                                                                                Schema 1
                                                               Prices and                Rate       Var.pr. Values E
             Contract                                          rate facts                Rate 1                         X
                                                                                         1          VarProg. A     x1   E
                                                                                         2          VarProg. B     x2
                                                                                            .           .         .     C
                                                                                         Rate 2
                                                                                                                        U
                                                                                         1         VarProg. A    x3
                           Ra                                   Rate 1                   2         VarProg. C    x4     T
          Installation    ca te                  Rate                                    3         VarProg. D    x5     I
                            te
                               go                                                            .         .         .
                                 ry              deter-                                      .         .         .      O
                                                mination                                     .
                                                                                             .
                                                                                                       .
                                                                                                       .
                                                                                                                 .
                                                                                                                  .
                                                                                                                        N
          Inst. structure
           Inst. structure                 pe                        Rate n
                                         ty                                               Rate n
                                 t   e
          Rate cat. facts/
          Rate cat. facts/    Ra
                                                                                         1          VarProg. A   xxx

        Installation facts
         Installation facts




                                                 Q n itt
                                                   uant y          cu ion
                                                               Execut t        a a ion
                                                                              V lid t
                  aa
                 Dt                                                                                ne t
                                                                                                 Ge ra ion
                 n ry
                 et                             conve rsion         ria
                                                               of va nt           of
                                                               p ra s
                                                                rog m                                 illin
                                                                                                  of b g
                  n
                 ad                                 and                          illin
                                                                               b g
                aa
                n lysis                                       a      ing o
                                                               ccord t                              e e s
                                                                                                 lin it m
                                                  rora ion
                                                 p t                              sult
                                                                               re s
                                                                    e a
                                                                sch m
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                     IUT110                                                       30
10.30
   Discounts / Surcharges



          The discount category defines a discount or surcharge.

          The discount type determines the calculation of:

                    Absolute values

                    Relative values

          The reference defines how the discount is applied:

                    Quantity

                    Price

                    Amount




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                       31
10.31
   Billing Master Data: Unit Summary



                         Billing master data is classified by:
                               Billing class
                               Rate
                                category
                               Rate type
                         The rate consists of:
                               Variants, which are provided with operands
                               A schema, which determines the processing sequence
                                of the variants
                               Prices, discounts, and surcharges
                         Indirect rate determination
                               Reduced maintenance of data in the case of rate
                                changes
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                               32
10.32Exercises: Billing Master Data

                     Unit: Billing master data
                     Topic: Rate structure

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Describe the elements and the structure of a rate.
                        • Carry out a price change for a particular key date.
                        • Adjust the budget billing amount to the business partner.


                     Provide information to customers on rates and price calculations.




   1-1       Which rate category is defined for the customer installations of business partner
             TB110110##?
             1-1-1 Electricity
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

             1-1-2 Water
                   ______________________________________________________
                   ______________________________________________________


             1-2    Which devices and registers are billed to the business partner? Enter the device
                    and register numbers.
             1-2-1 Electricity
                   ______________________________________________________

             1-2-2 Water
                   ______________________________________________________


   1-3       Which rate types are assigned at device and register level to the business partner for the
             divisions below?


(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                              33
             1-3-1 Electricity

                    Device level:    _________________________________________

                    Register level: ________________________________________

             1-3-2 Water

                    Device level:    _________________________________________

                    Register level: ________________________________________


             1-4    Determine the rate for the rate category from task 1-1 and the rate types from
                    task 1-3.

                     Rate
              Division                         Rate type         Rate determined
                             category
     Electricity

     Electricity

     Water



   1-5       Provide information on the electricity rate E1_1.
             1-5-1 Where is the rate permissible?
                   __________________________________________________

             1-5-2 The rate is composed of which components?
                   Name the variant program and describe its functions.
                   ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________

                    ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               34
             1-5-3 Which operands belong to the rate fact group? What do they mean?
                   ______________________________________________________

                   ______________________________________________________

                   ______________________________________________________

             1-5-4 What is the energy price?
                   ______________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                   35
10.33Billing Master Data Solutions

                      Unit: Billing master data
                      Topic: Rate structure


   1-1       Identify and display the data of business partner TB110110## in the CIC.
             From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:
             Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center
             → Customer Interaction Center
             Go to Info and choose Customer overview. The rate category can be found at the
             bottom of the screen.
             Alternatively, you can double-click the installation(s) in the navigation area.

   1-2       Display (from the customer environment, for example) the individual utility
             installations for a business partner (by double-clicking). Then: Devices.

   1-3       Display (from the customer environment, for example) the individual utility
             installations for a business partner (by double-clicking). Then: Billing view.
             You can find the rate types for the devices under Rate types.

   1-4       You can find rate determination in the Implementation Guide (IMG):


               Division            Rate         Rate type              Rate determined
                                 category
              Electricity           E1          1001                   E1_1

              Electricity           E1          1002                   E1_2

              Water                 W1          3001                   W1_1




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                        36
   1-5       You can find the rates under Rates.
             1-5-1 This information is located under Permissibility.
             1-5-2 Choose Rate steps For a description of the variants, choose Environment →
                   Variant documentation.
             1-5-3 To do this, click on Facts in the Display Rate screen.
                   You are now looking at the operands. You can display the operand values by
                   pressing Expand.

                    You can use the color legend here. To do this, choose Utilities → Color legend.
             1-5-4 Double-click on the operand values. For block and scale prices, you need to
                   double-click again on the price.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                            37
11
     Real-Time-Pricing



        Contents:

         Overview
         RTP interface
         Components of the RTP interface




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                        IUT110    1
11.2
   Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the Real-Time-Pricing interface and its
                         components
                        Explain the connection of the RTP interface to IS-U
                         billing




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                              2
11.3
   Real-Time-Pricing:Business Scenario



                        Values determined by automated meter reading for
                         an interval meter should be billed in the system




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                             3
11.4
   RTP Overview



                                                                                     Customer/


          Download
                         AMR
                                                   IS-U/                              Contract
                                                                                       data




    Interval
               Signal
                        system
                                                   CCS                                Device
                                                                                      manage-
                                                                                       ment
     meter


                EDM                 Point of delivery
                                     (EDIS indicator)   Load shape
                                                                     RTP interface   Invoicing


                                                                                      Contract
                                                                                     accounts
   System                                                                            receivable
                                                                                     & payable
                        EDI / XML
                                                                        Billing
                    MSCONS                                                           Scheduling



                                                                                        Other
                                                                                       modules




         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                               IUT110                                   4
11.5
   RTP interface



         Allows time series, such as load shapes, to be billed
         Takes the load shape data directly from IS-U-EDM
         Is fully integrated with IS-U-Billing
         Allows flexible modeling of special customer and major
          customer billing using interval measurement
         Is easily extendable (customer-specific formulas and result
          functions)




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                            5
11.6
   RTP-Billing



         Period-related billing
                  Time-of-day blocks (on/off-peak rates)
                  Day blocks (week day/weekend day)
                  Season blocks (summer/winter)
         Use of a spot price or an index price
         Determination of demand values (highest demand, for
          example)
         Inclusion of other profiles for billing
         Determination of consumption blocks




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110              6
11.7
   Example



   E01 load shape: quantity




                                                                          A03 over limit 2: quantity

           E03 limit 2: quantity


                                                        A02 over limit 1: quantity                     A04 over limit 1: demand



           E02 limit 1: quantity


                                   A01 up to limit 1: quantity




         © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                               IUT110                                                   7
11.8
     Data Model for Billing

                           Individual RTP
                            Individual RTP
                              interface
                               interface

                                 PI


                                                                                         RTP interface
                                                                                          RTP interface
                                    Rate
                                     Rate
                                  category
                                   category                                              P1
           Installation
            Installation                     Rate
                                              Rate              Rates
                                                                 Rates
                                         determination
                                          determination        VarProg.
                                                                VarProg.

                                                                                         ...
       Installation
        Installation                                                                             P2
       structure
        structure
                                                                                                      P12
       Logical register
        Logical register          Rate type
                                   Rate type

                                                                   Billing Schema
                                                                    Billing Schema
             Profile
                                                       Rate 1              VarProg.           Operand values
                                                          Step 1    Example: quantity x price 1000kWh, 0.25 UNI
                                                          Step 2   Comparison of two demands 400kW, 300kW

                                                       Rate n
                                                          Step 1

          © SAP AG 1999




   The billing master data to be processed and its connections is shown above.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                         8
11.9
   Interface




                  Components      In         Formula                  Out      Components    Result

    Season
    Weekday            x1 = Pc1                                                 y1 -> e1    e1 <sum>
                       x3 = Pr1   x1         y1 = min( x1, x2 )       y1        y3 -> e2
    Billing period
                                                                                            e2 <sum>


                       x1 = Pc1                                                 y1 -> e3    e3 <sum>
                       x3 = Pr1   x2         y2 = max( 0, x1 - x2 )   y2        y3 -> e4


                                                                                            e4 <sum>

                       x2 = Pf2   x3         y3 = y2 * x3             y3        y2 -> e5
                                                                                            e5 <sum>



                                                                                            < value >
                                  p   r o f il e                      p r o f il e




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                             IUT110                                           9
11.10
   Input Parameters

    Components

             Summer
                        Weekend
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak

                        Workday
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak

             Winter
                        Weekend
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak

                        Workday
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak
                                         x1
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110   10
11.11
   Calculation


        Formula definition

                              In   Formula Profile          Out



                              x1   y1 = min( x1, x2 )       y1
                                                                  Profile
                    Profile



                              x2   y2 = max( 0, x1 - x2 )   y2
                    Profile                                       Profile




                              x3   y3 = y2 * x3             y3
                    Profile                                       Profile




                                   Function modules

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                         11
11.12
   Result


    Components                           y1
             Summer
                        Weekend
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak

                        Workday
                              On-peak
                                                            e1
                              Off-peak

             Winter                                         e2
                        Weekend
                              On-peak

                              Off-peak

                        Workday
                                                  Result   Function   Op. Cat.
                              On-peak             e1       sum        QUANT
                                                  e2       average    DEMAND
                              Off-peak            e3       peak       DEMAND



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                             12
11.13
   Transfer of Results to RTP Operand


                          y1



                                                  result             function    Op. Cat.
                                                  e1                 sum         QUANT
                                                  e2                 average     DEMAND
                                                  e3                 peak        DEMAND




                            IS-U billing schema:
                             IS-U billing schema:
                    Rate: ON_OFF_PEAK
                    RegOperand
                    RTP-Interface   ON_OFF_PEAK
                    001             ....
                    ...             ...

                    007             QUANTI01      ONPEAKCON    ...              Pricing for ON Peak consumption
                    008             QUANTI01      OFFPEAKCON   ...              Pricing for OFF Peak consumption
                    ...             ...




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                           IUT110                                        13
11.14
   Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Summary



                         The Real-Time-Pricing interface is fully integrated
                          with the IS-U billing procedure
                         It links energy data management (profile
                          management) to the IS-U billing functionality
                         You can use the RTP interface to flexibly establish
                          certain billing regulations (billing of interval meters
                          with special price agreements, for example)




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                   14
12
     Budget Billings



        Contents:

         Budget billing procedure
         Determination and requirements of budget
          billing




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110          1
12.2
   Budget Billing: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Explain the difference between a budget billing plan
                         and a payment plan
                        Create and change budget billing plans




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                               2
12.3
   Budget Billing: Business Scenario



                        A customer's consumption pattern has changed.

                        After adjusting the period consumption, you
                         recalculate the budget billing plan.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                          3
12.4
   Budget Billing Procedure: Overview




                                             Budget billing
                                              procedure


    Budget billing                                            Payment plan
                                                   IS-
                                                   IS-U
       A down payment, which is                                Monthly bills for an agreed
       determined from the bill sum total                      amount (fixed or variable), and
       and is recalculated for the next                        settlement at the end of the
       period.                                                 period

    Budget billing categories                                 Payment plan categories
          statistical posting with                               fixed amounts
           budget billing requirements                             Budget Billing Plan
          actual debit entry with partial                        variable amounts
           bill                                                    Average Monthly Plan




           © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                         4
12.5
   Payment Plan Categories



         Budget Billing Plan
             An average amount is determined manually or by simulation. The
             customer pays this amount for a specified period.At the end of this
             period, simulation occurs again for the next period.In addition, actual
             billing occurs monthly. The results of this billing are shown onthe bill
             and settled in the last month of the billing period.


         Average Monthly Billing Plan /Equalized Billing Plan
             In Average Monthly Billing/Equalized Billing, the customer is charged
             an average amount based on billings over the next 12 months (orless
             in the case of new customers). In addition, actual billing occurs
             monthly, and the results are shown on the bill.The amounts due for
             later months are calculated using the average of the previous mo  nths
             plus the current bill and the accumulated difference.



       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                        5
12.6
   Budget Billing Plan: Overview


                                            Settlement
                                                     Printout   Amount
                           Budget billing
                                                                limits
                           cycle
                                            Budget billing               Minimum
                       Due date                                          charge
                       determination            plan
                                                                 Amount
                              Manual calculation                 rounding
                                        Automatic     Amount adjustment
                                        determination factor


             Grouping of budget billings from one billing period
             Allocation of budget billings to individual contracts
             Display of the accumulated and individual budget billing
             amounts
             Display of the open budget billing amounts
             Automatic and manual determination of the budget billing
             amount
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                           6
12.7
     Creating / Adjusting Budget Billing Plans



            Business processes
                     For move-in
                     For periodic billing            Extrapolation            Due date

                     For invoicing               Budget billing plan          Grouping of contracts
            Amount determination                                              Amount check
                     Manual calculation
                     Automatic extrapolation
            Due date of budget billing amounts
                     Terms of payment from the contract account




          © SAP AG 1999




   Utility companies often only bill for their services at the end of a supply period (during annual
    consumption billing, for example) Therefore, to maintain liquidity during the current period, budget
    billings are billed by anticipating the total amount owed by the customer. The budget billing plan defines
    the dates and size of the budget billings and forms the basis for increases in budget billings.
   Budget billing plans are normally created automatically (during invoicing or move-in, for example).
    However, they can also be created manually.
   Contracts that must be invoiced together are assigned a joint budget billing plan. All other contracts
    belonging to the contract account can have an individual budget billing plan.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   7
12.8
    Quantity-Based Extrapolation

                                                Actual                                                    Next scheduled
                                                meter reading                                             meter reading date
       2000
       2000                                                                                               from scheduling

     11/01   ....   ....   ....   ....   ....   ....   08/01

              Billing period
                                                                2001
                                                                2001

                                                               09/01   ....   ....   ....   ....   ....     ....   14/01

                                                                        Budget billing period

                                                               Extrapolation of consumption using
                                                               configured weighting procedure;
                                                               Billing simulation for this period




                                          Distribution of total simulated amount
                                          Distribution of total simulated amount
                                            over the budget billing due dates
                                             over the budget billing due dates
         © SAP AG 1999




 Billing calculates the consumption up until the next scheduled meter reading date. Simulated billing is
  carried out for the budget billing period. The budget billing items created in this way are transferred to
  invoicing in the billing document. Invoicing accepts these amounts and distributes them to the individual
  budget billing due dates.
 When billing, schedule records must already be generated for the next billing period.




(C) SAP AG                                                     IUT110                                                          8
12.9
     Budget Billing Amounts Due


                                                  Process budget
                                                  billing amounts

                                                 Due date determination
                                                  using terms of payment
                                                 Scheduling using the
                                                  portion


     Budget billing request                                                      Creation of partial bills
                                                           IS-
                                                           IS-U
        Generation of statistical posting                                          Generation of debit-entry partial
        documents that are calculated                                              bills that are calculated as down
        as down payments towards the                                               payments against the bill sum
        bill sum total owed.                                                       total owed.
                                            Statistical            Actual
                                            posting                debit-entry
     FI-CA posting                                                               FI-CA posting
           Statistical posting document                                              Actual debit-entry
           Items per contract                                                        Items per contract
           Repetition items for each                                                 Documents only in customer
            budget billing amount due                                                  account when receivable
            date.                                                                     Sales tax posting on
           Sales tax posting on payments                                              receivables
            © SAP AG 1999




   The scheduled budget billing dates are determined from the portion valid for the contract and the
    parameter record. The following details are defined:
     Length of the budget billing period (several months or one year)
     Budget billing cycle, meaning that the scheduled dates are at regular intervals over the period (monthly
       or every few months).
   The specifications for the portion can be overridden in the budget billing plan or in the contract. Whilst
    changes in the budget billing plan take effect immediately, entries in the contract only become effective
    the next time a budget billing plan is produced.
   The budget billling due date results from the budget billling dates and the terms of payment in the
    contract account.
   When requesting budget billings, a debit entry can be generated in Contract Accounts Receivable and
    Payable or a statistical posting (budget billings that do not affect the general ledger) can be carried out.




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                                       9
12.10
   Budget Billings: Summary



                        You are now able to:

                         Explain the difference between a budget billing
                          plan and a payment plan
                         Create and change budget billing plans




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                           10
13
     Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable


        Contents:

         Overview
         Documents
                  Structure
                  Use
         Posting documents
         Account display
         Payments
         Returns
         Dunning
         Deferral and installment plan

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110      1
13.2
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Unit
   Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe the document structure in contract
                         accounts receivable and payable.
                        Provide information on customer accounts.
                        Explain some common business transactions in
                         Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable and
                         perform them in the system.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                             2
13.3
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Overview

                                                                                     IS-U/CCS as an integrated
                                                           SD                            component of the
                            FI                                                             R/3 enterprise
                                    FI          Sales & Distribution                    information system
                   Financial                                           External
                  Accounting                                            Sales
                                 Contract                              Systems                 Customer
                                                       Billing/
                 FinancialA/R + A/P     Invoicing                                              information system
                                    TOM
               Accounting-CA) U S
       Plant Maintenance  (FI-
                          (FI           E
          & Service
                                      C



                                             Ce t l
                                               n ra    R
                                                       R                                       Components
         Management
                                            Bu e
                                              sin ss   E
                                                                           AM                  of IS-U
                                              a nr
                                             p rt e
                                      CA




                                                       IC

             MM                      Contract
                        Installation R                       Premise
                                       A




                          services     E     V                            External             Standard R/3
                  PM/                      R& SE              entry       Premise
                                                                                               Components
                  SM                     A/R + A/P                         Entry
                                                                           Entry
                                                                          Systems
             SD                          (FI-CA)
                                            Device
                                          Management                                           External systems
                       CO

                                 AM                          GIS,
                                                  MM         CAD,
                                                             SCADA
                            Asset Management &
                            Materials Management


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                  IUT110                                                  3
13.4
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Business Scenario



                        Post request for energy consulting

                        Display account balance

                        Payment by check for account balance

                        The check was not covered:
                         Return with charge

                        Dunning proposal for contract account, followed
                         by dunning

                        Arrangement of installment plan




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                            4
13.5
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
   and FI-CA



                                                           -
         Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the FI CA
          component:
          (Financial Accounting:
          Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)
         FI-CA is designed as a sub-ledger for customer processing.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110                              5
13.6
     FI-CA Has An Open Architecture




                          IS-U                IS-T


                                 FI-CA                                    Data exchange

                                                                             Open items
                      IS-IS/CD              Other                            Posting information

                                                                             Information
                                                                             Business processes
                                                                             Workflows




          © SAP AG 1999




   IS-IS-CD: Industry Specific Component - Insurance: collections/disbursements
   IS-T: Industry Specific Component - Telecommunications




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                            6
13.7
   Special Features of FI-CA


         Suitable for a large number of contract accounts and
          documents:
                  Optimal use of storage space by means of a special document
                   structure.
                  Parallel processing of mass runs (such as payment run, dunning
                   run).
                  Summarization of general ledger information (summary
                   records).
         Processing of business transactions convenient for clerks.
         Documents are assigned to business partner accounts and
          contract accounts (and depending on the industry, they are
          also assigned to contracts).
         Standard processes (such as posting or paying) can be
          changed without making any modifications.

       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                   7
13.8
   Central Objects in FI-CA


                    Business partner
                           Contains central data, such as names, addresses,
                            communication data and bank details.
                           Represents a natural or legal person with whom
                            business relationships can be conducted.
       Account
                    Contract account
                           Contains control data, such as payment methods,
                            terms of payment and dunning procedures.
                           Object, for which open item accounting is managed in
                            Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                                                                                             IS-CA
                           Usually represents a group of contracts                 BP

                            (industry sector).
                                                                          Account        Account

                    Contract (industry-specific)
                                                                      Contract Contract Contract
                    Document items                                                           IS-U
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                                  8
13.9
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Business Transactions



                Document
                                Payment posting
                                Payment posting     Incoming payments
                                                    Incoming payments
                 posting


               Account
                Account
                                Document reversal
                                Document reversal        Interest
              maintenance
              maintenance


                                                        Returns
                                                         Returns
             Account analysis
             Account analysis       Dunning
                                    Dunning            processing
                                                       processing



             Installment plan
             Installment plan       Deferral
                                    Deferral        Irrecoverable debt
                                                    Irrecoverable debt


       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                             9
13.10
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Posting Documents



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   10
13.11
   Posting Documents: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:


                         Explain the document structure in contract
                          accounts receivable and payable.
                         Post receivables items.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                              11
13.12
   Posting Documents: Introduction



                         If business processes are not integrated with IS-U
                          or SD, or automatically connected to Contract
                          Accounts Receivable and Payable by an interface,
      SAP Utilities       individual postings can be inserted into the system
                          as manual documents.
                         Examples include rent receivables, lease
                          receivables as well as receivables for an energy
                          consultant.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                               12
13.13
   Posting Documents: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account,
                          followed by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                   13
13.14
     Documents in Contract Accounts Receivable
     and Payable




                                                 Document




                 Business
                  partner                                                      G/L account item
                   item




          © SAP AG 1999




   The basis for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the document with:
     Document header
       This contains the data that is valid for all line items, such as document date, posting date,
       reconciliation key.
     Business partner items (receivables lines or reconciliation lines)
       These contain all data relevant for payment transactions or dunning and the receivables account or
       reconciliation account which is debited or credited.

     G/L account item (revenue lines)
       This contains the data for the profit and loss statement, as well as data for sales tax.




(C) SAP AG                                            IUT110                                                14
13.15
    General Document Data



             General
             • Document date
             • Document type
             • Document number




                                         Document




             General data
        © SAP AG 1999




 The document date indicates the issue date of the original document.
 Document types
   Distinguish between business transactions
   Control document storage using the number range allocated. The document number is determined
     during posting by the number range.
   Are valid for a single client
   Examples of document types are: AB Miscellaneous document, GB Fees, FA Invoicing.
 Document number
   Key, which identifies the document in the contract account receivable and payable for each client.
   Depending on the type of number assignment, the document number is assigned automatically by the
     system when the document is posted, or is entered by the user when a document is created.
   The type of number assignment is decided by the document type entered in the document header. You
     specify:
       A number range from which the document number is chosen.
       Whether the number is entered automatically or manually.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               15
13.16
    Document Data: Reference and Currency



             General
             • Document date
             • Document type
             • Document number



      Reference and
      currency
      • Reference                       Document
      • Currency
      • Conversion rules




             General data
        © SAP AG 1999




 The reference document number can contain the document number for the business partner. This field
  can also be filled with other data.
  The reference document number is used as a search criterion for document display or change. In
  correspondence, the reference document number is sometimes printed in place of the document number.
  Enter the number specified by the partner. If the document was generated in your company and a
  document number is not known for the partner, it is possible to copy the document number in the
  reference number field by entering "*".
 The transaction currency is the key of the currency, in which the document is (or was) posted.
 Exchange rate
  Exchange rate used for the conversion between the transaction currency and the local currency. The
  exchange rate is saved at the item level.
  The exchange rate that is entered is proposed in the document items during entry of a document
  (possible entries).
  The exchange rate field can only be used by clerks who enter documents for company codes with the
  same local currency. This local currency must be recorded in the user settings.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                              16
13.17
    Document Data: Link to General Ledger
    Accounting


             General
             • Document date
             • Document type
             • Document number



      Reference and
      currency
      • Reference                          Document
      • Currency
      • Conversion rules



              General ledger
              • Posting date
              • Reconciliation key
              • Single document


             General data
        © SAP AG 1999




 Posting date: The date on which the document was posted in Contract Accounts Receivable and
  Payable. The posting date may be different to the entry date (date of entry in the system) and the
  document date (date on which the original document was created).
 Reconciliation key for G/L accounting: Key, in which the summary records of Contract Accounts
  Receivable and Payable are written for transfer to downstream accounting.
  The key is entered as an external reference in the document header field "reference key" during transfer
  of the summary records to SAP R/3 general ledger accounting. This means that itemization of the totals
  posted in the general ledger is possible.
  You must assign the key for manual postings. For mass processing, the key is assigned by the program
  that executes processing (such as a payment run).
 Document items belonging to one summary record are summarized. If you do not want a summary, you
  can select single document or single item in the corresponding field for each document. This document
  is saved in the G/L document as a single document item.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                17
13.18
    Document Data: Entry Control



             General
             • Document date
             • Document type
             • Document number



       Reference and                                                    • Entry variants
       currency                                                         • Calculate taxes
       • Reference                          Document                    • Jurisdiction code
       • Currency                                                       • Company code
       • Conversion rules                                               • Clearing reason
                                                                        • Screen variants


               General ledger
               • Posting date
               • Reconciliation key
               • Single document


              General data                                  Entry control
         © SAP AG 1999




 The entry variant controls which fields are to be hidden for posting, changing, and displaying a
  document. This allows you to customize screens for the business transaction (such as a down payment).
 The calculation of taxes means that the system automatically calculates taxes using the specifications in
  the business partner items during simulation or posting. If you do not set the indicator, you have to enter
  the tax lines separately.
 Default value for company code
   Where no company code is entered, the default company code is added to each document line item.
     The company code is an entry aid for documents or line items that are to be posted in the same
     company code.
   The user settings allow you to block cross-company code posting. If this setting has been made, users
     must enter a company code.
 The clearing reason is saved in the cleared line items and can be displayed during analysis of the single
  items (such as in the account balance display). If you clear items using the function Post document, you
  must specify a clearing reason here. If you do not enter a clearing reason, the system will ask you to
  enter one before posting the document.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                  18
13.19
    Data on Business Partner Item


                  Business partner             Due dates:
                  Contract account         Net/Cash discount/
                      Contract                  deferral
                                                                             Clearing data

              Company code                    Dunning data/
                Procedure                       Interest
                                               calculation            Set automatically


             Amounts
                                               Payment data                 Additional data
                                                                               -Item text
                                                                              -Grouping
                                                                             -Period key
                                                Repetition
                 Business                     specifications                   Alternative
                  partner                                                      partner for
                   item                                                        payments
                                                Individual
                                                transfer to
                                              general ledger                      Optional specifications
       Mandatory specifications

         © SAP AG 1999




 Item text can be used both internally and externally. To differentiate between these, texts for external
  use must begin with "*". This can then be specified on all correspondence, such as dunning notices and
  payment advice notes. The asterisks are automatically removed when the document is printed.
 A grouping key can be assigned to any document items that should be depicted as one item in lists,
  correspondence and account processing.
  Example: If a customer bill contains items from different divisions, but only one final amount is payable
  by the customer, a summarized list simplifies the allocation of incoming payments.
 The period key can be used, for example, if details about the billing period that the receivable relates to
  are to be included in the correspondence. The required key can be entered as an alternative to saving a
  long text for each item.
  Examples:
   Q195 First quarter 1995
   0195 January 1995
   H195 1.1.1995 - 6.30.1995




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   19
13.20
     Data on G/L Account Item



                                                                            General ledger:
                                                                            Company code,
                                                     Amounts                G/L account
                                                     and tax
                                                     code


                                    Account
                                    assignment for
                                    subsequent
                                    accounting                     G/L account item




          © SAP AG 1999




   Data on G/L account item:
     Value date: Day when values are set.
       The value date indicates the day on which the financial transaction actually took place in financial
       accounts (bank accounts, bank sub-accounts).
        The value date indicates the day on which the financial transaction is expected for payment postings
       that are generated before payment.
       The value date is decisive for representation of the cash management position.
     A planning level is allocated in the document item of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable for
       updating in cash management. The planning level is used for control in cash management.
     The tax transaction determines which type of tax is used. The keys are defined in the system and
       cannot be changed. The transaction key is for documenting the tax type after transfer into R/3 general
       ledger accounting.
       Automatic determination of tax accounts is performed using the transaction key.
       Examples:
          TAX is used for output tax.
          INPUT is used for input tax.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                  20
13.21
     Manual Document Entry: Items




                                                             Receivables / credit memos
           Business partner BP1
           Contract account CA 1                             Automatic determination of
           Amount         UNI 100                             general ledger accounts and
                                                              tax accounts using
                     Business partner BP2                     transactions
                     Contract account CA2                    Classification using
                     Amount        UNI 150
                                                              document type
                                                             Automatic determination of
              Business partner BP3                            due dates using terms of
              Contract account CA3
              Amount        UNI 250
                                                              payment in the contract
                                                              account
                                                             Receivables or credit can be
                                                              cleared immediately


          © SAP AG 1999




   Receivables and credit memos can be entered manually. During posting, a transaction that is defined in
    the system is specified for each business transaction. In this way, the general ledger accounts are
    automatically determined and inserted in the receivables and revenue lines. The same occurs for tax
    accounts.
   Classification of documents occurs with specification of a document type.
   Due dates are determined automatically using the terms of payment in the contract account.
   Receivables and credit memos can also be cleared either immediately or partially.
   Receivables lines can be repeated with different due dates and specification of a start date at monthly or
    daily intervals (for example, for budget billing or installment plans).
   Document line items do not all have to belong to the same business partner.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   21
13.22
     Transactions in Contract Accounts Receivable and
     Payable


                          Transactions explain the business transaction
                           on which the posting of a line item is based.


            A transaction is a combination of main and sub-transactions
            Texts for the transactions explain the business transaction
             and are available for correspondence
            Transactions control IS-U account determination
            Transactions control IS-U determination of value-added tax
            IS-U uses internal main and sub-transactions, which are
             assigned internally by various IS-U business processes. The
             transactions also control these business processes.




          © SAP AG 1999




   Example for:
     Main transaction: periodic billing
     Sub-transaction: receivable from energy charge




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                   22
13.23
     Examples of Transactions




            Main transaction                Sub-transaction

            Billing                         Energy charge receivable
                                            Energy charge credit
                                            Settlement price receivable
                                            Settlement price credit
                                            Service charge receivable
                                            Service charge credit

            Charges                         Statistical dunning charge
                                            Dunning charge
                                            Charge for items in installment plan



          © SAP AG 1999




   Statistical posting simplifies the administration of doubtful receivables (items), as these postings are not
    transferred to the general ledger, and are thus easier to reverse if they are not paid.
    Budget billing receivables are a typical example, as in most cases, there is no bill and the collection of
    payment, if payment is not made, is less likely than in cases where a bill exists. Similarly, tax is only due
    for statistical budget billing receivables, on payment of the budget billing amount thus only when the
    receivables are posted to the general ledger. Dunning charges are another example of charges that tend
    not to be payed.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                                                   23
13.24
     Transfer to General Ledger Accounting



                                  FI-CA documents
                           1. Doc.:  Amount UNI 580
                                     Net       UNI 500
                                     Tax       UNI 80
                           2. Doc.: Amount UNI 116
                                     Net       UNI 100
                                     Tax       UNI 16
                                    Reconciliation key:
                           98126ISU01
     Document
      posting                                                                        FI documents
                                Summary
                                 Record
                                                                                 40 140000      696,--
                          D    140000     UNI 696                                50 800000      600,--
                          C    800000     UNI 600          Generate              50 175001       96,--
                          C    175001     UNI 96           postings              Reference key
                                                                                          98126ISU01
                          Reconciliation key                                     Reference transaction
                                    98126ISU01                                                FKKSU


          © SAP AG 1999




   One use of the reference key is to relocate individual items in the sub-ledger (taken from the general
    ledger).




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                   24
13.25
   Summary Record


          Transfer unit for postings from Contract Accounts Receivable
           and Payable to Financial Accounting.
          Single documents from Contract Accounts Receivable and
           Payable are grouped into summary records if:
                   Summarization was not prevented manually.
                   They have the same reconciliation key.
                   They can be grouped according to G/L accounting and subsequent
                    application criteria.
          Examples for summarization criteria are:
                   Company code and date
                   Debit/credit indicator
                   General ledger account
                   Currency
                   Downstream system criteria

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                  25
13.26
    Posting Documents: Summary (1)



                          The most important data in the document header is:
                                Document number
                                Reconciliation key
                                Posting date
                                Document date
                          The business partner item:
                                Is allocated to a business partner.
                                Contains the amount to be posted.
                                Contains the account assignment for G/L accounting
                                 determined by the transaction.
                          The G/L account item contains information on the
                           corresponding G/L account.


         © SAP AG 1999




 Repetition lines also exist in the document.
  They make it possible to save memory space and are used for representing budget billing plans and
  installment plans. Receivables lines form the basis of repetition lines and can be repeated for different
  due dates. From the clerk's point of view, these lines are irrelevant since they appear in the contract
  account display as normal items and can be processed accordingly.
 A document does not have to contain all of the lines mentioned above. One example of this is a
  normal payment that leads to complete clearing of the affected receivables lines. In this case, only a new
  document header is written for the payment, since the data relevant for the account assignment comes
  from the receivables lines.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                  26
13.27
   Posting Documents: Summary (2)



                         If necessary, documents can be posted manually
                          in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.
                         This is possible for both receivables and credit
                          memos.
                         An item can be entered:
                               Individually
                               In a list




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                        27
13.28
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Account Display



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   28
13.29
   Account Display: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

                         Provide information on the balance and development
                          of a customer account.
                         Provide information on the items of a customer
                          account.
                         Use the navigation options in the item display.
                         Use the "Customer overview" and "Customer
                          account” information processes.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                              29
13.30
   Account Display: Introduction


                         Utility companies often have to deal with large
                          numbers of items due to the large number of
                          customers and budget billing payments.
                         Information on customer accounts is given quickly
      SAP Utilities
                          and comprehensively.
                         Variable displays are provided that can easily be
                          adjusted according to the situation.
                         Different display formats can be used depending on
                          the tasks of the clerk (accounting, dunning, for
                          example)
                         Individual selection of display variants can be
                          defined in the user parameters.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                              30
13.31
   Account Display: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account,
                          followed by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                   31
13.32
   Account Display: Initial Screen



          Business partner, contract account, contract
           Company code, installment plan, collective bill
          List category for restricting the items to be displayed
           according to "status":
           Examples: All open, due, or statistical items.
          User-specific limitations
          List representation defines the line structure
          Any type of sorting is possible




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                             IUT110                        32
13.33
   Account Display: List Category



      The list category determines which items are selected for the
       account display (such as open items or down payment
       requests).
      The list category makes it possible to save frequently used
       selections under one key.
      As an alternative to selecting items using list categories, you
       can select:
                Standard, in order to choose the standard selection
                 (all open, non-statistical items).
                Detail, in order to specifically determine the selection of items.
                                                                      ged
      Even if a list category is used, the selection can still be chan
       using "detail". This change is not saved and is only used for the
       current display.

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                  33
13.34
   Account Display: Line Layout



          Determines which fields of a document are included in the
           account display.

          Different line structure variants can be selected in the
           account display. It is also possible to totalize values using
           particular criteria.

          The same output list can be viewed in a number of ways.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                               34
13.35
     Account Display: Navigating in the Document
     Display




                                                  Header




                             Item                                    G/L
                              list                                  item
                                                                     list
                                                  Overview

                    Detail screen                             Detail screen
                         of                                         of
                     business                                  G/L items
                    partner items


          © SAP AG 1999




   It is possible to return to the header from any screen.




(C) SAP AG                                           IUT110                   35
13.36
   Account Display: Summary (1)



                         Variable item selection
                               All items/open items/cleared items (with/without
                                payments)
                               Statistical items (all/budget billing plan/charges/...)
                               User-specific selection criteria
                                Example: By due dates

                         Variable display
                               "Free" selection of data fields
                               User-defined account display




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                     36
13.37
   Account Display: Summary (2)



                         Immediate access to environment data
                              Document
                              Business partner/contract account/contract
                              Payment use
                              Source receivable(s) for installment plan items
                              Dunning history
                              ...
                         Sort and summary functions within the account
                          display




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                              37
13.38
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Payments



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   38
13.39
   Payment Run: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

                         Explain the processing steps of a payment lot
                         Post payments using a payment lot
                         Post payments via payment at cash desk




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                              39
13.40
   Payment Run: Introduction



                         Utility companies have to deal with large numbers of
                          incoming payments in a reliable efficient manner.

      SAP Utilities
                         Payment flow reaches the utility company in various
                          ways. These include data medium exchange,
                          automatically read documents and other documents.

                         Background and dialog processes are provided for
                          processing payments, depending on the situation.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                 40
13.41
   Payment Run: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account,
                          followed by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                   41
13.42
    Automatic and Manual Payments



       Automatic incoming
                                                                       Payment lot
        payments
       Collection procedure                                           Check lot

       Credit repayment                                               Credit card lot
       Returns                       Automatic            Manual
                                                                       Payment at cash desk

                                                                       Returns lot




         © SAP AG 1999




 Automatic incoming payment:
  Incoming payment data from previous systems, financial institutions, or agencies is processed here. The
  system automatically creates a payment posting for the corresponding business partner. Payments are
  automatically allocated to one or more receivables items. Credit items released for settlement are also
  taken into account.
  If an item cannot be allocated, it is possible to post an account at contract account level. Manual post-
  processing is also possible.
 Collection procedurePayments are handled by collection or direct debit from financial institutes or
  credit card companies and the corresponding output media are created.
 Credit repaymentCredit is automatically repayed by check, bank transfer or postal cash payment order
  and the corresponding output media are created.
 Returns processing
  Automatic returns processing with workflow link is provided for returned payments from financial
  institutions and credit card companies, as well as for returned incoming checks and postal cash payment
  orders that could not be delivered.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                 42
13.43
   Payment Lot



          The payment lot stores data from external payments.
          Payment data is stored in a lot if:
                   It has the same source
                   It is to be processed jointly.
          Data for a group of incoming checks is stored in a payment
           lot. This type of lot is called a check lot.
          Bank transfers and/or debit memos that were received are
           extracted from an account statement and stored in a payment
           lot.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                    43
13.44
     Payment Lot: Structure



                             Data is saved in the payment lot header if:
       Header entry
       Header entry
                                     It applies to the entire lot
                                     It is used as a default value for items




          © SAP AG 1999




   Data that applies to the entire lot:
     Key
     Search term
     Posting date
     Bank clearing account
     Company code for the bank posting
     Reconciliation key for general ledger accounting
     Currency
     Value date




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                       44
13.45
   Payment Lot: Structure



                         Data is saved in the payment lot header if:
     Header entry
     Header entry              It applies to the entire lot:
                               It is used as a default value for items
                         An item is a payment with:
         Item 1
         Item 1                An amount
             Item 2
             Item 2            Specifications for the selection of receivables to be
                                cleared




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                      45
13.46
   Payment Lot: Processing Steps


           New                                                            Payment
         payment             Create         Close           Post            lot
            lot                                                           complete


                                                            Post-
                             Change
                                                         processing


          Payment lot processing includes the following steps:
                   Create
                   Change (optional)
                   Close (deletion and insertion of items is no longer allowed)
                   Post
                   Post-processing (for clarification and errors)
                    Post-processing is necessary if postings were generated in an
                    interim account, or if it was not possible to make any postings.



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                    46
13.47
     Payment Lot: Create


             New                                                                        Payment
           payment             Create              Close              Post                lot
              lot                                                                       complete




            A payment lot can be created:
                     In dialog mode (for example a check lot)
                     By program (for example an incoming bank transfer lot)
            The following is specified:
                     Reconciliation key
                     Header data for the payment lot
                     The document, items, and the clearing of open items




          © SAP AG 1999




   Default values on the header screen:
     The current date is defined
     The last values entered (if available) are inserted automatically for the company code, currency, and
       business area.
     The document type, clearing reason, and the selection categories are recorded in Customizing.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                    47
13.48
    Payment Lot: Create Items


            New                                                                        Payment
          payment             Create              Close               Post               lot
             lot                                                                       complete




           The essential entries are:
                    Amount
                    Payment use via selection category and selection value, which
                     are essential for choosing open items that are cleared by
                     payment.
           Selection categories are one character abbreviations that are
            defined in Customizing.

                    These include:       G for business partner,
                                          K for contract account,
                                          V for contract
         © SAP AG 1999




 Enter one line of data for each payment during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be recorded in
  Customizing. You can change the entry variants using the Screen variant key.
 By pressing the Additional specifications key, you can branch to the detail screen of the selected item.
  You can enter additional data on the payment, if required.
 On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for further
  clarification.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                  48
13.49
   Payment Lot: Change


           New                                               Payment
         payment        Create      Close        Post          lot
            lot                                              complete



                        Change



          Items can be deleted and added as long as the payment lot
           is not closed.
          Data on items that have already been entered can also be
           corrected.
          Interrupted entry of a payment lot can be resumed using
           this function.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                          IUT110                              49
13.50
   Payment Lot: Close


           New                                                Payment
         payment        Create       Close         Post         lot
            lot                                               complete




          Closing a payment lot means that adding or deleting items
           is no longer possible.
          Corrections can still be made on the payment lot items after
           closing.
          Posting cannot begin until a lot is closed.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                              50
13.51
     Payment Lot: Post


            New                                                                      Payment
           payment             Create            Close            Post                 lot
             lot                                                                     complete




            Postings can either be dealt with in dialog mode or in a
             background process (typical for mass data).
            Postings to customer account including payment use with:
                     Clearing of open items and/or
                     Generation of payments on account
            Posting to an interim account if the payment use is unclear
            A check deposit list can be printed for check lots




          © SAP AG 1999




   The following postings are generated in a posting run:
     For a check lot:
       One summary posting for each lot: incoming checks account to clearing account, and one posting for
       clearing account to payment use for each check (in planning). The document number is noted in the
       payment lot header.
     For other lots: One posting of bank sub-account to payment use or interim account. The document
       number is recorded in the associated items in the payment lot.
     The payment use can consist of different components:
          Clearing/partial clearing of open items
          Postings on account
          Expense/revenue (payment difference)
          Generation of new receivables that are cleared immediately (charges, interest)




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                51
13.52
   Automatic Clearing: Process



          Determination of the amount available for clearing
          Determination of the selection criteria for open items
          Open item selection
          Conversion of item currency to clearing currency
          Distribution of clearing amount to open items
          Generation of document items (such as cash discounts,
           charges, down payments) caused by clearing
          Posting of the clearing document and noting the clearing
           information in the items to be cleared




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110                           52
13.53
   Payment Lot: Post-processing


           New                                                 Payment
         payment        Create       Close           Post        lot
            lot                                                complete


                                                    Post-
                                                 processing


         If automatic allocation was not possible:
          Clarification of payment use and transfer from interim
           account to a contract account.
          Correction of payment items (such as selection
           specifications) and restart of postings for selected items.
          Manual posting and clearing for selected items.
          Triggering of repayment if the payment use cannot be
           determined.

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                              53
13.54
    Payment at cash desk
                                        Deutsche Bank
                                  Pay the bearer                                                         Amount
                                                                                                  Currency
                                        - four hundred                                              DM         - 400,-
                                  Am ount in words

                                  ON    Red Cross                                                     New York
                                  Or the holder                                                  City
                                                                                                        1.4.1996
                                                                                                 Date


                                                                                                 Signature
                                              The printed ch eck text must not be alt er ed in an y way.
                            Check no.    X    Account no.           X Am ount               X      Sort code    X Text

                         00000150900              12131400                                                 67291500 11
                                                   Do not write in or stamp this field.




    Business partner
                                                                                                                                             Contract account
    Contract account
                                                                                                                                          Post
                                                                                                                                          Post
    Contract                                                                                                                              directly
    Document number
                                                                                                                                         Post in
                                                                                                                                         Post in
    Net due date
                                                                                                                                       dialog mode
    Payment form no.
                                                                                                                                          Payment
                                                                                                                                          Payment
                                                                                                                                          posting

                    Check                                                                                                         Receipt
                                                                                                                                  You paid 123.45 UNI
                                                                                                                                  You paid 123.45 UNI
                    deposit list                                                                                                  on April 15, 2000.
                                                                                                                                  on April 15, 2000.
         © SAP AG 1999




 Within the cash desk function, payments can be directly allocated to open items for a business partner.
 You can use a payment proposal or assign the payment manually.
 A distinction is made between cash payments and payment by check or credit card.
 A receipt can be printed following the posting.
 If an overpayment is made in cash, the remaining amount is used to decide whether a posting on account
  is to be made or whether this amount is to be paid to the customer.
 The cash journal offers further functionalities. You can display a cash desk structure and functions such
  as deposits, withdrawals, transfers and cash analysis can be carried out.




(C) SAP AG                                                                                                               IUT110                                 54
13.55
    Clearing: Dialog Processing



           Open items are displayed:
                    In a list with one line per item and
                                                                                   n
                     In a control block that displays the status of clearing processi g.
                    The difference between the clearing amount and the allocated
                     amount is decisive here.
                    The allocated amount is the sum of the clearing amounts that is
                     allocated to the individual items.
           The clearing can be posted if the difference:
                    Is zero (green light appears)
                    Is within a predefined tolerance limit (yellow light appears)




         © SAP AG 1999




 Open item processing:
  By double-clicking in the Amount column, inactive items become active and vice versa. As soon as an
  item is active, a value appears in the "Clearing amount” column. The posting amount of the item is
  proposed.
  The clearing amount can be overwritten (partial clearing). By double-clicking in the Clearing amount
  column, the system sets the amount that is necessary to bring the clearing to zero.
  Items can also be set to active and inactive in groups. To do this, select the items in the left column and
  then press the desired key (active or inactive).
 The processing screen can be reconfigured by pressing the Presentation key.
  You can switch between selection mode and command mode. The screen width can be set to 80 or 120
  characters (more detailed information on items). The summarization of items in the display can be
  switched on and off.
  The line structure (information displayed on open items) can be varied.
  Cash discount fields can be displayed or hidden. The posting amount and clearing amount can be
  displayed as net or gross. You can change the currency that is displayed.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   55
13.56
   Payment: Summary



                         Payment can be handled automatically and manually
                          in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.

                         Payments are processed:
                               In payment lots

                               At the cash desk

                         Detailed rules can be defined for automatic item
                          clearing.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                          56
13.57
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Returns



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   57
13.58
   Returns: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

                         Describe the returns process
                         Post a return




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                              58
13.59
   Returns: Introduction



                         Utility companies must deal with a large number of
                          incoming and outgoing payments.
                         A certain percentage of these cannot be successfully
      SAP Utilities       processed because the account is incorrect, closed,
                          or not covered.
                         The additional workload is kept as low as possible
                          by:
                               Reversing payment to the account
                               Passing on charges
                               Triggering of subsequent activities such as
                                correspondence or new move-in




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                             59
13.60
   Returns: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account, followed
                          by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                            60
13.61
     Returns: Influencing Factors




                                                                         Customer
                          Return reason                              creditworthiness
                                                                    and tolerance group




                 Return category                 Returns                  Number of returns




                             History                                   Return amount




          © SAP AG 1999




   Every return category is allocated to a return reason. Return reasons can have the same category. The
    return category determines the accounts used (G/L accounts for returns charges and bank clearing
    account). Examples are check returns and bank returns.
   Bank-specific returns reasons can be allocated to company-specific returns reasons.
 Creditworthiness is calculated via the number of business partner dunnings and returns dependent on the
  creditworthiness weighting according to the following formula:
  Creditworthiness = (number of dunnings + number of returns) * creditworthiness weighting.
  Creditworthiness can also be maintained manually. Manually maintained creditworthiness automatically
  overrides calculated creditworthiness.
 HistoryMaximum number of days that have passed since an event before the event can be included in
  the analysis of the returns history.
 Maximum amount difference
  Maximum difference between the house bank returns amount and the original payment amount that is
  tolerated for automatic charges posting. As long as the difference amount is within the maximum
  amount difference, it is interpreted as a charge by the system and posted accordingly.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                              61
13.62
     Returns: Activity Settings




                                             Correspondence

                          Pass on charges                                Incoming
                          with/without tax                            payment method




                                                                          Payment block
                    Calculate lot
                      charges
                                                Returns                      reasons
                                                                           Deferral days




                            Post charges                              Return amount
                             statistically
                                               Dunning block
                                             - Contract account
                                                   - Items


          © SAP AG 1999




   Pass on bank charges:
    Means that the bank passes on the returns charges to the business partner (accompanying contract
    account). If this is not the case, these charges are paid by the utility company.
   Calculation of lot charge
    Means that the business partner has to pay a surcharge in addition to the bank charges. The amount of
    the lot charge depends on the amount of the returns charge.
   By recording a dunning block reason in the master record of Contract Accounts Receivable and
    Payable or under open items, the items due for dunning or the open items are not dunned when the
    dunning program is executed.
   The new due date for the receivable is calculated using the deferral days according to the following
    formula:
    New due date = document date or return + deferral days
   Recording a payment block reason for open items means that the open items are blocked for automatic
    payment with the payment program.
   Recording a blocking reason for incoming/outgoing payments in the master record of Contract
    Accounts Receivable and Payable prevents debit memos/bank collections/payments from being initiated
    by the payment program.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                               62
13.63
   Returns Lot: Processing Steps


          New                                                              Returns
         returns             Create         Close           Post             lot
           lot                                                            complete


                                                            Post-
                             Change
                                                         processing


          Returns lot processing contains the following steps:
                   Create
                   Change (optional)
                   Close (deletion and insertion of items is no longer allowed)
                   Post
                   Post-processing (for clarification and errors):
                    Post-processing is necessary if postings could not be made.



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                  63
13.64
     Returns Lot: Create


             New                                                                        Returns
            returns            Create              Close              Post                lot
              lot                                                                       complete




            A returns lot can be created:
                     Using a program (such as returns lot with DTAUS)
                     In dialog mode
            The following must be specified:
                     Reconciliation key
                     Whether the amount contains charges
                     Whether the amount contains taxes
                     Posting type (taking back payment, new receivables)


          © SAP AG 1999




   Default values on the header screen:
     The current date is defined.
     The last values entered (if available) are inserted automatically for the company code, currency, and
       business area.
     The document type, clearing reason, and the selection categories are stored in Customizing.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                    64
13.65
    Returns Entry


            New                                                                         Returns
           returns            Create               Close              Post                lot
             lot                                                                        complete




           The essential entries are:
                    Amount
                    Returns reason
                    Payment document number




         © SAP AG 1999




 Enter one line of data for each return during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be recorded in
  Customizing. You can choose other line structures in Extras --> Screen variants
 By pressing the Additional specifications key, you can branch to the detail screen of the selected item.
  You can enter additional data on the payment, if required.
 On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for further
  clarification.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                   65
13.66
   Returns Lot: Change


           New                                                    Returns
          returns       Create        Close         Post            lot
            lot                                                  complete



                        Change



          Items can be deleted and added if the returns lot is still
           open.
          Data on items that have already been entered can also be
           corrected.
          Interrupted entry of a returns lot can be resumed using this
           function.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                                66
13.67
   Returns Lot: Close


           New                                                   Returns
          returns       Create      Close          Post            lot
            lot                                                 complete




          Closing a returns lot means that adding or deleting items is
           no longer possible.
          Corrections can still be made to returns lot items after
           closing.
          Posting cannot begin until a lot is closed.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                               67
13.68
   Returns Lot: Posting (1)


           New                                                        Returns
          returns            Create          Close     Post             lot
            lot                                                      complete




          You can decide whether postings are to be managed:
                   In dialog mode
                   In a background process
          For each return:
                   The payment document and cleared items are determined
                   The returns history is written




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                            68
13.69
   Returns Lot: Posting (2)


           New                                                   Returns
          returns            Create            Close     Post      lot
            lot                                                 complete


          Reverse the clearing in the contract account
          Generation of the returns document item
          Triggering of postings:
                   Credit institute charges
                   Further debit charges to business partner
                   Own charges
                   Tax on charges
          Setting payment and dunning blocks
          Deferral of newly open items
          Triggering of deferred payment, correspondence, workflow
        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                      69
13.70
   Returns Lot: Post-processing


           New                                                  Returns
          returns       Create       Close          Post          lot
            lot                                                complete


                                                     Post-
                                                  processing


          Clarification of return use
          Correction of returns item and restart posting for selected
           items
          Manual posting and clearing for selected items




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                           70
13.71
   Returns History



     Record of business              Basis for future handling
     management data for             of the contract account
     returns processing,             dependent on:
     including:                      - Period of examination
     - Amounts                       - Number of returns
     - Document numbers




                           Returns
                           history


        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                 IUT110                                71
13.72
   Returns: Summary



                         The utility company can configure the many settings
                          in such a way that detailed work is taken care of in
                          the background.
                         Some of these activities are:
                               Reversing the clearing for the contract account
                               Passing on charges with/without tax
                               Deferral of receivables
                               Setting payment and dunning blocks
                               Triggering correspondence




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                             72
13.73
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Dunning



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110   73
13.74
   Dunning: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

                         Describe the two-step dunning process
                         Display and explain the dunning history of a business
                          partner/contract account
                         Name some of the influential factors in dunning




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                74
13.75
   Dunning: Introduction



                         Customer payments can only be reasonably
                          controlled if they are supported by automatic
                          processes.
      SAP Utilities      If payment is delayed, dunning automatically:
                               Creates a customer letter
                               Triggers workflows (security requirement,
                                disconnection order)
                         This is a general procedure and can be adjusted to
                          company requirements and individual customers or
                          customer groups.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                           75
13.76
   Dunning: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account,
                          followed by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                   76
13.77
    Dunning: Dunning Proposal and Dunning Activities



                                   Thresholds                              Charges schema
                                 Days in arrears                             Print forms
                                 Dunning interval


     Business
      partner

     Contract
                            Determi-                                                           Post
     account                                   Generate                 Generate
                            nation of                                                        interest
                                               dunning                  dunning
       Open                   new                                                              and
                                               proposal                 activities
       items                dunning                                                          charges
                             levels
      Dunning
      history



         © SAP AG 1999




 The dunning program is divided into two runs.
 A dunning proposal is created in the first run.
 In the second run, dunning activities, in particular printing of the dunning notice, are carried out on the
  basis of the dunning proposal.
 The dunning proposal can be processed before you print the dunning notice.




(C) SAP AG                                          IUT110                                                      77
13.78
     Dunning: Influential Factors




                     Dunning procedure                              Dunning grouping




               Minimum/maximum
                    amounts
                                            Dunning process                Creditworthiness




                          Days in arrears                           Dunning frequency




          © SAP AG 1999




   A dunning procedure can be allocated to a contract account or to individual line items in the document.
    Items due for dunning are dunned according to the settings in the dunning procedure and dunning data is
    stored in the dunning history.
   A dunning can only be triggered in a dunning level if the amount of all due items of a dunning grouping
    exceeds the maximum amount stored in the dunning level.
   Days in arrears describes the minimum number of days in arrears that must elapse after the net due date
    of a receivable before a dunning letter can be created.
   Another condition for creation of a dunning letter is that the dunning frequency has been reached. To
    create another dunning letter, at least the specified number of days must have passed since the creation
    date of the last dunning letter.
   Indicator: Always dun dunning level. This means that a dunning letter is always triggered in this
    dunning level, as soon as the dunning frequency has been reached, regardless of whether the days in
    arrears and the maximum / minimum amount have been reached, or whether the dunning level has been
    raised for any items of the same dunning grouping.
   The dunning grouping key determines the criteria with which items due for dunning are additionally
    grouped during execution of a dunning run (for example, business area, contract account, division, or
    contract). Items due for dunning are always grouped according to the following criteria in the dunning
    run: business partner, dunning procedure, currency, responsible company code, and dunning letter
    recipient.


(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                 78
13.79
     Dunning Proposal for a Business Partner




                    Determine all business partner accounts
                    Read the dunning history
                    Calculate creditworthiness

                    Generate a dunning proposal
                         The new dunning level is determined
                         Dunning information is not saved for items


                    Write the dunning proposal in the dunning history




          © SAP AG 1999




   Possible start parameters for a dunning proposal:
     General selection criteria:
         Company code
         Business partner
         Contract account
         Net due date
     Dynamic selection criteria (from the business partner item contract accounting document):
         Document number
         Business area
         Contract
         Division
         Document date
         Posting date
         Currency
         All other criteria from the document item can also be used.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                         79
13.80
    Dunning: Factors That Can Be Influenced
    (Selection)



                                                              Creditworthiness
                            Dunning Levels
                                                                 weighting




             Dunning charges
                                                                              Print all items
              (Scale schema)
                                                Dunning
                                                process

                        Interest                                        Payment period



                                          Dunning activity:
                                          Customer letter
                                          Disconnection order
                                          Deactivate installment plan

        © SAP AG 1999




 Different dunning levels can be created for each dunning procedure. Dunning levels determine the
  dunning intervals, the charges schema used for determining the dunning charges and the way in which
  interest is calculated and posted. You can also record parameters at every dunning level for printing
  dunning letters, and for currency-dependent minimum/maximum amounts.
 Payment period in days. This is calculated from the dunning issue date and used for the payment target
  for a dunning letter.
  Payment target = dunning issue date + payment period
 The Print all items indicator means that all due items that meet the same criteria for the dunning
  grouping are printed on one dunning letter. Otherwise, only the items due for dunning are printed (items
  that have reached the number of days in arrears specified).
 Creditworthiness weighting is the factor used in dunning to calculate creditworthiness.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                80
13.81
   Dunning: Determination of Dunning Levels


             Where do the influential factors for dunning come from?


              Contract                      Open                Dunning
              account                       items                history

                        Dunning procedure   Due date   Last dunning date
                        Dunning grouping    Amount     Last dunning level




                                    New dunning levels

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                         81
13.82
   Dunning Levels



          Items that have not yet been dunned have dunning level 0.
          An open item receives the next highest dunning level if:
                   More than the recorded number of days in arrears have passed
                    since the due date.
                   More days have passed since the due date than the number
                    recorded for the dunning frequency.


          An item that is dunned more than once passes through the
           various dunning levels according to predefined rules.
          The highest dunning level of all items summarized in a dunning
           group determines which dunning activities are performed for
           the corresponding dunning group.


        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                  82
13.83
   Printing of Dunning Notice for a Business Partner




                        Write dunning level in the receivables items
                        Determine and post dunning charges
                        Determine and post interest

                        Determine dunning activities
                           Print dunning letter
                           Inform various recipients (legal department)
                           Start workflow


                        Update dunning history




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                      83
13.84
   Dunning: Dunning History



          Overview of all dunning levels for a
           business partner / contract account
                              Dec. 15, 2000        800 UNI
                    Jan. 01, 2001          800 UNI             Identification of the
                                                               Identification of the
                     4711 Aug. 01, 2000 DL 4 200 UNI
                                                                  dunning run
                                                                   dunning run
                Jan. 15, 2001         1200 UNI
                 4711 Aug. 01, 2000 DL 4 200 UNI
                     4712 Aug. 15, 2000 DL 4 150 UNI
           Jan. 30, 2001          1500 UNI
            4711 Aug. 01, 1996 DL 4 200 UNI
                 4712 Aug. 15, 2000 DL 4 150 UNI
                     4713 Sep. 4 2000 DL
          4711 Aug. 01, 2000 MS01, 200 UNI 3 250 UNI
            4712 Aug. 15, 1996 DL 4 150 UNI
                 4713 Sep. 01, 2000 DL 3 250 UNI
          4712 Aug. 15, 2000 MS 4 150 UNI
            4713 Sep. 01, 1996 DL 3 250 UNI
                     ...                                      Every item relevant to
                                                               Every item relevant to
          4713 Sep. 01, 2000 MS 3 250 UNI
                                                               dunning has an entry
                                                               dunning has an entry
                      ...                                     in the dunning history
                                                              in the dunning history
                            4729 Jan. 16, 2001 DL 1 120 UNI
                ...
                      4729 Jan. 16, 1999 DL 1 120 UNI
          ...
                4729 Jan. 16, 1997 DL 1 120 UNI
          4729 Jan. 16, 2001 MS 1 120 UNI

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                84
13.85
   Dunning: Summary



                         Dunning in Contract Accounts Receivable and
                          Payable provides flexible dunning that can be
                          adjusted to meet the utility company's requirements.
                         Customer payments can be controlled efficiently.
                          The following activities are supported:
                               Customer letter
                               Creation of disconnection orders
                               Charging fees and/or taxes




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                             85
13.86
   Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:
   Deferral and Installment Plan



          Overview
          Documents
          Account display
          Payments
          Returns
          Dunning
          Deferral and installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                           IUT110    86
13.87
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Objectives



                        At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

                         Defer items in contract accounts receivable
                          and payable.
                         Create an installment plan.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                              87
13.88
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Introduction



                         Some customers are not able to keep up with
                          payments to the utility company

      SAP Utilities
                         In this situation, installment plans or deferrals can be
                          arranged for one or more receivables in order to:
                               Accommodate the customer

                               Guarantee payment




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                   88
13.89
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Business Scenario



                         Post request for energy consulting

                         Display account balance

                         Payment by check for account balance

                         The check was not covered:
                          Return with charge

                         Dunning proposal for contract account, followed
                          by dunning

                         Arrangement of installment plan




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                            89
13.90
   Deferral



          A deferral is a document change.

          Items are deferred by entering the date until which they are to
           be deferred in the "Deferral date" field.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                                 90
13.91
   Installment Plan: Characteristics



          Any number of open items as the basis of aninstallment
           agreement
          Interest calculation for installment plans
          Installment plan charges
          Letter to the customer
          Change, add and delete individualinstallments
          Deactivation of installment plans




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110                        91
13.92
   Installment Plan Category



         Pre-definable installment plan categories simplify creation of
         new installment plans.


                     Number of                          Installment
                    installments                          interval



                                   Installment plan
                                       category



                        Rounding                      Interval category
                         amount

        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                           92
13.93
   Installment Plan: Item Selection



                              Selection of
                              open items
                                   for
                              installment
                                  plan




    Simplified selection                     Manual compilation
                                             from the list of open
     All    open items                      items




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                       IUT110                              93
13.94
   Deferral and Installment Plan: Unit Summary



                         In Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable, open
                          items can be easily deferred by making a document
                          change.
                         Simple procedure for creating and managing
                          installment plans.
                              Installment plan categories make it easier to create
                               installment plans on the basis of an enterprise model.
                              Either all open items, or any selection of open items,
                               can be included.
                              Installment plan items are statistical document items
                               that are saved in repetition groups.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                                     94
13.95Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Manual document entry

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Manually post a document
                        • Interpret the information contained in a FI-CA document and how
                          to access this information


                     You are an assistant in accounts receivable accounting in your company.
                     Your colleague has just completed an energy consultation. You now have
                     to post the corresponding receivable to the customer’s account.



   1-1       Posting receivables
             1-1-1 Specify the menu path that you would use to post a document.
                    _____________________________________________________

             1-1-2 Using parameters (optional)
                    Display the help information for the Company code field.
                    From this help screen, take a look also at the technical information for the
                    Company code field.
                    What is the parameter for the Company code field?
                    _____________________________________________________

             1-1-3 Using parameters (optional)
             You can simplify the posting of documents if you preassign user parameters to fields
                   for which you (almost) always use the same values.
                    Enter the following parameters in your user settings.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              95
       Parameters Value             Meaning

       FWS                          UNI is automatically entered in the Currency field.

       BUK                U300      U300 is automatically entered in the Company code
                                           field.


                      Your user profile is located under System → User profile →
                      Own data. Choose the Parameters tab.
                      Ensure that you use capital letters.
                      The content of the screen Post Document: Initial Screen must
                      first be refreshed before your user profile can be entered
                      automatically.


             1-1-4 Now post a receivable for today’s energy consultation.
                   Use the following data:

             Data field           Contents
             Document date        Today’s date        Is pre-filled
             Posting date         Today’s date        Is pre-filled
             Reconciliation key 01-yymmdd-##          yymmdd = today’s date
             Currency                                 User parameters or user entries
             Company code         U300                User parameters or user entries
             Jurisdiction code                        Tax jurisdiction code used


             1-1-5 Change to entry screen for document items. For your business partner, enter a
                   miscellaneous posting for the energy consultation. In doing so, try to make as
                   few entries as possible, to see which data the system determines automatically.

             Data field          Contents
             BusPartner          TB130110##
                                 Misc. postings                   Use F4 for help
             SubT                Miscellaneous posting - debit    Use F4 for help
             Amount


                    Do not save your entries
             1-1-6 Clarify your receivable using the following text: “Energy consultation of
                   <today’s date>”.

(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                         96
                     To add the text you must switch to another screen variant,
                     SAP02, (using the Screen variant icon or the menu path
                     Settings  Screen variant). For further options, see solutions.




             1-1-7 Post the document and note the document number.
             _____________________________________________________

             1-1-8 Display the document.
             1-1-9 Display the document item.
             1-1-10 What information does the general ledger provide?

             Data field          Value         Origin
             Company code
             G/L Account
             Act. determ. ID


             1-1-11 Name three specifications from the document or the document item that control
                    the determination of account assignment in financial accounting.
                    1. __________________________________________________
                    2. __________________________________________________
                    3. __________________________________________________

             Are there any other criteria for determination?

             1-2    True or false?
             1-2-1 A document is always assigned to just one contract account.
                    _____________________________________________________
             1-2-2 Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract
                   Accounts Receivable and Payable.
                    _____________________________________________________
             1-2-3 A document contains all the information for posting in financial accounting.
                    _____________________________________________________
             1-2-4 The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date.
                    _____________________________________________________
             1-2-5 The reconciliation key can differ for each document item.

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                            97
             _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110                            98
                                                                                     Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Display account balance

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Handle the many options of the account display, i.e. you will be
                          able to display the exact item you want to display and in the way in
                          which you want to view it.
                        • Provide information on the balance and development of a customer
                          account
                        • Provide information on the items of a customer account
                        • Use the navigation options in the item display
                     Two customers want to meet with you. Before you initiate the contact,
                     you would like to obtain a detailed picture of the recent transactions for
                     each account.




   2-1       True or false?
             2-1-1 The standard display of the items in a customer account shows all items that are
                   posted to that account.
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-1-2 The line item display can be modified to display items other than those pre-
                   configured in the standard settings.
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-1-3 The list category determines the line layout of the item display, i.e. how the
                   lines are constructed.
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-1-4 To display the items in a customer account in another line layout, you must
                   return to the initial screen.
                    _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              99
   2-2       Line item display for a business partner
             2-2-1 What is the current balance for business partner TB130110##?
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-2-2 Which items comprise the balance?
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-2-3 Have any payments already been made?
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                               100
   2-3       Navigating the document display (optional)
             2-3-1 Identify the receivable for the energy consultation for business partner
                   TB130110##.
                    Tip: Choose the correct line layout variant.
             2-4-2 Who posted the receivable?
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-4-3 Which reconciliation key was used?
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-4-4 Have any items been posted to the above document number for any other
                   business partner?
                    Tip: Use the Overview button.
                    _____________________________________________________
             2-4-5 Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation?
                    _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                        101
                                                                                   Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Payment run

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Explain the processing steps of a payment lot
                        • Post payments via a payment lot
                        • Post payment at cash desk


                     A customer comes in and would like to pay cash for an energy
                     consultation.



   3-1       Payment Lot
             3-1-1 Which steps must be carried out when processing a payment lot?
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________
                    _____________________________________________________

   3-2       True or false?
             3-2-1 If you are interrupted while working on a payment lot, you can resume work on
                   it at any time, provided that you do not close the payment lot.
                    _____________________________________________________
             3-2-2 Once the payment lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it.
                    _____________________________________________________
             3-2-3 The procedures for payment lots and check lots are identical.
                    _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                       102
   3-3       Posting a payment lot
             3-3-1 Create a payment lot (PL-yymmdd-##).
             3-3-2 Enter the search term (IUT110-##) and a bank clearing account.
             3-3-3 Enter payments for three of your business partners:

              Amount            Business partner

                                TB130210##

                                TB130220##

              1200              TB130230##


             3-3-4 Save your entries and close the payment lot.
             3-3-5 Post the payments.
             3-3-6 Check the status.
             3-3-7 Display the postings you have just carried out in the account display for each
                   business partner and note the effects of the posting.



                          Use the Payment list hotspot.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                               103
   3-4       Payment at cash desk
             3-4-1 Display the open receivables for business partner TB130110##. What is the
                   open balance?
                    _____________________________________________________
             3-4-2 Which items make up the total?
             3-4-3 Switch to payment at cash desk.
             3-4-4 Post a payment for the amount of the open balance of business partner
                   TB130110##. To do this, make the following entries:

              Recon. key            RB-yymmtdd-##
              Business partner      TB130110##
              Amount                Balance for TB130110##




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                                           104
                                                                                    Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Returns

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Post a return
                        • Define the effects of returns on payments already made



                     In accounts receivable accounting, some returns have just arrived in the
                     mail from the bank, which you now have to post.



   4-1       Returns lot
             4-1-1 Create a returns lot (RL-yymmdd-##).
             4-1-2 Enter the search term (IUT110-##). Ensure that a “B” for “document” is
                   entered in the selection type field. The fields Amounts contain bank charges
                   and Calculate charges should be activated. Switch to enter items.
             4-1-3 Enter a return for business partner TB130120##.
                    If necessary, create a second session to determine the required payment
                    document number.
                    _____________________________________________________

             4-1-4 Save the data and close the returns lot.
             4-1-5 Post the returns lot.
             4-1-6 Check the status.
             4-1-7 Switch to the account display and observe the changes.

   4-2       Returns lot with charges (optional)
             4-2-1 Repeat the steps of the previous task for a new returns lot (RN-yymmdd-##).
                   Increase the return amount by 10 UNI.
                    This time, generate a return for the payment entered for business partner
                    TB130210## in exercise 3-3-3.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                            105
                                                                                   Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Dunning

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Display and explain the dunning history for a business
                          partner/contract account.
                        • Differentiate between various influential factors for dunning and
                          describe the resultant activities.

   5-1       True or false?
             5-1-1 The dunning process is carried out using the same procedure for all the
                   company’s contract accounts .
                    _____________________________________________________

             5-1-2 The days in arrears and the dunning frequency largely determine when a due
                   open item can be dunned.
                    _____________________________________________________


   5-2       Dunning history
             5-2-1 Display the dunning history for business partner TB130220##.
                    _____________________________________________________




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                          106
                                                                                       Exercises

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Deferral and installment plan

                     At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:
                        • Defer the posting of a contract account
                        • Create an installment plan

                     A business partner telephones and asks for a deferral of an open item.
                     The business partner telephones again and would like to pay for the open
                     items in installments.
                     For this reason, you have to first defer the receivable and then create the
                     installment plan.

   6-1       Deferral
             6-1-1 Defer the open receivable of business partner TB130130## until the last day of
                   the month. Use functions from the Customer Interaction Center (CIC).
             6-1-2 Display the changes in the corresponding document resulting from the deferral.

                          Display the customer account from the navigation area of the
                          contract account.



   6-2       Creation of an installment plan
             6-2-1 Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a
                   rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner
                   TB130130##.
             6-2-2 Check that the instalment plan has been created in the account display.

                          When you display the customer account from Front Office,
                          remember that the previous settings for the list type are still
                          active. However, to display the installment plan, the
                          statistical items must also be displayed.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             107
13.96Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Manual document entry


   1-1       Posting receivables
             1-1-1 Specify the menu path that you would use to post a document.
                    Utilities industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document
                    → Post
             1-1-2 Using parameters (optional)
                    Display the help information for the Company code field.
                    From this help screen, take a look also at the technical information for the
                    Company code field.
                    What is the parameter for the Company code field?
                    1. Utilities industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Document → Post
                    2. Place the cursor in the Company code field and choose Help. To do this,
                       press F1 or the button with the yellow question mark.
                    3. Choose Technical info.
                    4. In the Parameter ID field, you will see the value BUK.
             1-1-3 Using parameters (optional)
                    You can simplify the posting of documents if you preassign user parameters to
                    fields for which you (almost) always use the same values.
                    Enter the following parameters in your user settings.
                    1. System → User profile → Own data.
                    2. Choose the Parameters tab page.
                    3. Enter the values from the table.
                    4. Save your entries by choosing Save or F11.
                    5. If you are already in the screen Post Document: Initial Screen, you must
                       update its contents so that the user settings can be entered automatically.
                       Leave the screen using Cancel or F12, confirm this using Yes and start the
                       transaction again immediately using Document Post. Your settings have
                       now been added to the Currency and Company code fields.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             108
                 Parameters Value           Meaning

                 FWS           UNI          UNI is automatically entered in the
                                            Currency field.
                 BUK           U300         U300 is automatically entered in the
                                            Company code field.

             1-1-4 Now post a receivable for today’s energy consultation.
                   Utilities industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document
                   → Post
                    Use the following data:
                    Data field              Contents           Note
                    Document date           Today’s date       Is pre-filled
                    Posting date            Today’s date       Is pre-filled
                    Reconciliation key 01-yymmdd-##            yymmdd = today’s date
                    Currency                UNI                User parameters or user entries
                    Company code            U300               User parameters or user entries

             1-1-5 Change to entry screen for document items. For your business partner, enter a
                   miscellaneous posting for the energy consultation. In doing so, try to make as
                   few entries as possible, to see which data the system determines automatically.
                    1. In the Post Document: Initial Screen, press Enter or the green checkmark
                       or the button BP item (Business partner item list).
                    2. Enter the following values:
                    Data field        Contents                           Note
                    BusPartner        TB130110##
                    Main              Misc. postings                     Use F4 for help
                    SubT              Miscellaneous posting - debit      Use F4 for help
                    Amount            116

                    3. Do not save your entries
             1-1-6 Clarify your receivable using the following text: “Energy consultation of
                   <today’s date>”.
                    To enter text
             -   Choose the screen variant SAP02 and enter the text in the text field (use the screen
                 variant icon or the menu path Settings → Screen variant.
             -   Or change to the detail display for your business partner (for example. by double-
                 clicking on the current item in the list) and enter the text under Other data.

(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                         109
                    If you have already saved the document,
                    1. Change to Document Change via the menu.
                        The document number is pre-filled.
                    2. Choose BP item (Business partner item list).
                    3. Choose the screen variant SAP02
                    4. Enter the text in the text field.
             1-1-7 Post the document and note the document number.
                    1. To post the document, you must choose Post (CTRL S).
                    2. The document number is displayed in the message line after posting.
             1-1-8 Display the document.
                    Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document
                        → Display
             1-1-9 Display the document item.
                    From the Display Document: Initial Screen, choose BP item (Business
                    partner item list) to display the document items. Another possible solution:
                    In the screen Display Document: Initial Screen, choose Enter or the green
                    checkmark. Then double-click on the summary of business partner items, or
                    select the item with the cursor and use Edit → Choose (F2) from the menu to
                    display the business partner item.
             1-1-10 What information does the general ledger provide?
                    Data field            Value            Origin
                    Company code          U300             Entered during “document
                                                           posting”
                    G/L Account           140520           Account determination
                    Act. determ. ID       01               Contract account


             1-1-11 Name three specifications from the document or the document item that control
                    the determination of account assignment in financial accounting.
                    1. Company code in the document item
                    2. Main transaction in the document item
                    3. Sub-transaction in the document item
                    Other criteria for determination are the account determination ID and the
                    division.
   1-2       True or false?
             1-2-1 A document is always assigned to just one contract account.
                    False. A document can have more than one document item, each of which can
                    be assigned to another contract account or business partner.

(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                           110
             1-2-2 Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract
                   Accounts Receivable and Payable.
                    False. The usual method of creating receivables is by invoicing.
             1-2-3 A document contains all the information for posting in financial accounting.
                    True. It is possible, that a document is grouped together with other documents
                    (via the reconciliation key), but each individual document contains information
                    for posting and offsetting in financial accounting.
             1-2-4 The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date.
                    False. These three dates may be different.
             1-2-5 The reconciliation key can differ for each document item.
                    False. For each document there is only one reconciliation key.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                             111
                                                                                     Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Display account balance


   2-1       True or false?
             2-1-1 The standard display of the items in a customer account shows all items that are
                   posted to that account.
                    False – the standard display shows all open non-statistical items.
             2-1-2 The line item display can be modified to display items other than those pre-
                   configured in the standard settings.
                    True. You define your own line item display by choosing Settings → Display/
                    Change (F6).
             2-1-3 The list category determines the line layout of the item display, i.e. how the
                   lines are constructed.
                    False. The list category determines which items are displayed in the lines.
             2-1-4 To display the items in a customer account in another line layout, you must
                   return to the initial screen.
                    False. You can change the line layout in the item display using the Line layout
                    (Shift + F4) pushbutton or via Settings → Line layout.
                    If a totals variant is active, you can double-click an item to display a more
                    detailed line layout variant. Alternatively, you can use the blue arrows
                    (provided you have activated them in your personal settings for account balance
                    display).




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                              112
   2-2       Line item display for a business partner
             2-2-1 What is the current balance for business partner TB130110##?
                    1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Account → Account Balance
                    2. Enter business partner TB130110## in the Business partn. field. The List
                       category field is in standard mode and is empty and Standard line layout –
                       acc display is displayed in the Line layout field.
                    3. Press the green checkmark (ENTER).
                    4. Choose the Totals hotspot.
                    5. The balance appears in the Total field.
             2-2-2 Which items comprise the balance?
                    Double-click on the Receivables line- or on the total line- to return to the
                    display of the receivables that are still open. Alternatively, directly choose the
                    Receivables hotspot.
             2-2-3 Have any payments already been made?
                    1. Use Back (F3) to return to the screen Account Display: Initial Screen.
                    2. Choose either a List category which displays more than only the open items
                       (using F4 help, for example List category All items) or press the Detail
                       button in the List type subscreen. Select the Cleared items field and choose
                       ENTER (green checkmark).
                    3. Return to the account display. Now all payments made are displayed.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                               113
   2-3       Navigating the document display (optional)
             2-3-1 Identify the receivable for the energy consultation for business partner
                   TB130110##.
                    Tip: Choose the correct line layout variant.
                    1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Account → Account Balance
                    2. Enter business partner TB130110## in the Business partn. field.
                    3. Press the green checkmark (ENTER).
                    4. Press the button Line layout (Shift+F4).
                    5. Choose the line layout variant TBT – Account display with document text
                       by double-clicking on it.
                    6. Now you can see which of the open receivables is the one for the energy
                       consultation (if you happened to have entered the text “Energy
                       consultation” in the corresponding exercise).
             2-3-2 Who posted the receivable?
                    1. Double-click on the receivable.
                       You are now in the screen Display Document: Item.
                    2. Choose Document header CTRL+F4.
                    3. You can read the user key of the creator from the Created by field.
             2-3-3 Which reconciliation key was used?
                    Contained in the Recon. key field in the document header.
             2-3-4 Have any items been posted to the above document number for any other
                   business partner?
                    1. Press the button Overview F7 or use Goto → Overview F7 from the menu.
                    2. You can find the number of document items in the Summarized items
                       subscreen. Preceding the Business partner items header is the number of
                       business partners (<x> Business partner items).
                    3. The number is one. Therefore, this document only contains items for one
                       business partner.
             2-3-5 Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation?
                    1. Choose the Taxes (CTRL+F6).
                    2. Here you can view the details for the tax item.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                           114
                                                                                    Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Payment run


   3-1       Payment Lot
             3-1-1 Which steps must be carried out when processing a payment lot?
                    1. Create
                    2. Close
                    3. Post

   3-2       True or false?
             3-2-1 If you are interrupted while working on a payment lot, you can resume work on
                   it at any time, provided that you do not close the payment lot.
                    True. The Change step exists for this purpose.
             3-2-2 Once the payment lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it.
                    False. While it is true that no new items can be added and items cannot be
                    deleted, existing items can be corrected.
             3-2-3 The procedures for payment lots and check lots are identical.
                    True. The only difference is that a different screen variant must be chosen for
                    the line layout, as a check number must be entered for a check, but this does not
                    happen in the screen variant for the payment lot.

   3-3       Posting a payment lot
             3-3-1 Create a payment lot (PL-yymmdd-##).
                    1. Utilities industry → Contract accounts receivable and payable →
                       Payments → Payment lot.
                    2. Enter PL-yymmdd-## in the Lot field.
                    3. Choose Create (F5).
             3-3-2 Enter the search term (IUT110-##) and a bank clearing account.
                    1. Search term: IUT110-##.
                    2. Bank clearing account: selection via the possible entries for Bank clrg acct
                       (F4 help). Choose an account enter today’s date as the value date. Enter
                       UNI in the Currency field.
             3-3-3 Enter payments for three of your business partners:

(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                             115
                    1. To enter the item, press the New items F5 pushbutton.
                    2. Ensure that the screen variant SAP01 with the description Standard (one
                       line) is activated.
                        Amount           Business partner

                        500              TB130210##

                        800              TB130220##

                        1200             TB130230##


             3-3-4 Save your entries and close the payment lot.
                    1. Choose Save (CTRL+S).
                    2. Choose Back (F3). You now see the Payment lot Create: Default Entries
                       and Status screen .
                    3. Choose Back (F3) again. You have returned to the Payment lot: Initial
                       Screen. Observe the change in status during the following activities.
                    4. Choose Close and confirm the action.
             3-3-5 Post the payments.
                    1. To do this, choose Post.
                    2. Choose Start Online.
                    3. Press the green checkmark (Continue Enter).
             3-3-6 Check the status.
                    The status should read “Postings made”.
             3-3-7 Display the postings you have just carried out in the account display for each
                   business partner and note the effects of the posting.
                    Use the skills you learned in the FI-CA2 unit “Display Account Balance”. Tip:
                    Use the Payment list hotspot.

   3-4       Payment at cash desk
             3-4-1 Display the open receivables for business partner TB130110##. What is the
                   open balance?
                    1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Account → Account Balance
                    2. Enter business partner TB130110## in the Business partn. field.
                    3. Press the green checkmark (ENTER).
                    4. Choose the Totals hotspot. The balance of open items is located in the Total
                       field.
             3-4-2 Which items make up the total?

(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                               116
                    1. Double-click on the Receivables field in the total display.
                    2. Ensure that you have chose the line layout variant TBT (Account display
                       with document text) to display the document text column.

                          Amount                Item type

                          20.00 UNI             Miscellaneous posting:
                                                Hire of energy measuring device
                          116.00 UNI            Miscellaneous posting:
                                                Energy consultation of
                                                <dd/mm/yy>
                                                (from the “Post document”
                                                exercise).


             3-4-3 Switch to payment at cash desk.
                    Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Payments
                    → Cash Account → Payment at Cash Desk.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                            117
             3-4-4 Post a payment for the amount of the open balance of business partner
                   TB130110##. To do this, make the following entries:
                    Recon. key         RB-yymmdd-## (Under Further
                                       posting specs)
                    Business partner   TB130110##
                    Amount             Balance for TB130110##


                    1. Ensure that the field Incoming cash paymt is selected.
                    2. To post the payment, choose Post item or Post item online. If you have
                       chosen Post item online, use the save button to post the item (ctrl + S).
                    3. Choose Print receipt.
                    4. Select any output device (F4 help) and choose Enter.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                        118
                                                                                   Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Returns


   4-1       Returns lot
             4-1-1 Create a returns lot (RL-yymmdd-##).
                    1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Payments → Returns Lot.
                    2. Enter RL-yymmdd-## in the Returns lot field.
                    3. Press the button Create (F5).
             4-1-2 Enter the search term (IUT110-##). Ensure that a “B” for “document” is
                   entered in the selection type field. The fields Amounts contain bank charges
                   and Calculate charges should be activated. Switch to enter items.
                    1. Search term: IUT110-##.
                    2. Choose the above settings and save them using Save (CTRL+S), if these
                       were not already chosen.
                    3. Choose New items.
             4-1-3 Enter a return for business partner TB130120##.
                    If necessary, create a second session to determine the required payment
                    document number.
                    1. System → Create session
                    2. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Account → Account Balance
                    3. Enter business partner TB130120## in the Business partn. field.
                    4. Choose the standard list category All items and line layout Account display
                       with text (IUT110).
                    5. Choose the green checkmark (ENTER).
                    6. Note the payment document number.
                    7. Close the second session: System  End session.
                    8. In the screen Returns: Enter/Maintain Lot RL-yymmdd-##, enter the
                       payment document number in the SelectionValue field. The selection type
                       should be set to B. Choose return reason 01 (Bank account overdraft).



(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                             119
                    9. Choose Enter. The amount and the return reason is determined
                       automatically.

             4-1-4 Save the data and close the returns lot.
                    1. Choose Save (CTRL+S).
                    2. Choose Back (F3). You now see the Returns: Specifications and Status:
                       Edit screen.
                    3. Choose Back (F3). You are now looking at the Returns: Request Screen.
                    4. Choose Close and confirm the action.
             4-1-5 Post the returns lot.
                    1. To do this, choose Post.
                    2. Select Start online and Immediately.
                    3. Choose OK.
             4-1-6 Check the status.
                    The status should read “Postings made”.
             4-1-7 Switch to the account display and observe the changes.
                    Use the Payment list hotspot.

   4-2       Returns lot with charges (optional)
             4-2-1 Repeat the steps of the previous task for a new returns lot (RN-yymmdd-##).
                   Increase the return amount by 10 UNI.
                    This time, generate a return for the payment entered for business partner
                    TB130210## in exercise 3-3-3.
                    Solution as for 4-1. In the account display, you will notice that the bank charges
                    contained in the return amount were posted together as one item with the utility
                    company’s charges.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             120
                                                                                  Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Dunning


   5-1       True or false?
             5-1-1 The dunning process is carried out using the same procedure for all the
                   company’s contract accounts .
                    False. The dunning procedure can be defined in the contract account and can be
                    applied even to individual items.
             5-1-2 The days in arrears and the dunning frequency largely determine when a due
                   open item can be dunned.
                    True. The days in arrears determine the minimum number of days that must
                    have passed since the due date before dunning can occur. The dunning
                    frequency defines the number of days that must have passed since the issue date
                    of the dunning letter before another dunning letter can be sent.

   5-2       Dunning history
             5-2-1 Display the dunning history for business partner TB130220##.
                    1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →
                       Account → Other Information → Dunning History.
                    2. Enter TB130220## in the Business partner field.
                    3. Press Execute F8.
                    4. The dunning history is displayed.




(C) SAP AG                                     IUT110                                           121
                                                                                    Solutions

                     Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
                     Topic: Deferral and installment plan


   6-1       Deferral
             6-1-1 Defer the open receivable of business partner TB130130## until the last day of
                   the month.
                    1. Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer
                       Interaction → Customer Interaction Center.
                    2. Enter TB130130## in the field Business Partner (in the search criteria of
                       the data finder). Choose Enter to display the business partner’s data. Then
                       choose Confirm partner.
                    3. The business partner environment is displayed in the navigation area. Select
                       the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose Post
                       deferral.
                    4. In the Deferral field, enter the last date of the month.
                    5. Choose ENTER.
                    6. Enter text relating to the customer contact.
                    7. Save the contact (Save or CTRL + S).
             6-1-2 Display the changes in the corresponding document resulting from the deferral.

                          Display the customer account from the navigation area of the
                          contract account.


                    1. Select the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and
                       choose the customer account. Double-clicking on the open receivables
                       brings you to the detail display of the document.
                    2. The deferral date you have just entered is now visible in the Deferral to
                       field of the Basic data subscreen.
                    3. Return to the CIC by choosing Back (F3) twice.

   6-2       Creation of an installment plan
             6-2-1 Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a
                   rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner
                   TB130130##.

(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             122
                    1. Utilities Industry  Customer Service  Front Office/Customer
                       Interaction Center  Customer Interaction Center
                    2. Enter TB130130## in the field Business partner (in the search criteria).
                       Choose Enter to display the business partner’s data. Then choose Confirm
                       partner.
                    3. The business partner environment is displayed in the navigation area. Select
                       the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose Create
                       Installment plan.
                    4. Choose all open items by pressing the Select all (Shift+F7)button.
                    5. Enter today’s date in the Start date field.
                    6. Enter 10 in the Rounding amount field.
                    7. Enter 5 in the No. of instmts field.
                    8. Enter 2 in the Instlm. interval field.
                    9. Enter 2 in the Interval cat. field.
                    10. Choose Installment plan or ENTER.
                    11. Check the number of installments and the intervals between them.
                    12. Choose Save (CTRL+S).
                    13. Enter a text relating to the customer contact.
                    14. Save the contact by pressing Save (Ctrl+S).
             6-2-2 Check that the instalment plan has been created in the account display.

                          When you display the customer account from the CIC,
                          remember that the previous settings for the list type are still
                          active. However, to display the installment plan, the
                          statistical items must also be displayed.
                    Select the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose the
                    customer account. If no items are selected, the statistical items display is not
                    activated under list type. You can choose another list type on the initial screen
                    for account balance display.




(C) SAP AG                                      IUT110                                             123
14
     Waste Industry



          Contents:

           Solution map and integration model for the waste
            industry
           Areas involved and their focus of activities
           Technical master data for the waste industry
           Functions that have been implemented
           Planned functions




         © SAP AG 1999




 The Waste Management component allows you to map and settle periodic and aperiodic waste disposal
  services for residential and non-residential customers. Logistics and billing-related business processes
  are supported here.
 The container forms the basis for the settlement. This is usually emptied periodically by a waste disposal
  company. Settlement takes into account container and premise data.




(C) SAP AG                                        IUT110                                                   1
14.2
   Waste Industry: Unit Objectives



                       At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

                        Describe terms and contexts that relate to waste
                         in the mySAP Waste Industry.




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                             2
14.3
   Solution Map and Integration Model for the Waste
   Industry

    Enterprise Management                                 Business
                                                           Business
                              Strategic Enterprise
                              Strategic Enterprise                                                      Financial
                                                                                                        Financial              Regulatory
                                                                                                                               Regulatory
                                                       Intelligence &
                                                        Intelligence &          Controlling
                                                                                Controlling
                                 Management
                                  Management                                                           Accounting
                                                                                                       Accounting              Reporting
                                                                                                                                Reporting
                                                     Data Warehousing
                                                     Data Warehousing
    Customer Relationship
    Management                   Customer
                                 Customer        Market Research
                                                 Market Research          Product
                                                                          Product        Marketing
                                                                                         Marketing            Sales
                                                                                                               Sales               Sales
                                                                                                                                    Sales
                                  Service
                                  Service          & Analysis
                                                    & Analysis           Marketing
                                                                         Marketing      Management
                                                                                        Management          Management
                                                                                                            Management            Channels
                                                                                                                                  Channels

    Installation
    Management                      Technology &
                                     Technology &             Plant Maintenance &
                                                               Plant Maintenance &            Decommissioning
                                                                                                                          Industrial Hygiene
                                                                                                                           Industrial Hygiene
                              Installation Construction       Service Management              Decommissioning                 And Safety
                               Installation Construction      Service Management                                              And Safety
    Management of Waste
    Master Data                   Waste-Specific
                                  Waste-Specific                  Inventory &
                                                                   Inventory &                Maintenance &
                                                                                              Maintenance &                 RBS Sites &
                                                                                                                            RBS Sites &
                                   Master Data
                                   Master Data               Warehouse Management
                                                             Warehouse Management             Plant Maintenance
                                                                                              Plant Maintenance             Geo Server
                                                                                                                             Geo Server


    Waste Disposal Services        Container
                                   Container                 Bulk
                                                              Bulk              Residential
                                                                                Residential         Cleaning Service &
                                                                                                     Cleaning Service &          Special
                                    Service                                                                                       Special
                                    Service                  Waste
                                                             Waste                Waste
                                                                                  Waste             Winter Maintenance
                                                                                                    Winter Maintenance           Services
                                                                                                                                 Services
    Waste-Specific Cross
    Applications                                                            Weight Data System
                                                                            Weight Data System                            Disposal Regulations
                                                                                                                          Disposal Regulations
                              Vehicle & Resource
                              Vehicle & Resource            Routing
                                                            Routing          & Daily Business
                                                                             & Daily Business          Confirmation
                                                                                                       Confirmation       & Dangerous Goods
                                                                                                                           & Dangerous Goods
                              Planning
                              Planning                                           Statistics
                                                                                 Statistics                                   Management
                                                                                                                              Management


    Revenue Management                                      Guarantor
                                                            Guarantor                              Accounts Receivable
                                                                                                   Accounts Receivable           Billing
                                                                                                                                  Billing
                                    Billing
                                    Billing                                      Invoicing
                                                                                  Invoicing
                                                             Billing
                                                              Billing                                  & Payable
                                                                                                        & Payable           External Services
                                                                                                                            External Services


   Business Support            Human Resource
                               Human Resource                                                          Fixed Asset
                                                                                                        Fixed Asset           Real Estate
                                                                                                                               Real Estate
                                                           Procurement
                                                           Procurement           Treasury
                                                                                  Treasury
                                Management
                                 Management                                                            Management
                                                                                                       Management             Management
                                                                                                                              Management



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                                     IUT110                                                                            3
14.4
    Integration Model for mySAP Waste Industry




                         Regional structure             Profitability analysis


                                                     Contract/
                                                     Billing                          Contract
                                      SAP                                Invoicing      Accounts
                           Front      Business
                                                       Contract/                       Receivable
                           Office     Partner
                                                     Billing                          & Payable


                      Container               Vehicle               Driver

                  Route Planning               GIS              Weighting data




               IS
                IS           SD
                             SD        FI
                                        FI       MM/
                                                 MM/          CO-
                                                              CO-                HR
                                                                        BC
                                                                        BC              CSP
              Waste
              Waste          CS
                             CS        CA
                                       CA        PM
                                                 PM           PA
                                                               PA




         © SAP AG 1999




 The integration model shows which connections to other SAP modules (such as SD/SM, FI/CA and so
  on) and to external systems (such as route planning and geographical information systems) are
  established by the mySAP Waste Industry solution.
 The Billing Engine (IS-U billing master data) is used for regular services and SD billing functions are
  used for unusual services.




(C) SAP AG                                                IUT110                                            4
14.5
     mySAP Waste Industry : Involved Areas




                                Industry Solution - Waste



                           EH&S WA - Waste Management




         © SAP AG 1999




   EH&S Environment, Health & Safety
    The EH&S component covers the areas environment, health, and safety.
    The Waste Management component of EH&S is planned for Release 2.7 of EH&S.




(C) SAP AG                                    IUT110                             5
14.6
   Focus Areas of IS-Waste - Waste Industry

        SAP IS-W/LOG
                                                                         n
         Management of specific master data for waste disposal and cleani g
          services/winter maintenance.
         Preconfigured business processes: Create and display orders, enter
          completion confirmations, management of bulk waste and so on.
         Generic interfaces to the route planning system, geographical
          information systems, and weighing data systems.
         Vehicle and resource planning
        SAP IS-W/BIL/ICA
         Flat-rate and service-related billing Special billing systems that
          have been designed to cope with mass data.
         Invoicing and accounting




       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                              IUT110                                 6
14.7
     Focus Areas of EH&S WA - Waste Management



            Disposal of waste that requires monitoring or special
             monitoring in accordance with international statutory
             regulations, and light commercial waste
            Dispatch note
            Internal/external waste disposal
            Administration of waste approval
            Creation of waste balances and waste management concepts
            Management of master data




          © SAP AG 1999




   Waste disposal is performed in accordance with international statutory regulations:
     Germany: Waste Avoidance, Recycling and Disposal Act.
     USA: United States Code, Code of Federal Regulations (40CFR)




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                 7
14.8
    The Waste Disposal Cycle with EH&S

                                                                       R/3 mail
                Enter disposal
                                                                       purchase requisition
                  document                                             EH&S waste generation


                                  Settlement,              Regist-
                                  assessment               ration

                                                                           Determine WD channels

             Check bill                                                     Inquiry/offer
                                                                            info record
                                                                            waste approval
                                        Waste disposal


                                                                       Choose disposer/transporter
         Delivery/disposal
                                                                               Standard source
       Print delivery note                                                     determination
       Print disposal document                                                 EH&S waste generation

                                                                             Outline contract
                                                                             Purchase order/
     CO transfer          Process monitoring        Disposal processing      scheduling
                                                                             (returns)delivery
        © SAP AG 1999
                                                                             Assigned WE




 Components of mySAP Waste Industry including integration of EH&S are used to represent the waste
  disposal cycle in individual sub-process steps from waste registration to settlement.
 Master data that has been recorded in the vendor master record is used to perform legal checks on the
  waste disposal company. such as checking the licence for disposal of hazardous waste




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                   8
14.9
   Data Model – Container Service (Simplified)

                                Business
                                                         Regional
                                 partner
                                                         structure
                               Customer


                                                       Waste disposal
                               Contract                   object
                               account
                                                        Func. loc.



                               Contract                 Premise



                                             Object
                                           allocation


                         Container         Container          Container
                         category                             location
                         Material          Equipment           Func. loc.


                                             Service
                                                                   Route
                                           frequency


                        IS-         SD /                     PM/
                                               FI-CA                        CA
                       Waste        CS                       MM
       © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                   IUT110                              9
14.10
   Technical Master Data I


       Waste disposal object
             A waste disposal object is usually a building, but can also be a
             piece of property or other facility, for which a utility serviceis
             provided.
             It is managed as a functional location in the Plant Maintenance (PM)
             component.
       Premise
             A premise is a spatially enclosed unit where waste is generated,
                                                                             c
             such as an apartment or factory for which a waste disposal servi e
             is to be provided. The disposal object comprises one or more
             premises.
       Container location
                                                                            h
             The container location is the place in a disposal object in whic the
             containers are installed.
             It is managed as a functional location in the Plant Maintenance (PM)
             component.


        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                  IUT110                                  10
14.11
   Technical Master Data II



          Object allocation
              The billing conditions for a container or cleaning object are
              maintained in the object allocation. The container or cleaning
                                                                             ct
              object is also allocated to a contract and a premise in the obje
              allocation.
          Container category
              The container category groups together containers with the
              same characteristics (data).
              It is managed as a material with a material number in the
              Materials Management (MM) component.
          Container
              The container is an item which has to be emptied.
              It is managed as a piece of equipment with a serial number in
              the Plant Maintenance (PM) component.



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                 IUT110                                 11
14.12
   Technical Master Data III



          Service frequency
              Frequency with which a service is performed for a container or
              cleaning object. The service frequency can be maintained for each
              container in an IS-Waste contract or SD contract or for each cleaning
              object or sub-object in an IS-Waste contract.
          Route
              A route defines a regional combination for several containers or
              cleaning objects for which a service is to be performed.
          Container portions
              A container can be assigned to several customers or premises usi g  n
              container portions. The customer is billed for their portion of the
                                                                               ²
              container using various criteria, such as number of persons/ m per
              premise (household).




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                                      12
14.13
   Container Management: Integration



                  Container management                                    Logistics

                        Container category                                 Material

                            Container                                    Equipment


                          Technical data                                 Purchasing
                 Container size, container volume,               Purchase order, goods receipt
                 loading information, dimensions
                                                                 Inventory management
                            Allocation
                 Container category for vehicle type,            Warehouse Management
                            container for
                  route, containers for customers
                                                                   Maintenance/ Check
                                                                 Planning, maintenance, cleaning
                        Container service
                  Organization, order, completion
                          confirmations                           Classification system




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                              IUT110                                     13
14.14
    Interface to Route Planning System




       IS-W/CCS - SD/CS                                                  Route planning
                                                                            system
                                             Driver data

                                             Vehicle data                 Determination of
                                                                          Determination of
            Creation and                                                   possible routes
                                                                           possible routes
           maintenance of                  Container data                 (sorted/unsorted)
                                                                          (sorted/unsorted)
            a periodic or
          aperiodic service                  Service data
                                                                             Sorting an
                                                                              Sorting an
                                           Allocation data                  existing route
                                                                            existing route

            Allocation of a
          route according to               Possible route                      All routes
                                                                               All routes
          service frequency                                                 fully optimized
                                                                            fully optimized
                                           Optimized route




        © SAP AG 1999




 Initial situation: The geographical coordinates (x/y coordinates, time zone) of any object in the SAP
  system are determined, validated and recorded in the SAP system using a geographical coordination tool.
  Both internal and external applications can then access this data. Examples of this include route
  planning, resource planning, facility management.
 A generic interface is used to transfer all data that has been maintained in the SAP System (such as
  driver, vehicle, container, container address, service dates, various allocations) to an external route
  planning system. Planning or optimization of the route occurs in this system. A BAPI is then used to
  load the route determined by the route planning system with a specific service date into the SAP System.
  A sequence number within a route can also be loaded into the system. This planning can also be
  performed manually.




(C) SAP AG                                       IUT110                                                14
14.15
    Waste Disposal Orders




                                Display/
                                Change                       In
                                                                                  Create
        Service frequency
                                                            paper
                                                            form
                                                                                  invoice



                                                   t
                                                 pu
                                               ut
                                              O
        Create waste                                                           Conf-
                                                                             irmation
          disposal
           order                                Ou
                                                  tpu
                               Delete                t

                                                              In file form
         Route




         © SAP AG 1999




You can display and change the waste disposal orders that have been created.
 Waste disposal orders are generated on the basis of the dates in the service frequency. A waste disposal
  order is subdivided into one header record at route level and 1 to n object records at container level. You
  can delete waste disposal orders following creation. You can use a selection parameter to control
  whether orders that have been confirmed are to be deleted.
 You may want to change the date on which the service is to be performed or the standard personnel who
  have been maintained for a route and who are to perform the service. You can also delete the service for
  a particular container/customer within the route.
 Once the waste disposal service has been performed, the individual who has performed it confirms that it
  has taken place and billing and invoicing are then performed on the basis of this confirmation.




(C) SAP AG                                         IUT110                                                 15
14.16
   Process: Container Delivery / Removal




          The CIC is used to notify the customer by telephone of container
           delivery/removal.
                                                                          e
          An order for delivery/removal of one or more containers is creat d.
          A service order (PM-CS) is generated automatically in the background.
          Once the container delivery/removal has been performed, the numb   er
           (and serial number if required) of the containers that have been
           delivered or removed and the time required to do so is confirmed .
          The customer is billed and invoiced on the basis of this confirmation.



        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                                     16
14.17
   Fleet Management



     A vehicle can be created as a piece of equipment of
      a particular equipment category and vehicle type
     Fleet Management allows you to manage fleets of vehicles
     Allocation of goods to a vehicle
     Form transport units from several compartments
     It is possible to maintain vehicle-specific data, such
      as the maintenance cycle, average consumption
      and load weight




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110                  17
14.18
   Implemented Functions I



          Container management
                   Serialization
                   Container portions
          Business to customer scenario
          Waste disposal-specific role
          Route
          Difficulties
          Premise




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                               IUT110   18
14.19
   Implemented Functions II



          Service types
          Container delivery
          Unique services
          Cleaning services and winter maintenance
          Bulk waste
          Vehicle and resource planning
          Container services




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                         IUT110             19
14.20
   Planned Functions for mySAP Utilities 4.64



          Service-related billing
          Customer-specific prices
          Integration of EH&S
          Integration of IS-Waste with SAP
           CRM and SAP BW




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                            IUT110    20
14.21
   Waste Industry: Summary



                        You are now able to:

                         Describe the special terms and contexts and
                          individual functions of waste management in
                          IS-U/CCS.




        © SAP AG 1999




(C) SAP AG                                IUT110                        21

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:5405
posted:4/30/2010
language:English
pages:523